Home

User guide for Web site administrators

1. ceceeees 198 Google Checkout tranSactions ccccccscscscececcececececeecececs 198 Search for Google Checkout transSactions cccececescecseees 199 CTC K QING BUY serceto E E 199 Payment process from the customer s point of view 199 ClickandBuy traNnSactiONS cececcecececscscscsccecscscecececscsceees 199 Searching for ClickandBuy tranSactions ccecscscsecececeees 200 FiOS WONG E oane E TEE EE E 200 Payment process from the customer viewpoint esssssesesssssesee 200 Atos Worldline Transactions ssssesessssesossssesessesoseesoseeseso 200 Search for Atos Worldline transactions eesssssssssoesessesessesse 200 SOTONU DErWEISUNE crarcsrniiueneiena e E e 201 Payment process from the customer s point of view 201 Sofort berweisung tranSactiOnS cccccscscecsccccscscececcscesecs 201 Search for Sofort berweisung tranSactions cccccsceceeees 201 USI Cs eonte 201 OBC WanSa CliOMSicrsvswce e EE eaaeeedaeosen 202 Search for HSBC tranSactions cccsccecscececscscscscseecececeees 202 User guide for Web site administrators Page 9 Table of Contents MOMEVDOOK CMS custtssansvateconsacesinaninensnesiediserbacdacssatilecosiedierss 202 Payment process from the customer viewpoint 0ee00 203 Moneybookers transactions ccscsccecscscececscscscscsccecscecsees 203 Search for Moneybookers tranSactiOnsS ccccccecssece
2. General The general settings are edited as described in General on page 143 Save your entries by clicking Save Privacy policy Since you receive and record personal information from your customers you must inform your customers of the ways this information is being used and saved This is a legal requirement in many countries You can use the Privacy policyto display the relevant notification to your customer The privacy policy must be readily available to the customer A corresponding page element exists to do this For more information see Page elements and navigation on page 181 Note You can set up the order process so that the unregistered customers must confirm the privacy policy before purchasing Customers who register must accept the privacy policy as part of the registra tion form See also S gning in on page 58 Caution You should review the default privacy policy and adapt it if necessary to the current require ments of your Web site or replace it with your own privacy policy General The general settings are edited as described in General on page 143 Save your entries by clicking Save Business hours This page shows your visitors the times or hours during which you usually offer your services These times are set for the Web site see Business hours on page 55 Times that are specifically allocated for individual resources in the booking system are only valid for the corresponding resources For
3. Caution When you delete an attribute all the product data contained in this attribute is lost Product type details General Page Products Product types product type General The name is language dependent enter a value for every defined language Save your entries by clicking Save Product type details Attributes Page Products Product types product type Attributes The table lists all the attributes which have been created for this product type To display the details of an attribute click the attribute name You can set the sequence using the sorting key in the last column of the table For more details see Sorting using key on page 28 To create a new attribute proceed as described in Adding records on page 26 Save your entries by clicking Save To delete an attribute proceed as described in Deleting entries on page 26 The attributes which have been inherited from the basic product type cannot be deleted here See also base product type on page 122 Attribute Details Page Products product product type Attributes attribute The various fields have the following meanings Table 72 fields for attributes Field name Description Field type Example Entry field alpha TentWeight numeric Visible See Visibility on page 31 Support HTML format Text attribute setting see Attribute Option button i types on page 32 Use this to determine whether the texts that
4. 3 When the product list is displayed continue as described in step 2 of Product variation assistant on page 115 Extending manually To extend existing variations of a product with an additional variation attribute manually proceed as fol lows 1 Extend the product type of the master product with an additional attribute with value selection and en ter the variation values for this attribute 2 Switch to the Variation attributes section of the Variations tab in the product details of the master pro duct Here you can see the new attribute with the corresponding values 3 Select the values for which you wish to generate variation products Save your entries by clicking Save 4 The existing variation products must also be assigned a value for the new attribute In the next step select the value that is to be used for the existing variations Save your entries by clicking Save 5 Proceed as described in Manual creation on page 116 from step 5 Product details Prices Page Products product Prices For every product you can create bulk prices and discounts as well as a list price To do this a price list must already exist see Price lists on page 124 You can configure the following price reductions Bulk discount prices see Bulk discount on page 118 Value discount see Value discount on page 119 User guide for Web site administrators Page 117 Products Product details Prices As soon as you h
5. For registered customers deleting from the list only removes the assignment to the campaign The rest of the customer data remains intact Page 212 User guide for Web site administrators Newsletter campaigns Marketing Importing addressees Use this function to add subscriber lists prepared elsewhere The data must exist in a simple text file with individual values are separated by a specified delimiter When creating the file orient yourself on the ex ample shown on the page The various fields have the following meanings Table 138 general fields fora newsletter campaign Field name Description Field type Example Delimiter Selection of the delimiter used to di Drop down menu vide data fields in the import file The default setting matches the current regional setting in the administration Enter the name of the import file in this Entry field alpha C temp import csv field Either enter the name of the file numeric with its path directly or click Browse to search for the file Click Import to begin the import Addressee search Use the search to find a specific group of addressees or a specific addressee For basic information on us ing the search function see Search on page 28 The search only applies to the current campaign Subscription from the Web site Registered users can view the available campaigns on the Web site in the My Account section under News etterand can subscribe to the newsletter T
6. Regions Regions are the foundation for area specific delivery and payment methods You can use them to define which delivery and payment methods are available to your customers in various countries The regions are based on countries that you set under Settings gt Country Settings gt Countries For more on this see Countries on page 88 These countries can be assigned to regions During the order process the country from the delivery and invoice address is checked for assignment to a region The table lists all the regions already created To open the Details for a region click its ID To create a new region enter the name of the region in the entry field in the last row Save your entries by clicking Save Assign the respective countries to the region details For more information see Regions De tails General on page 90 To delete a region select the corresponding table entry and click Delete To assign a delivery or payment method to a specific region do the following 1 Add the country to the country list for the region in Settings gt Country settings gt Countries For more on this see Countries Seite 88 2 Create a new region 3 Select the corresponding countries in the region details For more information see Regions Details General on page 90 4 Open the delivery or payment method and select the desired region from the Allow usage for following addresses drop down menu Save your entries by clickin
7. The History list contains links to the most recently visited pages that you have called up in the Administra tion area The page last opened is displayed in bold at the beginning of the list To activate the recording of history and to display the list click the link Record and display history To deactivate the recording of history and to display the list click the link Stop and hide history If the list is hidden the history is not recorded further although the existing list is retained until you sign out of the Administration area By default the history function is deactivated To empty the list click the link Empty history When you sign out the history is cleared To copy a link from the history into your favourites click the F icon For more information see Favorites below Favorites This area contains links to your favourite pages in the administration area This allows you to open these pages directly The following options are available for saving pages to your favourites Pages can be added from the A storyarea See History above Page 22 User guide for Web site administrators Sections Basic principles The name of the current page is shown as the bottom entry under Favourites f the page has not yet been entered into the favourites list the entry takes the form of a link You can click this link to add the current page to your favourites To remove an individual entry from the list click the
8. The following functions are available User guide for Web site administrators Page 39 Basic principles WYSIWYG editor Table 8 table manipulation functions Button Function Table properties The basic parameters of the table are displayed and can be edited E a properties For more information see Edit cell properties below Aac row above current row A new row is inserted above the current row is column on the left A new column is inserted to the left of the current column 7a A column Current column is deleted sni cells For more information see Merge split cells on page 41 cells For more information see Merge split cells on page 41 E Edit cell properties If you want to edit the properties of a cell place the cursor in the cell and click You can edit the prop erties in the new window see Figure 17 Cell properties x General Align Elements Align centre Celtype Data cell w Vertical alignment Top we Frame colour Background colour Update cell Figure 17 Cell properties The various fields have the following meanings Table 9 Cell properties Field Comment Align elements Horizontal alignment of the text in the cell Vertical alignment Vertical alignment of the text in the cell wah OSOSOSOSOSOSOSCSCSC it S e Border colour The border colour of the cell overwrites that of the table for that cell Use the colour selector in or
9. This allows you to stipulate which payment variants you offer to your customers on the T Com platform The selected methods will be displayed to your customers on the T Com payment page They can select a method according to preference 4 Select credit cards You can display the logos of credit cards you accept with T Pay in your shop To do so select the check boxes of the respective credit cards Note The credit card logos are placed on the Web page and displayed using a T Com page element For more on working with page elements see Page elements and navigation on page 181 Save your entries by clicking Save Caution f you have entered incorrect data in section 2 transactions will trigger an e mail event You will receive an e mail containing an error message To enable this you must enter a suitable recipient address under the e mail settings for the 7 Pay Incorrect settings event For more information about e mail events see E mail settings on page 90 Payment method with PayPal The basics about working with PayPal can be found in PayPal on page 195 Click the Create new PayPal account link to call up the page used for registering with PayPal In the ma field you should enter the e mail address that you provided when registering with PayPal and that you use to sign in to PayPal Save your entries by clicking Save PayPal Pro payment method The basics about working with PayPal Pro can be found in Pay
10. Upload the image via the image upload field in the bottom row of the table See also Uploading im ages on page 43 In the table you can see all the images that you have uploaded If you want to display an image in the product details check the corresponding check box in the Vis b e column The display sequence of the im ages on the Web site is defined in the Sorting column See also Sorting using key on page 28 Save your entries by clicking Save To the right of the table is the image display as seen by visitors to the Web site The lower portion displays the list of the images that have been marked as visible The upper section has the following functions Display an individual image To do this click an image in the image list Start and control the slideshow If you move the mouse over the preview area a bar containing controls is displayed see Figure 23 Use these tools to control the slideshow and view the images in their origi nal size Figure 23 Control elements for slideshow The control elements have the following meanings Table 70 Print preview controls Format Description Starts the slideshow The images are played back in the sequence in which they are listed in the table The Vis b e marker must be set Shows the previous image A running slideshow is paused Shows the next image A running slideshow is paused c The current image is shown in its original size A running slideshow is paused
11. eBay Settings General On this page you can configure how items placed on eBay effect your stock level As well as this you can define a default feedback text which will be used for completed items The various fields have the following meanings Table 62 fields for general eBay settings Field name Description Field type Example Reduce stock level Using the specified options you can Option button configure when the stock level for an eBay product is reduced Default setting for Default setting for feedback for com Option field Transaction perfect feedback pleted eBay items Entry field alpha Because of eBay rules as aselleryou numeric can only provide positive ratings Save your entries by clicking Save eBay accounts Page Settings eBay Settings eBay accounts Every eBay account is based on an eBay country platform This determines certain settings such as cate gory lists or available delivery and payment methods The table lists all the eBay accounts you have created To open the details of an account click the name Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 To create a new account proceed as described in Adding records on page 26 Before creating an account you must configure the necessary language and currency See also Country settings on page 87 Save your entries by clicking Save To delete a
12. 25 49 28 130 126 53 47 53 Page 243 Index Shopping basket Actions Add Notification messages Settings Shopping basket discount Shopping com Sidebar Soforttberweisung Payment process Search transactions Transactions Sorting key Status Styles Templates T Tables Adding records Batch Processes in Tables Deleting entries Paging Selecting in tables Sorting using column headings Sorting with the sorting key Working with Entries Tax areas Tax calculation Tax classes Tax matrix Tax model Text fields HTML WYSIWYG editor Text with value selection Use T Pay Account set up General Payment process Search transactions Page 244 93 94 95 93 126 224 21 80 201 201 201 28 53 175 176 26 26 ay 26 28 27 28 28 26 61 60 61 60 61 35 35 36 33 74 4 194 194 195 Transactions 194 Tray 21 Trusted Shops 226 U Updating Web pages 54 Uploading images 43 User management 56 Registration 58 Search 60 Signing in 58 Utilisation 55 V Variations 113 Creating new 115 Cross selling 121 Extending 117 Extending manually 117 Extending with product variation assistant 117 Manual creation 116 Product variation assistant 115 Variation attributes 113 Variation products 114 Vertical areas 173 Visibility 31 W Web site views 25 Working area 21 WorldPay 72 Activation 74 Administration 72 Operational mode Z3 Payment process 193 Payment processing 3 Re
13. In this chapter you will learn the basics of editing the design of your Web site The information is provided only as a recommendation since the procedures for designing Web pages can differ greatly First you should read the chapter Design basics on page 171 This will provide you with the required basic knowledge To edit the design of your Web site click the menu item Design Depending on the scope and type of de sign changes you can either start the Quick Design function or select a style directly For more on working with the Quick Design function see Quick Design on page 183 Note Before you make any changes to the current design we recommend that you save a copy of the design You can do this in the table of your own styles by using the Create backup copy function This ensures that you can always revert to the initial state See also Sty es on page 175 After selecting the style your Web site will be displayed in the browser using the design that is specified by the style For more on styles see Styles on page 175 When you select and display a style initially the background area of the browser is active You can see that from the red border surrounding the display area in the browser window This area is where you configure the general way in which your Web site is displayed in the browser See Configuring the general page lay out in the browser on page 173 Page 174 User guide for Web site administrators Styles
14. Table 139 parameters for coupons Field name ID Description Field type Example Entry field alpha NewPayment numeric Name Language dependent name used to Entry field alpha New payment display the campaign numeric method Description Description of the campaign This is Text field Use of the payment language dependent method cash on For more on formatting see Working deliveryis rewarded with text fields on page 35 with a coupon Currency Dipy Absolute value Absolute amount per coupon Option button 4 entry field numeric Page 214 User guide for Web site administrators Coupons Marketing Field name ID Description Field type Example Percentage value The value of the coupon is proportional Option button 5 to the value of the goods in the shop entry field numeric ping basket All products in the shopping basket will be discounted Waive delivery costs Option button Minimum order value Shopping basket value at which the Entry field numeric 50 coupon can be redeemed Coupon code length Variable length of the coupon code for Drop down menu 16 different uses and security levels Time frame Length of the validity period for the Date field 01 05 08 00 00 coupons in the campaign It is necessary to enter both the date and time Use the symbols next to every date field to enter the current date along with the time Number of valid cou Number of coupon codes that willbe Entry field
15. tions include link to home page Logo display display of a compact shopping basket display of the sign in box product search display A corresponding page element exists for every available function This element is used to display and call the function on the page You can display the page elements on the page as you see fit Do this by select ing the page elements from the Page elements gt New group in the multifunction bar For more information see Multifunction bar and design on page 176 n addition to this you can create user defined page ele ments see User defined page elements on page 182 All page elements are available for every area shown in Figure 27 on page 172 except for the content area Due to the way they work and their design certain functions are best used in specific areas They function in other areas but are out of place and disturb the design or do not fit in the defined area With your design you decide which page elements are assigned to which areas so that they are completely visible and can be used The following functions are available for page elements in design mode Table 115 Functions for page elements Function Comment p You can move the page elements to different areas or within an area by using drag amp drop Click the icon for the corresponding page element keep the mouse button pressed down and drag the mouse pointer over the target area A red dashed border indicates
16. 216 214 215 191 193 119 121 120 120 171 120 88 88 131 131 132 135 132 137 136 136 135 135 135 135 137 134 133 133 143 147 145 146 30 31 86 51 62 84 64 64 63 Number of products in shopping basket 66 Shopping basket total 65 Page 241 Index Weight of products in shopping basket Delivery options General details Selection Dependencies Design Navigation Design basics E eBay Accounts Authentication Default values tems Orders Search Settings Templates E mail events Exceptions E mail settings Events Structure ofa system e mail etracker statistics General Pages Registration data Search engine reporting Setting up an account Export Categories Customer export Product export F Favorites G Google Transactions Google Base Google Checkout Payment Process Search transactions Google registration guenstiger de H Help Context sensitive Help area Related topics Short info History Horizontal areas Page 242 65 84 85 85 84 171 181 171 122 230 99 100 235 230 235 236 98 101 93 90 91 92 226 227 229 227 228 227 45 159 137 128 22 198 223 198 199 225 224 23 24 24 23 25 25 22 173 HSBC General Search transactions Transactions Icon set Images Import Categories Customer import Product import Import file Invoices K Kelkoo L Language Dependencies L
17. Countries used for customer registration must be included in at least one region Customers must not be able to select an invoice or delivery country which is not assigned to a region Regions Details General The name of the region can be edited in the Dfield The table lists all the countries that you have assigned in Settings Country settings gt Countries All countries that are assigned to the region are shown in bold and their checkbox is selected To assign a country to a region select the corresponding checkbox To remove the assignment of a country to a region remove the selection in the corresponding checkbox Save your entries by clicking Save To delete the entire region click Delete E mail settings The system provides various e mails for notification confirmation and information You can configure which of these e mails are sent to the customers To do this you must configure certain default settings and activate sending for the relevant e mail In respect of e mail events you must configure both the gen eral e mail settings see E mail settings General below and the list of potential e mail events see E mail settings Events on page 91 E mail settings General Page Settings E mail settings General On this page define the sender settings that are used to send e mail messages The various fields have the following meanings Table 53 fields for general e mail settings Field name D
18. Cross selling Accessories Accessories are products that extend or improve the functionality of the basic product or are necessary to use the product fuel batteries and so on The table lists all the accessories for the current product The content of the Commentcolumn is displayed in the shop as an explanation Enter a note or description here explaining why or how this product en hances the current product A comment field is offered for every language in your shop You can set the sequence using the sorting key in the last column of the table For more details see Sorting using key on page 28 To add a product either enter the product number directly or insert a product from the tray For more infor mation see Adding records on page 26 The Create reciprocal assignments check box allows you to configure whether the assignment of a new cross selling product should be made reciprocally The following example demonstrates the procedure in more detail Product A is the first product Product B is to be assigned to Product A as a cross selling prod uct If reciprocal assignment is activated product A will also be assigned to product B as a cross selling product of the same type at the same time Reciprocal assignments affect direct entries as well as items imported from the tray Save your entries by clicking Save To remove an assignment select the relevant products and click Remove assignment Cross selling Related prod
19. Newsletter General campaign Addressees Addressees are planned recipients of all newsletters of a specific campaign There is no direct assignment of addressees to individual newsletters Addressees who receive a newsletter are referred to as recipients see Newsletter details Recipients above The table lists all the addressees who are entered in the current campaign The symbols have the following meanings User guide for Web site administrators Page 211 Marketing Newsletter campaigns Table 136 Status symbols for the list of addressees Icon Description 4 The addressee is a registered customer who has subscribed to newsletters blue k The addressee is a registered customer who has unsubscribed from newsletters blue amp The addressee is a registered customer who has subscribed to newsletters but the relevant blue system e mail has not been confirmed by the subscriber 4 The addressee is not a registered customer but has subscribed to newsletters green The addressee is not a registered customer and has unsubscribed from newsletters The addressee is not a registered customer who has subscribed to newsletters but the rele vant system e mail has not been confirmed by the subscriber Only visitors in this list can receive the campaign newsletter Visitors can register for newsletter campaigns on the Web site For more information see Subscription from the Web site on page 212 If necessary you as
20. The table lists all current PayPal Express transactions The Status column informs you about the current status of the transaction PayPal sets this status The fol lowing states exist Table 128 Status for PayPal Express transactions Status Description The transaction was verified by PayPal and successfully performed The amount will be debited and transferred Pending The transaction was verified by PayPal and not yet performed The icon appears in the table If you click the icon the reason for this is shown You must process confirm or decline these transactions in your PayPal administration The status in the table is changed with this as well The customer receives an e mail about this Rejected The transaction was not performed User guide for Web site administrators Page 197 Orders Google Checkout To see the details of an order click the order number Use the Go to PayPal administration link to switch to the PayPal administration Searching PayPal Express transactions Using the search you can group and filter your PayPal Express transactions You can also specifically search for PayPal Express transaction numbers The advanced search provides search for delivery and payment status and Buyer ID Otherwise searching for PayPal Express transactions is identical to the general search for all orders For basic information on using the search function see Search on page 28 Google Checkout Google Checkou
21. To create a new bulk price or discount proceed as described in Adding records on page 26 To delete a bulk price follow the steps described in Deleting entries on page 26 You can see an example for bulk pricing with a discount in Figure 24 Products Deuter Kangaroo de_3203104010 General Images Categories Variations Prices Cross selling Portals Bulk discount Value discount List price Gross H For regular customers EUR 8 H For regular customers GBP Bulk price Discount Bulk price Discount 10 piece 95 95 g o Quantity 20 piece 30 piece Product is included in this price list 5 Related topics Price lists Create price lists configure duration of validity and assign to customers or customer groups Figure 24 combined price list Page 118 User guide for Web site administrators Product details Cross selling Products When doing this please note the following You can set both a bulk price and a discount for a quantity If you offer both bulk pricing and a dis count the bulk price will be charged first and then the discount is subtracted see Discount calculation for product prices below The discount entered last effects all subsequent list entries if no other discounts are entered To re move the discount on subsequent entries enter a Oin the next discount field or the affected discount field Note Remember that you can create customer speci
22. To delete an image from the table proceed as described in Deleting entries on page 26 Page 112 User guide for Web site administrators Product details Categories Products Caution f you delete the image to which the views in the Views section belong the views will be de leted too No further images will be displayed in product lists etc for this product Note Slideshows can only be viewed in the shop if JavaScript is enabled in the customer s browser Product details Categories Page Products product Categories The table lists all the categories to which you have assigned the current product To assign a product to a category select a category from the drop down menu under the table As soon as a certain total number of categories for the shop is exceeded selection of a target category is performed using a special category browser Mark the required category Save your entries by clicking Save Note A product should always be assigned to at least one category To remove the assignment to categories select the corresponding categories in the table and click Re move assignment Note You are not required to confirm this command as no data is being deleted only the assignment Product details Variations Page Products product Variations Variations are products that are derived from a master product and that only differ in terms of the values of certain properties A good ex
23. User data Default delivery address This option shows the delivery address the customer entered in My Accountand set as Default Changes you make here can be seen by the customer in My Account Data synchronisation The merchant side customer data and the user data may contain differences In this case the Synchronise data function will be displayed and the system will inform you via e mail To enable this the corresponding e mail event must be activated see E mail settings Events on page 91 Click Synchronise data to display the differences and select the changes to be adopted On the right side you can see the fields of the invoice address the customer has entered in My Account in the shop On the left side you can see the relevant fields in the merchant side customer data Fields which contain differing information are marked blue Click L2 to import the merchant side cus tomer data into the invoice address Click L amp lt _ to import the invoice address information into the mer chant side customer data Save your entries by clicking Save Customer details Orders Page Customers customer Orders On this page you can See the orders for the current customer To open the page with the order details click the order number A comprehensive description of all the functions relevant to orders can be found in Orders on page 185 The following methods of creating orders for a customer exist Click New order in t
24. attributes are available for selection for this product The Variation attributes section shows the available variation attributed for the current master product along with the available values Each value has its own check box When you select a check box you can generate a new variation product on the basis of this value Save your entries by clicking Save All highlighted values will be copied to the drop down menu for the creation of variation products see Variation products below Note As long as a variation product is using a variation value the check box is deselected and the se lection cannot be removed If you would like to select this check box again you need to delete all the variation products that use this value The complete process and the methods for creating variations are described in Creating a variation on page 115 Variation products Page Products product Variations Variation Products All the variation products that have been created for the current product are displayed in the table in the Variation products section To open the details of a product click its name Clicking the icon to the left next to the product number opens a new browser window containing the product details Note the following When itis created the variation product inherits the price of the master product Using the Own price option field in the general product details you can configure whether a different price
25. image is displayed for each category here alongside the title and description The other images are dis played in the category details along with any existing long description fields You can specify which image is displayed using the layout options See also the Zayoutsection in Home page below An image upload button is displayed for each image on the page You can upload the corresponding image using the appropriate area see also Uploading images on page 43 An optimum image size is en tered for each image If you select the check box Adjust on upload the image is automatically saved using the specified size when it is uploaded If you want to save and display the image in its original size un check this box Layout Page Content Pages Datasheet view Pages page Layout The table lists all the options for displaying the content of the corresponding page in the Web site Select an option for the corresponding are and save your entries by clicking Save The page is equivalent by the Zayoutfunction group in the multifunction bar which you work with in the Page Preview view The same layout options are available for each individual page Explanations about the individual options can be found in descriptions of the corresponding page types from chapter Home page below Home page Page Content Pages Datasheet view The home page is the root of your site tree structure This structural element cannot be deleted a
26. on page 27 Resource details General Page Booking system General resource General The general properties for resources are the same largely as those for products For more information see the relevant settings Product details General on page 106 The differing fields have the following mean ings Table 107 Fields for resource details Field name Description Field type Example Manual confirmation Specify whether the reservations for Option button this resource must be confirmed manually by the administrator This overrides the general settings for all resources see Booking system settings on page 164 Limit duration to res An interval is defined forthe reserva Option button ervation periods tion of a resource see Booking system settings on page 164 Here you can stipulate whether the duration that is reserved for the service can differ from the booking interval Customer can define The customer can set how long he Option button duration wants the service to be provided Customer can pay for Option button reservation Reserve by Here you can override the default set Entry field numeric 1 hr tings for the booking system see Booking system settings on page 164 Cancel by Here you can override the default set Entry field numeric 1 hr tings for the booking system see Booking system settings on page 164 Appointment inter Here you can override the default set Drop down menu vals tings for th
27. see Delivery information on page 109 Save your entries by clicking Save Note If you cancel an order order status Rejected the stock level for the product in question is cor rected automatically Reference unit In order to compare the prices of similar products from different manufacturers there needs to be a com mon starting point Therefore according to PangV in Germany a comparable unit of quantity is to be indi cated as the reference unit A possible case would be purchasing chocolate from a food retailer A bar of chocolate X from manufac turer A weighs 150 grams and costs 1 49 a bar of chocolate Yfrom manufacturer 8 weighs 75 grams and costs 0 99 The reference price per 100g is 0 99 for chocolate Xand 1 32 for chocolate Y This makes it easy to see without having to calculate which chocolate is more attractively priced You are required to offer this service to your customers in the shop The system calculates the reference price using the values in the L st price Reference unit and Amount in product fields So if for example you select a reference unit of 100 g you sell your product for 10 00 and the product weighs 250 grams the reference price for 100g is 4 00 Comparison price The comparison price is a price that you can contrast with the current sale price of a product This allows you to show price reductions or special prices in an eye catching way You can configure one compariso
28. specific fields for customers there are customer specific fields and so on You can use the placeholder in the text fields for portions of the search text you do not wish to enter or cannot enter Capitalisation is not considered The system searches for character strings in which the search text appears regardless of where it is in the target text When searching for certain information you can also use time and date as a Search criterion Date and time information must be entered in the format of the administration language used To select a date use the icon See also Date entry fields on page 30 The search fields are connected using logical AND In other words a record must meet all the criteria de fined by the entries in the search fields and not just one of them Use the following buttons to activate various functions Button Description Start the search according to the entries in the search fields After entering the search terms in the fields click the button to start the search The re sults will appear in the table You can also start the search by pressing Enter Reset the search All entries are deleted from the search fields If you perform a search with this setting all records will be found Switch between simple and advanced search If you select the advanced search option further fields relevant to the object are added to the search box Using this you can refine the search further Using the dro
29. 200 200 200 32 32 33 33 33 33 33 33 32 32 language dependent text with value selection 32 Money Options Text text with value selection Time Yes No AVS code B Basket settings Registration BMECat import Booking system Bookings Bundle products Bundled products Business hours C Categories Category Contact information Content page Customer information General properties Privacy policy Terms and conditions Ciao ClickandBuy Payment process Search transactions Transactions User guide for Web site administrators 33 32 32 32 33 33 194 25 129 161 163 169 105 55 139 149 151 149 152 149 153 152 225 78 199 200 199 Content area Country settings Countries Currencies Languages Regions Coupons Coupon codes General properties Validity Creating the UPS tracking number Credit notes Cross selling Accessories Alternative items References Related products Currencies Swiss Francs Customer Data Customers Address data Billing address Customer account Customer attribute details Customer attributes Customer groups Data synchronisation Delivery address New order Orders Search Sign in Special attributes User data D Datasheet view General mages Pages Products Date entry fields Default settings Deferred payment Delete Confirmation Delivery methods Dependencies Exemption limit Fixed price Free delivery Index 174 87 88 88 8 7 89 214
30. Design The multifunction bar at the top of the browser displays the corresponding functions that are available For more information see Multifunction bar and design on page 176 Therefore you should first configure the general display settings for your Web site in the browser Make any changes as necessary to the page layout by hiding and showing different areas To select the different Web site areas move the mouse over the Web site Areas available for selection are highlighted To select an area for editing click on it A red border is then displayed around that area You must now check whether all required functions are displayed on the Web site These functions in clude Shopping basket sign in box catalogue tree or links to specific pages These functions are provided by page elements You can modify the arrangement of the page elements within the individual areas and if necessary create new elements Start editing the design now Proceed through each area at a time using the functions provided by the mul tifunction bar for the currently active area Upload images play around with colours and fonts and try out as many of the options as you want You can click the icon to reverse any changes that you do not like at any time Once you are happy with the design save all the changes by clicking bel Styles Page Design Styles A style contains all the information about the presentation of your Web site This inclu
31. Drop down menu newsletter After selection and saving two new functions are activated for this See Coupons on page 214 and especially the section Using coupons in newslet ters on page 217 Save your entries by clicking Save A newsletter can be sent in the following ways Enter the send date and save your entries by clicking Save The newsletters will be sent at the sched uled time Click Send now The newsletters are sent immediately The send date is ignored A window with a pro gress bar indicates the send status You can close the window at any time and the send process con tinues in the background Note The system has a setting for the maximum number of e mails that can be sent immediately If the number of e mails to be sent using the Send now command exceeds this the e mails will automatically be sent later in the background You will receive notification of this After the newsletter has been sent the corresponding data can no longer be changed and the newsletter cannot be sent again You can use the Duplicate function to create a copy of the newsletter which you can use to edit or send out Note No newsletters can be sent in test shops the Send now button is disabled Creating the newsletter content The content of a newsletter can contain manually created text and contents from the database such as product and customer data Figure 29 shows a page that offers all these possibilities User guide fo
32. Field type Example UPS tracking number This number is generated by the Entry field alpha 1Z0V77645388887 WorldShip software and imported This numeric is a requirement for package tracking UPS registration and Display of the area with the specialised Link software functions for UPS Register with UPS Forwarding to registration with UPS You will receive a customer number which you need in order to install the UPS software Order UPS WorldShip Using the software you can create the software UPS tracking number You can also create all necessary UPS delivery documents File format for export Selection of the file format in which Option button ing data to UPS you can import the data to your UPS WorldShip WorldShip account Depending on the version of WorldShip you can use CSV or XML formats The format is config ured using the corresponding option The data is then saved to a file in the required format Save your entries by clicking Save Preparation In order to offer your customers package tracking you must register with UPS and install the World Ship software Use the Register with UPS link to register with UPS After registration you should log in and request a cus tomer number in the My UPS menu In the next step request the WorldShip software from UPS To do this click the Order UPS WorldShip software link Complete and submit the form that is shown UPS will then send you the software Please ins
33. ID Description Field type Example Merchant ID You receive this ID when you register Entry field alpha 1234 with Shopping com numeric FIP user name FIP transfer is password protected Entry field numeric You will receive this information when you register with Shopping com This is not the same as the sign in name for the Shopping com admini stration area FTP password Password needed to transfer informa Entry field numeric tion via FIP This is not displayed for security rea sons For more on product export see Product list and export on page 221 For more on etracker evaluation see etracker reporting on page 221 Ciao The general settings which must be edited for every portal are described in General settings on page 219 Note the following exceptions Table 146 Special settings for Ciao export Field name ID Description Field type Example Merchant ID You receive this ID from Ciao Entry field alpha 12345678 numeric Show link to review Here you can show a link that your Option button customers can use to leave a review at Ciao This link is shown on the order confirmation page and in the order confirmation e mail Save your entries by clicking Save You can display the Ciao logo in the form of a page element A link is available for this logo This also al lows the customers to enter a review at Ciao The export file is retrieved by Ciao each day For more on product export see Product list
34. OA 179 New page elementos ETE 179 Active button Active button Right Image uu eee eee 179 OX PARTAA E N E E AE E E E E A TTE 179 Preview with selection of function ZrOUp sessessesssssssseesseeses 180 Texts and i KS asasiezeaheecatediatiesccccsecdonsseonsasenrenheceacuadnanaeateceut 180 Lists tables ANG GlAlOSS wader ice vonenoesesrandauaatesasdvetdiasi E 180 Pricesand PFOGUCE VICWS cc cccsuccsaedess da teducevencssendeistcestecartrcdeied wes 181 Ordene PIOCOSS sie omre esses OE ea 181 Page elements and navigatiOn ccccscscscscsscccesecceceseecs 181 User defined page elements ccccecccececescscscecececececececes 182 QUICK DESI Meeren tnaa 183 Page 8 User guide for Web site administrators 11 Table of Contents Orde aruon nE TE 185 E a A eee eT ee rr eee 186 orders Detall Sennin tasted ea eaeee hae ec 186 EdiUN INO GO nesia T 187 orders DOCUMENTS spregio crr a a eesemeenia eases 188 PACING UND akc wesuatcwossorenstoletecnatacbauquliiasesGadacodssideeneansnessesens 190 UPS Packin SIND vicsducwuvestcestacdeneh e E 190 Prepara NOMado aE E A epee 191 Creating the UPS tracking NUMDET ccceccecececsccecececscsceeees 191 Activating order tracking siucuscecaseliadessieceived cmienvenncutesdaterdeyeatenbeas 192 Ord rtrackine mthe SHOP c icte css seneecacescucades ria a a aa 192 MVOC ES oia bases mae we eeeetae nee 192 CROCCO eS ic a aisancs ns guteascemeeicusenetdaeatanussenasencaaseatara
35. T concede 145 PROCUICES aoreet E E ae ancaabasmcaeneusens 146 WAV SCS EEEE E EEEE VENI PEE E cane A I E E T es 147 LAV OU Uicc ac8 calgussantonenie E E N as 147 Home pas ccrrcistecs acts arn a a a decree 147 Page J CALC COL scnis A 149 CONTEC DAS Cuiere daina ENEN ENEE 149 LAT Tilt a A TTE aan teine sede beta Matsa 150 Promotional PIOGUCTS eresse oas 150 Contacten orma tO Meenen aa a ssa dancbiceantiavaaderwouseanes 151 Terms and Conditions xvescsedexacsiswsrsinesaneraccdsesesvecsiagsnessiwasens 152 C stomer INFORMATION sessie 152 Privacy DOUCY concariee cenre 153 BUSINESS MOUNS eminsen ennaa n a 153 EUS IU as sec aes ae TE EE TS T E TA E 153 FOr ee E E E A A E 154 User guide for Web site administrators Page 7 Table of Contents Topics Detail Serene AR 154 BIOS or E E A E ooeeeee 155 POSES Details anri a AE E eae 156 GUESIDOOK terdan s n E 157 ima gee dlle Nociren E A 157 image seare heor catacethoeaeeaessees netGaeadeetcered 159 Search in blog guestbook and forum ccceeesceceeeceeees 159 por and eX POr cce 159 Content Categories Pages Import Export cceceeceeceees 160 Category Product assignment Import and export 160 BIMEC GE IMD ONE sic psoreeietcevscccateralcatie E AE 161 9 BOOKING SyStemM sssesssesssessosesosssosssosssesssessseses 163 Working with the booking SySteEM cccccecscscscececececeess 163 Booking system settings ccccccecscsc
36. The customer is shown the payment methods that you have created in the shop administration The customer selects a payment method in the shopping basket based on Moneybookers Then he is trans ferred to the secure payment environment of Moneybookers There he enters the required payment details and completes the payment Finally the customer is returned to the shop The order confirmation is shown to him here This contains the transaction number that was assigned by Moneybookers Moneybookers transactions Page Orders Transactions Moneybookers After the customer has confirmed the transaction it is entered into the list of Moneybookers transactions in the shop administration The table lists all the Moneybookers transactions As soon as a transaction is set to Processed in the table the status of the order is set to Paid Search for Moneybookers transactions Use the search function to group and filter your Moneybookers transactions You can also search specifi cally by Moneybookers transaction numbers Otherwise searching for Moneybookers transactions is identical to the general search for orders See also Search on page 28 Saferpay Saferpay is an Internet payment platform that was developed for use in e commerce by the Swiss compa nies 3C Systems AGand Spolex AG Saferpay operates in Switzerland Saferpay communicates with all the major European banks and has direct connections to the global credit card networks Sa
37. The drop down menu contains 10 quantities that are calculated from the minimum order quantity and corresponding intervals It is not possible to enter just any figure Click the link to place the selected quantity in the shopping basket The other fields on this page have the following meanings Table 59 Fields for general shopping basket settings Field name Description Field type Minimum order value The customer will not be able to order Entry field alpha until the minimum order value has numeric been reached Price of minimum This option specifies how the minimum Drop down menu order value relates to jorder value is calculated which parts total of of the shopping basket are used to calculate the order value Allow tax area selec If you make different tax areas avail Option button tion able for selection remember to take the tax conditions for this area into account Remember that you as a mer chant must verify that the invoice ad dress of the customer corresponds with the selected tax area or that the customer is entitled to make purchases in the selected tax area Page 94 User guide for Web site administrators Shopping basket settings Settings Field name Description Field type Example Confirm Terms and Stipulate that the customer will not be Option button Conditions before able to order until he has accepted ordering your Terms and Conditions However this requires that you make your Terms and Cond
38. WYSIWYG COU Ol oreesa ea A a a aai 36 EO oea e T E E 37 BOM EE E T E T E A ET E A E PE EE ce eee 37 Parao D ana E 37 ADEE E A EEEE EE EN E I A EIE E E AEA E EA A 37 Edit image DIOD CITIES erases ccevancecwiGussavdaccatebancsactwidaranetastomeniies 38 User guide for Web site administrators Page 3 Table of Contents Insert link Remove linK cece ce cece ecsccccsccccscsccccsceccscsccececs 38 ISON ANCOR ee Te E E 39 insert and edit tabli Sienersroen an 39 FLAS M DABS conent esseni a E T NN 41 External page content gadgets ccccsccsccsccsccsceeceeceececes 42 RSS Pas COMLCIN cesce ee eas cedesieweocausncsveseweadewavetdeans 42 LD LOA GING WIM AS e Seiren unaayccoweakoncimeesens 43 COlOUPSEICCl OM mu T EET 43 FIle Manas ement ccstesessyteatecchceins reece ctaseeealeesaaeneee aeons sareess 44 MDOT ANG CX OM kissen E E 45 EXD OM siarsio EEE E a 45 DO n E E a crennearncas 46 Editing csv files with Microsoft Excel ccececececscecececececs 47 SOLU D ASSIS LAM Caos cesasdadesutesotceuss dan esausenascmmeqetuewssenuasseeees eins 47 Search the WED SilCwencanscscscunsacexendasachoncaeaoenanaianeverneieeeewiee 49 4 Administrator information cccececcscscsceccecscees 51 Deletion CONTIMMALION wiscsitcGhicussclelidceotoniwulidcacecbudsemasertaaiedens 51 5 SOS WMD SS oee a es cae econ ee 53 SENET aU Seine S erroreen a inner uaderes versa sear siedes 53 EHA APEE E E E sevens T A E E E A E 53 Page cache opti
39. Web site admini stration Page 228 User guide for Web site administrators Product recommendations Marketing Save your entries by clicking Save Pages Page Marketing etracker statistics Pages The table lists all the pages that can send information to etracker Select the check box in the Enabled col umn for the pages for which information should be sent You can also specify an importance value for the individual pages This defines how important it is for you that your customers view these pages Using the etracker statistics you can then evaluate which of the pages that you consider important are actually visited by your customers Select the corresponding importance for the page using the drop down menu The most important pages are allocated the setting 10 Save your entries by clicking Save To view the records and statistics for your Web site open your etracker administration page Product recommendations Page Marketing Product recommendations A product recommendation comprises sending an e mail with a link to a certain product The product rec ommendation is sent by customers to other customers in the product detail view The Recommend prod uct link is displayed in the shop for this purpose The various fields have the following meanings Table 148 fields for product recommendation Field name Description Field type Example Allow product rec ommendations The function is activated for
40. You can set up the order process so that the customer must confirm the Terms and Conditions before the purchase can be completed see Shopping basket settings on page 93 The customer can either print out the terms and conditions or save them to a file as required Closely connected to the Terms and Conditions is the customer information which supplements the Terms and Conditions and explains the business requirements in greater detail as well as providing additional in formation For more details see Customer information below General The general settings are edited as described in General on page 143 Save your entries by clicking Save Customer information Customer information is a Supplement to the Terms and Conditions see 7erms and conditions above t is meant to notify customers of the conditions of use as well as the processes and procedures on the Web site AS opposed to the Terms and Conditions customer information is meant to be more informational and explanatory in nature The customer information should be readily available to the customer A corresponding page element ex ists to do this For more information see Page elements and navigation on page 181 Page 152 User guide for Web site administrators Privacy policy Contents Caution You should review the default customer information and adapt it if necessary to the current requirements of your Web site or replace it with your own customer information
41. active Wool Wolle with value selec building a set of language Linen Leinen tion possible values See Language Dependencies on page 29 Leather Leder and Using text with value selection on page 33 Options Selection Multiple values can be assigned to the attribute Every value is displayed with a check box The user can select multiple values See Using options on page 34 Language Selection Can be used as options one value can be dependent op entered for each active language tions English keyboard Englische Tastatur Customer options Selection This allows you to offer options for ap pointments that the customer can select when booking an appointment See Resource details Options on page 166 Page 32 User guide for Web site administrators Attribute types Basic principles Type Description Usage Example Integer finteger PB Decimal number _ Floating point deci 15 23 mal numbers Yes No Decision Option buttons At this point the user Option button V si makes a Yes or No decision ble Money A fixed point num Entry field for prices 21 95 ber with a specific number of decimal places for saving money amounts D Date fields for days 12 06 2008 from 01 01 0001 up to 31 12 9999 Time Time field for the 11 11 range 00 00 00 to 23 23 59 Date and time Combination of date Entry fields for exact times The entry format 12 6 2008 11 11 and time is defined by the current country setting For Germany the format
42. address Attach HTTPis Payment Message to the failure email adminw lepages de Merchant receipt email address if set overrides value at Merchant Code level admin epages de Info servlet password Confirm F Payment Response EEE Ek Confirm C password WOS secret for Confirm transactions default Update Installation Save Changes Figure 20 Entering the URL and password to forward transaction data for WorldPay d In the Payment Response URL field enter the Internet address displayed in the Payment Response URL field in the shop administration Enter the same Payment Response passwordin both systems When data is transmitted both entries are compared If the passwords match the transaction continues 3 Settings for payment processing In the 7ransaction is finalised drop down menu you can specify how the transaction is to be finalised and the point at which the payment is booked from the customer s account Table 38 options for finalising the transaction Description Manually on the The amount is not deducted from the customer s account until you have finalised WorldPay administra the order in your WorldPay account tion page Automatically with The amount is deducted from the customer s account after he has finished enter the order ing information with WorldPay For more information see WorldPay transactions on page 193 Before you make the payment method available for your cust
43. and export on page 221 For more on etracker evaluation see etracker reporting on page 221 Google registration Page Marketing Google registration As well as regular customers knowing the address of your Web site an important factor for the success of your Web site is that the Web site and its content can be found by Internet search engines To ensure this you need to register your Web site address with the search engine operators The program provides a registration function for registering with Google one of the most popular search engines User guide for Web site administrators Page 225 Marketing Trusted Shops The Home page is the address of your Web site and is entered like this in Google s records You can add notes or text about your Web site in the Web site comments field This is to provide information to the em ployees of Google Services and is not displayed in the search results To register your Web site with Google click Register Registering your site with Google does not guarantee that it will be added to the search index Note the in formation about this on the Google Web site You can click the link Display indexed pages to start a Google search for your Web site You can verify im mediately how your Web site is located and listed by Google Note Make sure that as many sites as possible link to your Web site The more sites that link to your Web site the greater the chance that your Web site addres
44. and variation attributes All available product types are listed in the Product type drop down menu Select the appropriate entry Af ter selection the available variation attributes are displayed Each attribute is displayed in its own edit area Using the check boxes you can specify whether the corresponding attribute should be used to create variations Existing values are displayed If you need an additional value for an attribute enter it in the entry field below the corresponding value list If you need additional values click Show more fields and enter the values in the new fields If you need a new attribute click New attribute Enter the name and edit the values as with existing attrib utes For new attributes you can determine whether the attribute values should be language dependent The values for the other languages are entered later in the details for the corresponding attribute of the product type If the selected product type has no variation attributes yet create new attributes with values as described above User guide for Web site administrators Page 115 Products Product details Variations If you need a new product type select the Mew product type entry in the drop down menu and enter the name in the Name entry field Two attribute edit areas are displayed Edit these attributed as described above Note In the wizard a maximum number 10 values can be entered per attribute A message is displayed to indi
45. are wide see Figure 27 on page 172 Vertical areas mostly contain boxes with texts lists links or entry fields Typical page elements for horizon tal areas include User guide for Web site administrators Page 173 Design Editing the design List of main categories Signing in Compact shopping basket view Shopping basket status Product search Country and currency selection Promotional products For more information on page elements see Page elements and navigation on page 181 When a vertical area is active the following function groups are available in the multifunction bar File see File on page 177 Area see Area on page 177 Font see font on page 178 Page elements see Page elements on page 179 Configuring the content area Whereas the other areas contain mainly functional elements such as menus and links the content area contains the product data and all the other information for your customers The size of the content area is determined by the height and width information of the other areas as well as the padding The rest of the browser window is left for the contents When the content area is active the following function groups are available in the multifunction bar File see File on page 177 Area see Area on page 177 Font see font on page 178 Preview with selection of function group see Preview with selection of function group on page 180 Editing the design
46. by clicking Save Delivery options Details Selecting In Selection you can create all variations of a delivery option from which your customer can select This can be for example various images on the greeting card or the type of packaging User guide for Web site administrators Page 85 Settings Delivery and payment You can describe each variation with a name ora short description You can optionally add an image The names are displayed in entry fields Enter changes directly in the respective field For more on using images see Uploading images on page 43 f an image is present the name is dis played below the entry field as a link Click the link to view the image on the right in the preview window If you would like to view the image in its original size click the display in the preview window To delete the image click the trash icon To create a new variant follow the steps described in Adding records on page 26 Save your entries by clicking Save Deferred payment Page Settings Delivery and payment Deferred payment You can offer your customers deferred payment for various payment methods For these payment methods activate deferred payment in the general settings by clicking the Deferred payment possible option button see General properties for payment methods on page 69 The individual fields for deferred payment have the following meanings Table 52 fields for deferred payment Field name Desc
47. can be performed Table 154 specialised batch processing commands for eBay orders Command Send feedback Resend reminder mail Comment The Feedback and the Feedback textfields contain the default settings from the eBay settings see General settings on page 99 These entries can be changed if necessary The command sends the feedback information entered for all selected items After the item ends the buyer receives an automatically generated e mail requesting him to finalise the transaction in your shop See also Configuration of notification e mail on page 98 This command sends a reminder e mail to customers that have not finalised the transaction eBay orders are indicated in the list of all orders by the eBay icon Search for eBay items and orders eBay items and eBay orders each have their own search box This is displayed when the relevant tab is ac tive You can search according to various criteria For basic information on using the search function see Search on page 28 Page 236 User guide for Web site administrators 13 Glossary Administration area Administration page Administrator Attribute Attribute types Batch processing Button Caps lock key Catalogue Category Check box Cookie Currency format Default setting Glossary The Web pages that the technical administrator can use after signing in to fulfil his responsibilities The Web page displayed after signing
48. cccecececececececececscscscecececees 82 Moneybookers payment method cececscscsccecscscececececeees 83 Saferpay payment MCN OG ccsstisicdssevesceidesdostassasautetatonsasetesteas 84 Dependenties ceive detearssnceanvacvaouesatevanawvacsstaedvutaseiestesteeteakdddes 84 DelIVETY OD TIONS misrasi onan e N tone tested wie iunsgene 84 Delivery options Details general ccccecsececsececsccecsceseecees 85 Delivery options Details Selecting ccc cececsececsececseesceenes 85 Deere payment enean N 86 COUN SENE Serrano 87 kano Ud OS coniun nii rE a 87 CUTE CIOS aeara A 88 Special case SWISS Frants seiis E E EAE A 88 COUNTE Sora a E te eaeatmene 88 REGIONS enian a a a sad ews a a 89 Regions Details General cccecsecscnececsececsccecscesesceseecseeees 90 EAI GlUS CCCI SS scucsboscucensetadsyslercatacnatees A nee 90 E mail settings General sseesseesssesssoesssosssossssossssosssossso 90 Femail settings Events orirun ennn a a iE Ea 91 Evente maill Details caserna eE E EES 91 Exception E mail messages for the merchant csccsccscescseeeees 93 Shopping basket settings cececscnscecececscscsccscscececsceees 93 Shoppine Daske benseen a 93 Add to shopping basket command essssessssessssessesessssessesesseseee 93 Adding a duplicate product ssssessssessesesssseseesersesossesossesossesos 93 Layout of the function Add to shopping basket eesssssse
49. clicking Save Blog The blog also known as a Web log or a Web journal is used to tell your visitors about new content on the Web site at regular intervals In general blogs are used in the same way as diaries with the author placing personal information on the Internet The visitors can leave comments on the blog entries You can restrict who can read the blog and who is permitted to submit comments for the entries Visitors can report suspicious content using a special function Such entries are marked as spam in the Administra tion area You can then block these posts from being displayed You can create new topics in the page preview The following parameters are configured in the datasheet view General The general settings are edited as described in General on page 143 Save your entries by clicking Save Posts The table lists all posts of the blog User guide for Web site administrators Page 155 Contents Blog Click the ID to display the details of an entry See also Posts Details below You can sort the table by column For more details see Sorting using column headings on page 28 To create a new post proceed as described in Adding records on page 26 To delete a post follow the steps described in Deleting entries on page 26 Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 Posts Details The post details allow
50. conjunction with the booking system These must be enabled Call up the list of e mail events search for the relevant events and enable them See also E mail set tings Events on page 91 3 Enter general settings for the booking system You can configure default settings for all resources see Booking system settings on page 164 4 Create resources Create a new resource and enter the corresponding data For more information see Resource details General on page 166 Resource details Options on page 166 Resource details Images on page 167 and Resource details Categories on page 167 Ji Special settings for appointments User guide for Web site administrators Page 163 Booking system Booking system settings You can Set separate availability or non availability hours for appointments for a resource Check whether you need to configure any such exceptions For more about this see the relevant sections of Resource details Appointments on page 167 6 Book appointments Appointments can be reserved or booked by your customers using the Web site or by you through the Administration area This is done by selecting the corresponding resource and entering the required data Finally the booking is sent or saved The appointments are entered in the appointment overview for the individual resource 7 Control and confirmation In the Administration area you can display the appointments either using the calendar function or using
51. corresponding details and then click Apply mWBWN The following types can be used for user defined page elements HTML This element allows you to show short HTML formatted texts in the relevant area This can be used to display notes or information for your customers An example of this is an informational text about deliv ery and payment For more on formatting the associated text field see Working with text fields on page ao Box with HTML This element allows you to show short HTML formatted texts in the relevant area in a box with a title This can be used to display information or a group of functions for your customers For more on format ting the associated text field see Working with text fields on page 35 Link This element allows you to display links in the relevant area This can be used to provide links to addi tional internal or external Web pages for your customers Examples of this are Link to contact informa tion or Link to business hours Always enter external pages in the following form Attpo www User defined page elements adjust their size and design to fit the relevant area If no user defined page elements are permitted or if the maximum permitted number of elements has been reached the selection is deactivated Page 182 User guide for Web site administrators Quick Design Design Quick Design Page Design Quick Design You can use the Quick Design function to change entire design of you
52. coupon campaign The customer receives with the newsletter the name and description of the coupon campaign the price reduction the coupon provides and the coupon code itself Save your entries by clicking Save Product Portals Page Marketing Product portals Product portals are Internet platforms that collect and offer products of various merchants in a single cata logue They are also product search engines that help customers find and compare products and which contain a direct link from the product to the merchant s shop For you as the merchant this can be used to offer your products to a larger group of possible customers To do so you must export your products to the respective platform The table lists all the available product portals A list of country platforms exists for each portal You can export your products to these platforms The in Stalled languages and currencies determine the available countries see Country settings on page 87 and whether the portal supports this country Every country platform must be configured individually To do this you must enable the platform This can be done by selecting the relevant check box in the Active column and saving the entries by clicking Save The name of an active platform is displayed as a link Click this link to open and edit the settings for this platform If a platform is active you can open the export product list directly by clicking the icon Clicking the ico
53. design duplicate it and use the duplicate to send a new newsletter The templates contain text which allows the customer to unsubscribe from the newsletter This text must be part of every newsletter It is usual that the customers be informed about the possibility of un subscribing from newsletters For customers who subscribed to the newsletter as non registered users you can only use the Display name placeholder for the display name No data is stored for the other placeholders Newsletter details Attachments Page Marketing Newsletter General campaign Newsletter newsletter Attachments Product and category images are saved as attachments to newsletters The body will then contain a refer ence to any attachments These images are sent as attachments with the newsletter e mail If you click the file name the image will be displayed If you do not wish to send any images delete the pictures from the attachment list as well as the corresponding link in the text Newsletter details Recipients Page Marketing Newsletter General campaign Newsletter newsletter Recipients Recipients are customers who have received the corresponding newsletter The table lists all the recipients of the current newsletter If there are a large number of recipients the time sent shown may differ slightly from the planned send time Newsletter campaigns Details Addressees Page Marketing
54. eBay items For more information see Orders on page 235 In the Current bid column ofthe items table you can see the current bid for the item as well as how many bidders have bid on the item If you offer more than one product for sale the number of products that have been bid on is displayed in brackets The coloured bar in the Current bid column shows the relationship between the current price and the sales price in the shop An arrow marks the current value The colour fields have the following meanings Table 150 colour fields for item price Colour Description red Item price is lower than the shop price yellow Item price is similar to the shop price green Jitem price is higher than the shop price You can sort the table by column For more details see Sorting using column headings on page 28 Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 The following specialised actions can be performed Table 151 specialised batch processing commands for eBay items Command Comment Duplicate When you duplicate items for sale and finished items the new item is cre ated in the start status Repeat an item Copies of an item can be placed automatically in set intervals The start item must be defined as a planned item with set start time In the first step select the start item and run the command Next you must set the repeat interv
55. enter your etracker registration data and where you can manage the basic set tings for search engine campaigns If necessary you can register automatically with etracker The tab is di vided into the following sections Setup etracker account see Setting up an etracker account below Registration data see Reg stration data below Search engine reporting see Search engine reporting on page 228 Setting up an etracker account If you have not yet registered with etracker you can sign up here automatically Once you have entered the registration data this section will no longer be displayed Enter a password complete the password confirmation and click Set up account Use this password to sign in to the etracker administration Customer number Security code and Direct Login Bookmark will be entered automatically in the registra tion information You can also register automatically in the Set up assistant For more about this see Setup assistant on page 47 under Finish Registration data If you have already registered with etracker enter your registration information in the corresponding fields here This includes the Customer number Security code and Direct Login Bookmark You can find the Security code in your etracker administration at Configuration gt HTML code gt Automatic creation You can create the Direct Login Bookmark in your etracker administration under Configuration gt Personal settings in t
56. field Mornings from to Changed opening hours in the morning Entry field alpha numeric Afternoons from to Changed opening hours in the after Entry field alpha noon numeric Closing through noonday is not necessary Save your entries by clicking Save Note The exception periods for the resource are entered in the calendar for the number of weeks speci fied in Repetition The maximum number is limited by the system to 30 Examples for batch approval Temporary closure due to holiday For the start date enter the first day of vacation Leave fields for opening hours empty not open Enter the end date for the holiday Repetition daily Shut Fridays in the coming month For the start date enter the date of the Friday on which the rule commences Enter morning opening hours leave afternoon hours empty Number 4 Repetition weekly Resource details Cross selling Page Booking system General resource Cross selling Cross selling for appointments works like cross selling for products See Product details Cross selling on page 119 Bookings Page Booking system Bookings You can see all appointments bookings that exist in the table To see the details about an appointment click the link on the Appo ntment column User guide for Web site administrators Page 169 Booking system Appointment details To delete an appointment follow the steps described in Deleting entries on page 26 Yo
57. for Web site administrators Page 215 Marketing Coupons The conditions of the same type are connected with an OR Conditions of different types are related by AND The following example demonstrates this You have included a specific product the payment method Cash and the delivery method Pick upin the table To be able to redeem a coupon from this campaign a customer has to order the product entered and select the delivery method Pick up and the payment method Cash To remove a condition from the table select the relevant conditions and click Remove assignment Coupon campaign Coupon codes Page Marketing Coupons coupon Coupon codes The table shows all the coupon codes that belong to this campaign You can sort the table by column For more details see Sorting using column headings on page 28 Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 The following specialised actions can be performed Table 140 specialised batch processing actions for coupon codes Command Comment Export all coupon codes This saves all the coupon codes in a text file for use in external systems You can generate coupon codes with the following methods Manual creation Proceed as described in Adding records on page 26 Automatic generation using the code generator Enter the number of codes that you want to generate in the Vumberfiel
58. for the parameter Switch to the etracker evaluation tab Enter the parameter in the UAL parameterfield Save your entries by clicking Save In addition to this Pangora also has sub channels When you export products to Pangora these are dis tributed by Pangora to the attached portals To allow etracker to evaluate the portal via which the customer was forwarded to your shop relevant sub channels are displayed in the statistics You can create for ex ample a Pangora Germany channel Pangora then distributes your products to portals such as Fireball de and freenet de n the etracker statistics the Pangora Germany channel contains sub channels for Fireball and freenet Pangora uses abbreviations for the sub channels Contact Pangora for an explanation of these Pangora The general settings which must be edited for every portal are described in General settings on page 219 Note the following exceptions Page 222 User guide for Web site administrators Product Portals Marketing Table 143 specialised settings for the Pangora export Field name ID Description Field type Example Merchant ID You receive this ID when you register Entry field alpha 1234 with Pangora numeric FTP user name FTP transfer is password protected Entry field numeric You receive the information when you register with Pangora This is not identical with the sign in name for the Pangora administration area FTP password Password needed to transfer i
59. function allows you to add a background image using the File Management system For more about this see File management on page 44 User guide for Web site administrators Page 177 Design Multifunction bar and design Function Comment Repeat the background image see also Uploading images on page 43 Height width and padding Here you can define the height width and padding of the active area Table 114 Functions in He ght width and padding in the multifunction bar Function Comment Width Here you can define the width of the Web site in the browser general You can specify absolute values in pixels px or relative values in percent Relative page view values are relative to the width of the browser window A width of 90 means that the Web site takes up a width of 90 of the browser window Padding top This option defines the space from the top of the browser window to the top of the Web site Indicates the height of the area in pixels px Indicates the width of the area in pixels px Margin The outer padding is the space between the active area and the neighbouring areas Enter the values in pixels px Padding The inner padding is the space between the edge of the page elements e g link or flags for country selection and the edge of the active area Enter the values in pixels px Align elements Here you can define the orientation of the page elements in the active area Select the correspond
60. functions are grouped together in function groups The following groups exist Edit see Edit on page 37 Font see font on page 37 Paragraph see Paragraph on page 37 Insert see nsert on page 37 Page 36 User guide for Web site administrators WYSIWYG editor Basic principles Edit This group contains all the functions that can be used to cut and copy portions of text Table 6 Formatting text in the WYSIWYG editor Function Description Cut selected areas and paste these in the tray Copy selected areas into the tray Insert the content of the tray at the current cursor position Font This group contains all the functions that can be used to format the text They are used in the similar way as in other word processors such as Word These functions allow you to select the font font size and col our For more on selecting colours see Colour selector on page 43 Paragraph This group contains all the functions that can be used to position text on the page Functions to indent paragraphs and create bullet lists are also included In general you must highlight the text to be modified and then click the corresponding function Insert This group contains all the functions that can be used to insert and edit tables links files images and other multimedia elements The following functions are available Insert file g see File management on page 44 Edit image properties See Edit image properties on
61. group on page 180 File This group contains general functions that are always available Table 112 Function group A ein the multifunction bar Function Comment Ea Use this to undo the previous edit This function can be carried out as many times as you wish Repeat an action that was previously reversed undone This function can be carried out as many times as you wish i Show or hide highlight or selection of active area Edit tools Area This group contains all the functions that can be used to configure the background and dimensions of the areas Background colour and image Here you can design the background of the active area You can either select a coloured background or configure an image to be used for the background Table 113 Functions in Background colour and image in the multifunction bar Function Comment Background The box contains the current colour for the selected area Click the box in order to change colour the colour See also Co our selector on page 43 Background Upload an image for the background here See also Uploading images on page 43 image Delete Click the link to delete the current background image Delete tem After deleting the image the template of the current style is still located over the back plate ground You can remove this using Delete template Use the Restore template link to reinstate the template setting for the background of the style EJ Insert file This
62. in where all functions are listed You can access all the functions you need from this page The menu bar and sidebar and the working area are embedded here The operator of a Web site This Web site allows the Administrator to provide content and also offer products and services The available functions are provided according to the type of Web site selected Moreover there are comprehensive options for customising the design and layout of the site A freely definable descriptor for a product or customer Attributes are used to define properties for example prices dimensions colours and so on You can define various types of variables The type of variable controls how it is processed by the system For more information see Attribute types 32 A command that affects multiple elements at one time This option is offered in tables where multiple instances of the same action can be combined into a multiple or batch process for example deleting multiple lines in a table at once A function area on Web pages used to trigger actions They are usually graphically designed to look like buttons A key that switches on capitalisation permanently Deactivate this feature by pressing the key again When this key is activated this is usually indicated by a small light on the keyboard This term describes the entire inventory of all the products The catalogue is the equivalent of a mail order catalogue Categories are used to set up str
63. in months and P the order value in the currency indicated In the ordering process the APR is also specified along with the interest rate and monthly instalment This is the compounded calculation The procedure is defined in the German Price Indication Ordinance Prei sangabenverordnung Pangv Country settings In the country settings you can define the languages currencies countries and regions that are used on your Web site The contents are made available by the application in the relevant language You are re sponsible for the language dependent contents such as product descriptions the content of newsletters or the correct price in each available currency Languages Page Settings Country Settings Languages On this page you can prepare the languages for the Web site and administration areas For an introduction to this see Language Dependencies on page 29 The table lists all the languages you have activated for the Web site The appropriate countries are auto matically displayed with the language For each country clicking the i icon will display the specific formats which must be observed while enter ing information Using the checkbox in the Vis b e column you can set whether the country is displayed for selection on the Web site Use the option button in the Defau tcolumn to set the default language for the Web site An entry must be set to visible before it can be made to the default Save your en
64. is DD MM YYYY hh mm ss File File name You can use this field to assignafile toa Productinfo pdf product Language File name Can be used as File one file can be as Productinfo_de pdf dependent file signed for each active language Productinfo_en pdf Using text with value selection nteger ate The 7ext with value selection and the Language dependent text with value selection attribute types form the basis for creating drop down menus or product variations For these attributes you define various val ues for the user to select from In the details for these attributes next to the General tab there is an additional Value selection tab Here you can define a value pool which will be used for this attribute This allows you to make sure that only the values you suggest can be applied to an attribute The following example demonstrates this You would like your visitors to enter how they heard about your site on the registration form You want to set a fixed number of answers which the customer can select from Create a Contact nfo customer attribute of the type Language dependent text with value selection For more on customer attributes see Attributes on page 133 Create the preset values in the attribute details on the Value selection tab as shown in Figure 11 User guide for Web site administrators Page 33 Basic principles Attribute types Customer attributes Where did you hear about us General Value selection Valu
65. marked with an asterisk this means that this product is contained in at least one other document of the same type Use the icon to delete individual positions from the list The position will be deleted from the document without deletion confirmation Clicking Print view displays the print view of the document In the print preview additional customer information is displayed below the customer address This is information that the customer has entered in My Account If you would like to save your documents so that they cannot be changed you can use the Finalise func tion After clicking Finalise documents can still be displayed and printed but they can no longer be edited or deleted In this way after finalising the corresponding process you can Save all of your documents in the system in a tamper proof state You will have to create new documents for possible amendments and cor rections Take note of the following information when working with order documents Finalised documents cannot be selected and therefore cannot be deleted Changes in amount or deleting positions affects the document but not the order itself Changes in the order only affect documents that are created after the changes have been made Documents that were created before the changes were made remain unchanged Changes made to quantities in the documents do not affect inventory levels Note When printing via the browser depending on the brows
66. more on this see Administrator information on page 51 Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 The following specialised actions can be performed Table 20 Specialised batch processing commands for administrators Command Comment Activate The administrator can sign in to the administration area Deactivate Administration is disabled for the administrator To create a new administrator proceed as described in Adding records on page 26 You can edit the data in the same manner as described in Administrator information on page 51 Please note the following exceptions Usethe Sign in allowed field to set whether an administrator can sign in and have access to the ad ministration area You can delete an administrator To do this click the Delete button in the details Administrator details Sign in data Page Settings User management Administrators Sign in data By and large this administrator data corresponds to the general sign in data for users See also User details Sign in data on page 56 The remaining fields are described as follows User guide for Web site administrators Page 59 Settings Tax calculation Table 21 Fields for administrator information Field name Description Field type Example Deletion confirmation See Deletion confirmation on page 51 Option button ens Access to the adm
67. navigation on page 181 An information message will be shown if you have not yet placed a page element on your Web site despite having entered an ID If you have not saved a Trusted Shops ID the Trusted Shops page element will not be displayed on the Web site etracker statistics etracker Web controlling www etracker de is an Internet application for evaluating user data This data is recorded and analysed in real time Depending on the services offered there may be a fee Etracker nor Page 226 User guide for Web site administrators etracker statistics Marketing mally offers recording and reporting of visitors click behaviour pages opened click paths viewing times and so on Use these numbers to evaluate and influence the success and effectiveness of your Web page Based on a cooperation agreement between etracker and your provider the shop system transmits addi tional data to the etracker reporting to enable statistical reporting You can also use etracker to evaluate how your customers click on your Web pages Etracker provides the Clickmap and Heatmap functions for this purpose The Web site is ready for this analysis and sends the re quired data to etracker In order to use the functions you need to enable the ransfer as URL parameter op tion in the etracker administration Contact your etracker support contact for more information General Page Marketing etracker statistics General This is where you should
68. no further data is specified the products are created using the corresponding alias and are assigned to the default product type The default settings are used for all other required data If other columns are filled in the import file the values are entered for the corresponding attributes In the import file you can enter the file name for images which have already been uploaded or a reference to the image file Enter a reference if the image is already in the Internet This is comparable with uploading product images in the administration see Product details Images on page 111 These alternative entries are possible for the following columns in the import file Table 78 Columns for image information in a CSV import file Column Example image file Example reference Image for list view ImageS camera_s png https bildserver ProductImages camera_s png mall Image product view Image aici I saunas orice tide Medium Image magnified view Im camera_l png https bildserver ProductImages camera_l png ageLarge Image for promotional prod camera_hd png https bildserver ProductImages camera_hd png ucts ImageHotDeal Page 128 User guide for Web site administrators BMECat import Products BMECat import Page Products BMECat Import BMECat Import supports BMECat version 1 2 with the transactions lt T_NEW_CATALOG lt T_UPDATE_PRICES gt lt T_UPDATE_PRODUCTS gt The various fields have the following m
69. number after regis Entry field alpha tering with So forttiberwe sung numeric Password Enter the password that you entered Entry field alpha password when registering with So orttiber numeric we sung Success link The customer is forwarded to this page Read only field if the transfer is successful Copy the address to the project data in your Soforttiberwe sung administra tion For more information see Create pro ject in Soforttiberweisung below Cancellation link The customer is forwarded to this page Read only field if the transfer is interrupted Copy the address to the project data in your Soforttiberweisung administration For more information see Create pro ject in Soforttiberweisung below HTTP notification URL All transfer related data is sent to this Read only field address Copy the address to the pro ject data in your Soforttiberwe sung administration For more information see Create pro ject in Soforttiberweisung below Project number Here you can enter the number thatis Entry field alpha 987654 displayed as the current projectnum numeric ber in Soforttiberwe sung administra tion For more information see Create pro ject in Soforttiberwe sung below Save your entries by clicking Save Create project in Sofortiiberweisung In order for your customers to be able to use the payment method in your shop you must configure a pro ject for this shop in your Sofortiiberwe sung administ
70. numeric 100 pon codes accepted by the system Redemption voids the Yes Every coupon code can only be Option button coupon code used once No A coupon code can be redeemed multiple times Save your entries by clicking Save Note You can only edit the parameters on this page if coupon codes have not yet been generated If you would like to edit the values again you need to delete all coupon codes Caution An entry field for entering the coupon code is made available to the customer in the shopping basket However this field is only displayed if there is at least one coupon campaign valid for the cur rent time period Note If you specify the validity period of coupons remember to respect any statutory provisions re garding the validity of coupons Coupon campaign Validity Page Marketing Coupons coupon Validity You can link the validity of coupons to certain conditions These are conditions such as using specific de livery and payment methods as well as purchasing specific products A coupon can only be redeemed if the order fulfils these criteria The table lists all the conditions that limit redemption of a coupon for the current campaign If no entries are in the table customers can redeem the coupons without any restrictions according to the general set tings The various entries are inserted into the table from the tray For more on working with the tray see ray on page 21 User guide
71. of person responsible forWeb Entry field alpha Matthew Merchant site numeric E mail E mail address for the company Entry field alpha info provider de numeric Save your entries by clicking Save If you have run through the Setup assistant some fields in the Contact page will be filled already Terms and conditions The terms and conditions are a component of a shop and strict regulations also apply here In Germany for example the Terms and Conditions have been legally regulated since 2002 BGB para graph 305 ff There they are defined as all pre formulated contractual requirements for a multitude of contracts that one party the user provides to the other contract party when a contract is concluded They apply as soon as the purchaser is explicitly referred to them during the conclusion of a contract and has had a reasonable opportunity to inform himself of the contents of these requirements and is in agree ment with them If the customer says nothing about the Terms and Conditions then this is considered as being in agreement Caution You should review the default set of Terms and Conditions and adapt it if necessary to the current requirements of your Web site or replace it with your own set of Terms and Conditions The Terms and Conditions must be readily available to the customer A corresponding page element exists to do this For more information see Page elements and navigation on page 181 Note
72. on formatting see Working with text fields on page 35 In addition you can display a comparison price for the current list price An explanatory text can be pre fixed to the comparison price You can enter this in the field 7ext before comparison price You can also se lect to format the price with a strikethrough effect Do this by selecting the check box Strike through com parison price The preview shows you immediately how the comparison price is displayed in the shop For more information on the comparison price and how it is used see Comparison price on page 108 Save your entries by clicking Save If you do not want to display this information with the price leave the text fields empty Product comparison Page Settings Product Settings Product comparison This option allows you to enable your customers to compare products in the shop To do this set the op tion Allow product comparisonto Yes If you activate this option the customer can select and compare any products in the shop The products are displayed in a table with all visible attributes The customer can take products from this table and put them in his shopping basket or save them as a shopping list eBay settings eBay has become one of the largest sales platforms on the Internet The eBay interface enables you to offer your products on eBay Preparation In order to integrate eBay with ePages you must understand the functions and rules of the eBay
73. on page 181 and Page elements on page 179 This completes the creation of the newsletter campaign and publishes it on your Web site Newsletter campaigns Details General Page Marketing Newsletter General campaign General The various fields have the following meanings Table 131 general fields for newsletter campaigns Field name Description Field type Example Entry field alpha NewProducts_DE numeric Option button Name Language dependent name used to Entry field alpha New ideas at Mile display the campaign numeric max 255 stones characters Description Language dependent descriptive text Text field Every month we will for the campaign displayed on the Web let you know how we site have expanded our For more on formatting see Working selection of products with text fields on page 35 and services Language Language for which the campaign was Drop down menu created One feature is the language selection nternational Campaigns created with this option are valid for all languages Sender Name Default setting for all newsletters in the Entry field alpha Milestones Team campaign Together with the sender s e mail ad dress this comprises an extended e mail address Milestones Team lt info provider de Page 206 User guide for Web site administrators Newsletter campaigns Marketing Field name Description Field type Example Sender e mail Default setting for all newsletters
74. page 22 By default the first time a particular page is called up the Help section is displayed This happens irre spective of which section of the sidebar was active before If the page that has been called up has been viewed before then the sidebar content does not change If you are happy using the application and do not need the help to be shown for new pages you can edit this default setting see Administrator informa tion on page 51 Tray The tray is an area for temporarily storing objects or object groups These objects may be products cus tomers or even delivery methods You can add an object to the tray at one place in the application and use it at another place An example is sending newsletters containing product information You select the products from the prod uct list and add these to the tray When you create the newsletter you can take the products from the tray and insert them into the newsletter The objects are saved in groups according to type The number of elements which are contained in the group is displayed in round brackets Note There is one group for each object type for example customers or categories and one group for each product type The following methods are available to add objects to the tray adda single object from its detail view When you are in the detail view of an object which can be added to the tray its name will appear as the last entry in the tray see Figure 2 User gu
75. page 38 Edit media element Al Depending on the type of media various properties are displayed on the details page These are the Same properties that were edited when inserting the corresponding media element See also Flash on page 41 External page content gadgets on page 42 and RSS on page 42 Insert Flash GF see Flash on page 41 Insert gadget A see External page content gadgets on page 42 Insert RSS feed Gy see RSS on page 42 Insert edit link see nsert link Remove link on page 38 Insert anchor see nsert anchor on page 39 Insert symbol il Click the relevant icon to insert the symbol at the current cursor position Clicking this icon opens a window containing the available special characters Click the desired special character Insert separator Click the icon to insert the horizontal separator at the current cursor position Insert and editing table see nsert and edit tables on page 39 User guide for Web site administrators Page 37 Basic principles WYSIWYG editor Edit image properties To edit the properties of an image you have already inserted select it and then click the icon Anew window will open for editing The address of the image file is entered in the mage URL field If you want to display an image using an absolute URL enter the address in the format Attp You may also enter a description and a title for the image The description is also important fo
76. pdf customer must download fill out and numeric fax to the merchant Either enter the name of the file with its path directly or click Browse to search for the file Save your entries by clicking Save Fixed price payment method The various fields have the following meanings Table 33 Parameters for fixed price payment methods name a Field type Example Tax Taxclass Prop down menu jnone Charge for payment Entry field numeric 4 00 5 00 Save your entries by clicking Save Page 70 User guide for Web site administrators Delivery and payment Settings Payment method with exemption limits The various fields have the following meanings Table 34 parameters for payment methods with exemption limits Field name Description Field type Example Base price Entry field numeric 10 00 15 00 Limit The value of an order above which Entry field numeric 100 00 shipping is free 150 00 Price for the limit Here you can set how the order value is Drop down menu See 7able 35 below refers to the total of calculated above which payment is free of charge to the customer Save your entries by clicking Save The Price for the limit refers to the total offield has the following options Table 35 options for calculating payment price Option Comment Products The maximum value relates the to the value calculated from the product prices in the shopping basket Products and coupons The maximu
77. port below Content Categories Pages Import Export The Categories Import Export function allows you to import or export the catalogue structure of your Web site This refers to all of the structure elements and their properties and how they are arranged in the cata logue structure You can see a sample of an export file of this kind in Figure 25 A C D E F G Type Class j Alias Sort order Position Visible IlsVisible Visible in page element VisiblelnNavigation Name English Name en Imprint print 10 1 0 Contact information TermsAndC onditions ermsAndConditions 1 0 Terms and Conditions Customerlnformation ustomerlnformation PrivacyPolicy rivacyPolicy 1 0 Important customer information 1 0 Privacy Policy Article ewshopServices 1 0 Fresh wind in the online shop Category SpecialOffe pecialOffers 1 0 Promotional products Category ackets 1 1 Jackets Category hoes 1 Shoes Category ucksacks 1 1 Backpacks Category ents 1 1 Tents Category quipment 1 1 Equipment 0 1 Books amp Maps 1 1 Shoe size table 1 1 More Manufacturer Information 1 1 How ta Care far Your Shoes Category ooks_ Maps Article izeTable Link Manufacturerlnfo Catenoarv Shnelnfn Figure 25 category export file gt d d d d d amd If there is no entry in the Parent Object Parent column the corresponding elements are assigned to the Home page When creating new categories via the import file the following columns are ma
78. product number of the master product and a sequential integer If necessary you can modify the suggestions by overwriting them in the entry fields The variation products are generated for the selected variations All variations are selected by default If you do not want a variation product for a variation to be generated remove the selection To set the generated variation products to visible mark the Set the generated variation products to visible check box If a variation product has already been created for a combination the entry is displayed with a grey check box These entries cannot be changed as long as the relevant variation product exist Click Next to go on to the next step 3 Finish On this page set how the variation products are displayed in the shop Select this desired option by click ing the corresponding option field See also Product type details Layout on page 174 Click Finish to end the assistant save all settings and generate the variation products Manual creation To create variation products manually proceed as follows 1 Create a product type with attributes which contain the variation values To do this use attribute types with value selection For more information see Product types on page 122 Page 116 User guide for Web site administrators Product details Prices Products 2 Create a new single product see Creating a single product on page 104 This is the master product Assign t
79. relates the to the value calculated from the product prices and coupon values in the shopping basket Products coupons and The maximum value relates the to the value calculated from the product shopping basket discount prices coupon values in the shopping basket and the shopping basket discount Delivery method Shopping basket total The various fields have the following meanings Table 27 Specialised fields for delivery method Shopping basket total Field name Description Field type Example Taxclass Dropdown menu Normal Price of the shopping Selection of the option used to deter Drop down menu basket refers to mine the order value see 7able 26 above Variable part used to calculate the Entry field numeric 0 1 delivery price The price of the shopping basket is multiplied by this value See the for mula below the table on the Web page Base price Fixed part used to calculate the deliv Currency field ery price See the formula below the table on the Web page You can scale delivery prices dependent upon the shopping basket price To do so enter the limit with the multiplier and the base price Save your entries by clicking Save Delivery method Weight of the products in the shopping basket The various fields have the following meanings Table 28 Specialised fields for the delivery method weight of the products in the shopping basket Field name Description Field type Example Taxclass Drop d
80. restrict the product to specific delivery methods This allows you to define specific delivery methods for specific products Description Page Products product General Description The various fields have the following meanings Table 68 Product detail fields Description Field name Description Field type Example Name Language dependent name used to Entry field alpha Eureka El Capitan IV display the product numeric Description Language dependent product descrip Text field alphanu Dome tent for four tion to be displayed in list view in the persons 2 doors shop For more on formatting see Working with text fields on page 35 Long description Language dependent detailed descrip Text field alphanu Dome tent for four tion of the product for the product de persons 2 doors and tail view in the shop well cut apses create For more on formatting see Working efficient use of space with text fields on page 35 thereby making Keywords for search These are used for internal searches as Entry field alpha camping tent geo well as for external search engines numeric detic dome light No third party brand names may be weight entered here User guide for Web site administrators Page 109 Products Product details General Field name Description Field type Example Mark as New Option Yes The product is immediately Option button displayed in the shop as a new prod date field
81. should be set for this variation product Ifthe variation product is priced differently the list price of the master product is displayed next to the variation product Category assignments made via the master product cannot be removed from the variation product However additional assignments to other categories can be made The images of master products and variation products are managed together If you want to delete the images of a variation product first check that there are no other products that use these images You can sort the table by column For more details see Sorting using column headings on page 28 The order in which the products are displayed is defined by the numbers in the Sort ordercolumn see Sorting using key on page 28 The variation product marked as default is displayed in the shop as the default variation product For more on default settings see Default settings on page 31 Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 The following specialised actions can be performed Table 71 specialised batch processing actions for product administration Command Comment Set New marker Highlighted products are all flagged immediately as Mew See also Mark as New on page 110 Page 114 User guide for Web site administrators Product details Variations Products Command Comment Remove New marker Marked pr
82. status is set Grey icon Order is in process and will be opened in editing mode A Conflict There is a difference between the current order value and the value paid by the customer See also Conflict warning on page 187 To see the details of an order click the order number To open the details in a new window click the icon Note Some functions in the application will open in new browser windows For this reason your browser must allow pop up windows to open Otherwise certain functions cannot be used As soon as you have opened the details of an order it will be set to Viewed This also sends a correspond ing e mail to the customer The corresponding e mail event must be activated for this to occur however For more information see E mail settings on page 90 All orders for which the status Viewed has not yet been set will be shown in bold You can sort the table by column For more details see Sorting using column headings on page 28 Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 The following specialised actions can be performed Table 117 specialised batch processing actions for processing orders Command Comment Set status You can set different status levels for the orders The corresponding com mands are listed in the drop down menu Export Selected orders are saved in a text file They can be opened by any
83. text processing program and processed or saved for archiving purposes User guide for Web site administrators Page 185 Orders Search Caution You can only delete orders with the status Rejected or Archived Note You can have the system automatically inform the customers per e mail as soon as you have set a Status for an order The corresponding e mail event must be active for this For more information see E mail settings on page 90 Search The search allows you to access specific orders or groups of orders For basic information on using the search function see Search on page 28 The advanced search allows you to filter by status payment method and or delivery method When you se lect the n edit mode check box only orders that are in edit mode are displayed If the check box is not se lected all orders are displayed depending on the other filter settings Note If you need an overview of all orders for a customer then go to the Customerarea to display the details for the customer All of the customer s orders are listed in the Orders tab Orders Details Page Orders Orders order General The general properties of an order provide you with an overview of all necessary order information such as the current processing status products ordered delivery and invoice address and so on The various fields have the following meanings Table 118 fields for order details Field name Description Fiel
84. the areas used to upload images as in the image gallery or text fields for names and descriptions For more informa tion on uploading images see Uploading images on page 43 Click a text element to activate and edit it In the page preview there are two types of editable text field Text fields n these fields you can use all available functions to edit text When the field is activated the multifunction bar changes and provides functions for text editing These functions correspond to the functions of the WYSIWYG editor See WYSIWYG editor on page 36 and also Working with text fields on page 35 Such fields are product descriptions or the terms and conditions text Text only fields In these fields you can only enter plain text with no option for formatting These com prise product names or category names for example A particular feature here in comparison with the WYSIWYG editor is that you can enter HTML code in the text fields To do so click the Edit HTML icon in the multifunction bar A new window opens containing the text Insert your HTML code here Save your entries by clicking Apply The page preview shows the text with the formatting from the HTML code applied Multifunction bar and content In the Content module the multifunction bar contains all the functions that are required to create the structure and edit content Only the functions that can be used or activated in the selected context are shown When
85. the check box for the event Save your entries by clicking Save Events with a grey check box cannot be deactivated You can configure each e mail message separately To do this click the name of the event to go to the as sociated e mail details Some events cannot be activated if address information has not been entered In these cases you will re ceive a relevant notification Event e mail Details The general settings are the same for most event e mails For special cases see Exception on page 93 The various fields have the following meanings Table 55 fields for event e mail messages Field name Description Field type Example Active o fption button f S Sender address Special sender for the respective Entry field alpha info provider com event numeric This setting replaces the default sender in E mail settings General User guide for Web site administrators Page 91 Settings E mail settings Field name Description Field type Example Cc address Recipient of a copy of the e mail The Entry field alpha sys name is displayed to all other recipi numeric tem provider com ents Multiple recipients are separated using a semi colon Bcc address Recipient of a copy of the e mail This Entry field alpha j admin provider co name is not displayed to the other numeric m recipients Multiple recipients are separated using a semi colon Subject A short note about the contents Entry field alph
86. the posi tions at which you can deposit the page element Now release the left mouse button The page element is displayed at the corresponding location User guide for Web site administrators Page 181 Design Page elements and navigation Function Comment This deletes a page element from the area Details can be edited for some page elements These include all user defined page ele ments Click the icon to call up and edit the details There are special configuration options for the following page elements Shopping basket overview with all items in box format The information in the Shopping basket overview with all items in box formatview is displayed in alter nating light and dark rows You can configure the background colours for the rows see Colour selector on page 43 Save your entries by clicking Save Logo You can enter a link for the logo here This can point to internal or external Web pages Always enter ex ternal links in the form Attp You can enter a separate link for each language Save your entries by clicking Save User defined page elements As well as the specified page elements you can also define your own To add such an element proceed as follows Activate the area into which the element is to be inserted Click the icon for the new page element in the multifunction bar Look for the User defined section in the page elements overview Select an element type and click Insert Edit the
87. to find information directly You can offer your customers a product search or a general search function When searching for products the system looks for the search term in all product data The search function can be offered as a simple search box or with more advanced options Customers can only search for visi ble products see Visibility on page 31 The general search function includes all types of page and product If the search term appears in both product descriptions and in pages such as categories blogs and forums then all these objects are dis played in the hit list The search field allows the visitor to enter several search terms These terms are linked by the AND opera tor during the search In other words the search function shows objects that contain all terms There is a Separate page element for each of these searches You must place this element on your Web page in order for the function to be made available to your visitors User guide for Web site administrators Page 49 Deletion confirmation Administrator information 4 Administrator information This is where you configure the personal settings that control the way you work in the administration area These include for example data for accessing the administration area and the e mail address used to send you system notifications By and large these administrator settings correspond to the general sign in settings for users and administrators See also User det
88. to search for the file Start the upload by clicking Submit catalog When this is complete the products are available for the Kelkoo search Note Do not open or edit the export file otherwise the correct import of the exported file to Kelkoo cannot be guaranteed Google Base The general settings which must be edited for every portal are described in General settings on page 219 Note the following exceptions User guide for Web site administrators Page 223 Marketing Product Portals Table 144 specialised settings for Google Base Export Field name ID Description Field type Example FTP user name FTP transfer is password protected Entry field numeric You receive this information when you register with Google This is not identical with the sign in name for the Google Base administra tion area FTP password Password needed to transfer informa Entry field numeric tion over FTP This is not displayed for security rea sons File name Name of the file you entered in the Entry field numeric googleExport txt Google Base administration for upload Save your entries by clicking Save Note the following exceptions After uploading your data to Google it may take up to two weeks until Google verifies and displays it You must wait for Google to do this You do not need to repeat the export during this time If you want to have your information available in Google Base at a particular time you must plan in advanc
89. your cus tomers The corresponding link is displayed in the product detail view Product recommen This restricts the function to registered Option button dation only for signed customers in customers Option button Maximum number of This is the maximum number of prod Drop down menu recommendations uct recommendations per day for regis tered customers Note This limitation can only be set for registered customers If this function is available to all custom ers registered and unregistered then all customers can send product recommendations up to a maxi mum limit This is set at 100 recommendations per customer per day Save your entries by clicking Save User guide for Web site administrators Page 229 Marketing Product inquiries Caution For the system to be able to send product recommendation e mail messages when this func tion is enabled the event must be activated in the e mail settings For more information see E mail set tings on page 90 Product inquiries Page Marketing Question about product You can give your customers the opportunity of submitting questions about products For this purpose set the Allow question about product option to Yes When this option is enabled customers to your shop can call up a form in the product details view in which they can enter questions or suggestions about the specific product for submission to you You will receive a corresponding e
90. 09 11 46 Test authentication Request authentication User account tmangner Country United Kingdom SB4 w Region Town Save required fields Figure 22 Successful authentication Using a valid token of another account If you already have an account with valid authentication you do not have to request the token for a new account through eBay but can instead use the token from the other account The function to do this will be displayed on the tab Note The token can only be exchanged between live systems Templates Page Settings eBay Settings Templates eBay offers the possibility of presenting items using your own design and layout You can use this option in your shop administration area by using the existing templates or designing your own The table shows a list of the available templates that can be used for items The following options are available for adding a new template to the list Proceed as described in Adding records on page 26 Goto the Select sample templates Section Select a template on this page and click Apply Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 To open the details of a template click the name You can edit the name and text of the template here see Working with text fields on page 35 You can insert placeholders for product attributes in the text When creating
91. 109 DiS SCHIP UO N aran EE 109 Attri DULES oeornnann econ tuasactuabcatiasancoassbonusat esis daceoa tenes 110 Product details Images i cece isdicceveadrcedsedetoneesdedescoewniese sane 111 Product details Categories ccccecececcscececcccscesecceees 113 Product details Variations cccccecececcececsceccscececeeces 113 Variation attriDUTES cs cctamsercdecvaswexsansanicnteevessiwamannscimeresene 113 ValrlallOM DrodUCtS asna a 114 Creatine d variation scncssvssase pus cenes inia n E EEES 115 Product variation assistant eseseessssessesoesossoesoescsssesesossossese 115 M n alcreatio miena E OAN 116 Extending variations later ccccceccccececsceccecscsceccecessceces 117 Extending a variation using the product variation assistant 117 Extending manually cds vescuiossietvewacnwccietonancndecvenesssesenstustacedececabees 117 Productdetails PIICES cereais sdieben saceasvaaates 117 BUIK dISCOUN co26e 5 5 scncaateiwacasscsaeisesbasnose A E 118 Value CIS COU NE airan E i 119 Discount calculation for product prices esssssesessssosseseeeeeee 119 Product details CrosSs Selling ccccecesescecececcscececeeces 119 Cross selling ACCESSONLES oo sicsciscsceiaeceaniantecansvineraceeseteneeas 120 Cross Selling Related products cccccececscscscscscsecececeees 120 Cross selling Alternative items cccececescecececececcecesecs 120 Gross selling Reference
92. 11010 20 Categories Tents Individualtents nf 1005104010 21 Categories Tents FamilyTents eg 1000111010 22 Categories Tents FamilyTents ho 1112105010 23 Categories Equipment hm 0100401001 Ad Cateanriesi Fanunment t Wanda Figure 26 category import export file In the import file all the columns from the export file are mandatory Caution n order to perform a category product assignment import the products used and a corre sponding catalogue structure must be available If you make this available per import you need to first perform the product importand the category import and then after this the category product assign ment import BMECat import Page Content BMEcat import For more about BMECat import see BMECat importin BMECat import on page 129 User guide for Web site administrators Page 161 Working with the booking system Booking system 9 Booking system The booking system allows you to offer services that your customers can reserve through the Web site This could including the rental of tools reservation of a table in a restaurant or making an appointment at the hairdressers These services are referred to as resources The daily availability of the resources is defined via your business hours see Business hours on page 55 Within these periods the customers can reserve or book the resource You can configure overriding default settings for all resources see Booking system settings on pag
93. 28 PayPal Express PayPal Express is a payment method from PayPal For this payment method the shopping basket data is transferred to the external system The further steps of the order process are conducted there The cus tomer selects his payment method and delivery address there The order is finalised in the shop More de tailed information about this topic is available at the PayPal Web site The prerequisite for you is that you register with and create a merchant account at PayPal You can register with PayPal in the shop administration Read about the settings and necessary parameters in PayPal Ex press payment method on page 76 Payment process from the customer viewpoint Once the customer has placed products in the shopping basket he can start PayPal Express Buttons for this are available in the mini shopping basket and in the shopping basket itself The customer is transferred to the PayPal Express page and must register there or create a new account After registration the customer selects payment and delivery data and confirms these Afterwards he is brought back to the shop and finishes the order from there Finally the order confirmation is shown in the shop PayPal Express transactions Page Orders Transactions PayPal Express Once the customer has confirmed the transaction it is entered into the PayPal merchant administration as well as in the list of PayPal Express transactions in the shop administration
94. 30 MIVEMITORY seare Meisie e A 130 CUSLOMETS conaicastcsticnsiussecsceeectses see cuaneeesaiedcidutenonent 131 Customer details General ccc ee cece ccc ecceceeceeceeceees 131 Adare S Sis osicisidxanauisie binene ese r tia tnahebeaeemeteeasesaaut 132 CUSTOMER ACCOUN Ucieseeissicsecl sessed cakenaesciseres a a aa a aai 132 ADUTE S essai ar r EOR 133 Customer details User data ssssoesssssssssssssessssosesesee 133 SENAN e a OE 134 Bile addres S eeo a A E 135 Default delivery address ssssssssssssssessessessersessossoeseeseeseeese 135 Data svnchronisation csicsa eiaiieed asa aniedias 135 Customer details Orders sssssesssssossssssssssossesssssosesssese 135 CUSTOMED STOUDS oin a E AENA EEEE EEES 136 C Ustomer atri DUTE S rei E aa 136 Customer attributes Details cet ceceececceccsccseeceeeeecs 137 SS CO asa eiat E cates se idee sais eta encode ong ne vate dea eee see 137 mporn and Expor sccsctuevcesesaseucceseveuddatsbeunceasecesueteesoanctaaanees 137 8 COMEN Scree a a a A A 139 creanme NEW Dae eS ereen E T aT 139 Pages Preview cornia a eemisieleaeietes 140 Multifunction bar and content sesssesesssosssssssesesssoesessso 141 Fil a a a a O a tans ancient 141 Commands oee a a E TE 142 CAVO UL eeoa a a etidesiaaedes teeeseaieaaeenes 142 Lane udt E masna a T 143 Datasheet VOW oreren E ENEN 143 GO TVE TA acts steec seine Sod ctcdwtas T E T E E 143 Padec na a a slic upared cau nuvec
95. 39 Click Insert to apply the settings To remove an assigned link move the cursor to the link and click the icon The link is deleted and the text loses the link function Page 38 User guide for Web site administrators WYSIWYG editor Basic principles Insert anchor Using anchors you can set target marks in the text which can be jumped to using special links This func tion is only available when the L icon is displayed Click the icon to place an anchor This opens a new window Enter the name of the anchor in the Anchor name field and click Insert If you want to insert a link to an anchor follow the instructions for nsert link Remove link on page 38 Choose the desired anchor from the list Insert and edit tables Click the 4 icon to insert a table This opens a window where you can configure the basic parameters for the table see Figure 16 Insert table ES General Columns wich Frame Frame colour Background colour Figure 16 Basic parameters for tables The various fields have the following meanings Table 7 basic parameters for tables Field Comment Columns ooo tines Indicates the width of the entire table in pixels Complete the selection by clicking Apply This inserts the table at the current cursor position You can edit the properties of an existing table by using the buttons next to the E button The relevant buttons will become active when you position the cursor in the table
96. Commands click Copy file Rename folder The selected folder can be renamed Enter the new name in the entry field that is displayed and confirm by clicking Save This is only available for folders that you have created yourself Delete folders The highlighted folder is deleted This is only available for folders that you have created yourself The right side of the file management control displays the files in the current folder Above this is the area that can be used to upload files The following functions are available Table 11 Commands in file management right section Function Comment Upload files This area is used to upload files to the file management system For more details see Uploading images on page 43 The files will be saved in the selected folder Select the desired file and click Apply The file is inserted into the text at the cur rent cursor position The file management control is closed Double click a file The file is displayed in a new window Delete file Click the icon The file is removed from the list Import and export Use the import and export functions to share information with other systems This can be used if you have prepared your information using another system or program and you want to use this in the Web site see mport on page 46 Conversely you may want to use the information on the Web site in another system see Export below CSV files are used for import and export A C
97. D corresponds to the Entry field alpha jeg 1000111010 ID code for other objects numeric Visible pf ption button Page 106 User guide for Web site administrators Product details General Products Price of the product displayed in the shop Field name Description Field type Example According to the settings either gross or net prices must be entered see 7ax List price 339 95 model on page 61 Display comparison Displays fields to allow entry of com Link Price parison prices See also Comparison price on page 108 Total of individual Displayed with product bundles Currency field prices Daily price dependent Option button Tax class Drop down menu Normal Orderunit o Dropdown menu Pieces en units the price refers Entry field numeric 1 00 to Minimum order quan If the customer enters a lower amount Entry field numeric 1 00 tity in the shopping basket the amount is automatically increased to the mini mum order quantity Increment Amount increment according to which Entry field numeric 1 00 the products can be ordered Reference unit See Reference unit on page 108 Entry field numeric 1 Item and drop down menu Amountin product Number of products or amount of Entry field numeric 1 00 product per reference unit Manufacturer Entry field alpha Eureka numeric Manufacturer product Product number of the manufacturer Entry field alpha no numeric Product code
98. Description Authorised The customer has successfully finalised the transaction with T Pay Payment has not occurred Payment has been initiated You can Set the transaction type in the 7 Paypayment method settings see 7 Pay payment method on page 74 f Authorisation has been configured you must initiate payment by T Pay to your merchant ac count manually once the customer has authorised the transaction Select the relevant transactions in the Page 194 User guide for Web site administrators PayPal Orders table and click Initiate payment Payment will occur after you have done this The relevant transactions will be set to Paid Search for T Pay transactions Using the search you can group and filter T Pay transactions You can search with the following additional criteria Transaction no Status Time period in which the transaction was performed For basic information on using the search function see Search on page 28 PayPal PayPal is an online payment system operated by eBay Each PayPal customer has an online account which can be funded via credit card direct debit or bank transfer Money can be instantly transferred to other PayPal customers using the recipient s e mail address You can organise credit card payments for non PayPal customers This is dependant upon the type of account that you created with PayPal The prerequisite is that you register with and create an account at PayPal More detailed inform
99. Moreover the author s name and e mail address are also shown and you can send him an e mail directly Settings Page Products Product ratings Settings User guide for Web site administrators Page 127 Products Import and export This option specifies who is permitted to submit ratings and when the ratings will be visible in the shop The various fields have the following meanings Table 77 Settings for product ratings Field name Description Field type Example Activate product rat This setting specifies that product rat Option button ings ings can be awarded your shop Display new product This setting defines whether new rat Option button ratings immediately ings are displayed immediately in the shop If you want to moderate the rat ings before they are published set the option to Wo You can then set the ratings to v s b e in the table or in the details Product ratings only Option button for signed in custom ers You can receive an e mail notification when product ratings are submitted for your shop Create an corre sponding e mail event by providing a recipient e mail address For more information see E mail settings on page 90 Import and export Page Products Import and export You can read a general description about importing and exporting in the chapter mport and export on page 45 In the import file the following columns are mandatory for creating new products ID Alias If
100. ORKING dre deaonnunet ann e E N 21 Side Da Feiten O ee reed ela oe 21 MAN ATEA EE A E P L E E T E AT T 21 IEE EO TY AA EE EE E E ET A T AS E T 22 FVO OS acacia cassie E E ieee stn y eu sabarasabeoneees 22 DOCUIONS serenan aian a A sieeve edectstekdaces 23 Hel os seraldahaamieeca E EE 23 HeD Ter E 23 CONTEXT SENSITIVE HELP ccccececscscecececcccccscscscscscscececseeeeees 24 SROM INIO vacwoxidetce tear ae a a a E a 25 Related TOD ICS ornatae a 25 ACTIVE Dutton SaVE srarninar aT a 25 WeDSItEe VIEWS caase anan E A 25 TaDle Sarreren E EN NEE 26 ACHING TECOTOS nyuimin enaena a a 26 WOEKING WITH EMU siasio a a 26 DELETING entes ncara E aA 26 SEIS CHING IM TaDle Szenna EEE A 27 Batch Processes in TableS sseesesssessessesserseesossoescessesseesesse 27 Sorting using column headings ccccececececcccscecececcscecececs 28 SOMME Usine KeVonirssnacreian a a aN 28 Pasio eneren E TE Ea 28 Se E O O E 28 Language Dependencies sesssseseesosssessoeseeesorsoeesossoceseesoeeee 29 Dale Onli eldona a 30 Default SOLEMN SS urrenin iEn eE a 31 VISO T a A E E AT 31 Navi Ga LOM MISTO meceoieior e a Aa 31 AttriDUTE NY DOS aoee E a ANNA 32 Using text with value Sel CtION cccececececcscecscscecceceseseees 33 USINE ODUON S soscatectsastceriasnsatenseesGieblouensstcncasesencydeateadeetoeenwaie 34 Working With text fields osssuaisanspirnen an an a 35 Using HTML code in text fields ccc ceceecececececceceseseceecs 35
101. Pal Pro on page 196 The various fields have the following meanings Table 41 Parameters for the PayPal Pro payment method mice marclant Description Field type Example Create and manage Link to live PayPal system tocreatea Link an account in the hew PayPal Manager account or to sign PayPal Manager Sa Into an existing account Access data Entry field alpha Ukpromerchant123 These are used for identification during jnumeric PayPal123 data transfer The data can be found in Ukpromerchant985 Password the PayPal Manager under Account password administration gt Manage users Operational mode Set whether transactions are per Drop down menu formed on the live or test system User guide for Web site administrators Page 75 Settings Delivery and payment Field name Description Field type Example Set how transactions are finalised Drop down menu For Authorisation you must perform the debiting manually either in the shop administration or in the PayPal Manager For Debit every valid transaction is automatically finalised by debiting Save your entries by clicking Save Note We recommend performing a few transactions in the 7estmode before you switch the payment method to Z veand offer it to your customers Note The PayPal Pro logo is placed on the Web page and displayed using a page element For more on working with page elements see Page elements and navigation on page 181 PayPal Express p
102. Run through the Setup assistant Check the site pages Check place the main page elements Modify the design Create products Check important system settings Test the site CON DUO DAUNE These steps are described below For more information about all the other options read the corresponding chapter in the Merchant User Guide or consult the online user help 1 Sign in Details on how to access the Administration section of your site are given by your provider Sign in to the Administration section using the username and password This information has either been sent to you or you have already defined it yourself in the course of setting up the web site 2 Run through the Setup assistant The first time you sign in the Setup assistant will automatically take you through the initial steps The as sistant will help you configure the main settings for your site For more about this see Setup assistant on page 47 3 Check the site pages The site topic selected in the Setup assistant determines the basic structure of your Web site To view this structure select Content gt Pages Preview This preview allows you to verify that the main pages with which you want to launch your site are in place You can add delete or move pages at this stage Check the content on each page and update it as re quired You will find more detailed information on this in the section Contents on page 139 et seq The most important aspect of
103. SV file is a simple text file containing a list of individual values separated by a specific delimiter Each object takes up one line in the file Since exporting generates CSV files you can use this to generate a template for import files For more on CSV files see also Editing csv files with Microsoft Excel on page 47 Use of an export file as a template for the import file ensures that you correctly spell field names or column names In the areas where import and export are possible the function is displayed in the context menu Click the Import and export link The page that is displayed is used for both mportand Export Note Before importing a file with a large number of records we recommend that you test the import process with a file of just one or a few records Export The various fields have the following meaning for the export User guide for Web site administrators Page 45 Basic principles Import and export Table 12 parameters for exporting product data Field name Description Field type Example Object Type O fro p down ments Formatting Regional setting for the data format in Drop down menu the export file for example for cur rency or date information The selection also determines the cor responding separator symbol Coding Selection of the character set to be Drop down menu used The entry Default xxxxxx is the default character set for the administration language If you are using additiona
104. This must include the following information Name and address of the company Telephone fax and e mail address Managing director board stockholder shareholders depending on the company status Company location applicable court Registration number VAT identification number Party responsible for the contents name of the responsible party in the sense of the media services na tional contract It must be possible to open the contact information page from every page in the Web site A corresponding page element exists to do this For more information see Page elements and navigation on page 181 General In addition to some settings that are valid for all pages General on page 143 you must also edit the fol lowing settings Table 96 Fields for Contact Information Field name Description Field type Example Merchant Company Provider name Entry field alpha Milestones numeric Demostore GmbH Address Language dependent address Text field MusterFirma Soft For more on formatting see Working ware GmbH lt br with text fields on page 35 Leutragraben 1 lt bn 07743 Jena Germa ny Phone Telephone number Entry field alpha numeric Fax Fax number Entry field alpha numeric User guide for Web site administrators Page 151 Contents Terms and conditions Field name Description Field type Job title Title for person responsible for Web Entry field alpha Managing Director site numeric Name Name
105. To select a template click its name The details page for the Flash element is displayed Enter your text and define its size You can enter an Internet address if required If an Internet address has been stored visi tors can click the Flash component and jump to the specified page You can also define a background col our See also Colour selector on page 43 Click Update to check your changes in the preview Click Apply to insert the Flash element into the text field at the cursor position Click Overview to return to the list of Flash templates To cancel the command and return to the editor click Cancel External page content gadgets Gadgets are various functions that can be integrated into your Web pages These allow you to provide your Web site s visitors with additional information services or entertainment Typical gadgets include for ex ample railway timetables traffic information or a daily joke When you have clicked the icon a new window allows you to select various types of multimedia elements The area for selecting and inserting gadgets is expanded To select a gadget click the name or the preview image The details page for the gadget is displayed Some gadgets allow or require you to configure settings Click Update to check your changes in the pre view Click Apply to insert the gadget into the text field at the cursor position Click Overview to return to the list of gadgets To cancel the command and return to th
106. You can enter the product code here Entry field alpha 1234567890123 e g EAN This can be formatted according to numeric various specifications EAN UPS etc The entry is tested to ensure it matches an EAN or UPS specification Currency field Stock level You can set various options which will Entry field numeric 12 items be triggered if a customer orders a product with a stock level of 0 see Inventory on page 96 In the case of master products you can enter a default setting for the varia tions here You can configure the system to send you an e mail if the stock level falls to 0 see Exception E mail messages for the merchant on page 93 User guide for Web site administrators Page 107 Products Product details General Field name Description Field type Example Minimum stock level Value below which you want to order the product The minimum stock level should not be smaller than the minimum order quan tity You can configure the system to send you an e mail if the stock level falls to the minimum stock level see Exception E mail messages for the merchant on page 93 Entry field numeric 2 items Delivery period Please enter a number of days 3 or Entry field alpha Jat least 3 time reference e g 2 to 4or at least 3 numeric The suffix day s is predefined Display delivery data Shows fields to configure and record delivery data For more information
107. a Welcome to the shop numeric Header Introductory language dependent text Text alphanumeric for the e mail For more on formatting see Working with text fields on page 35 Text Language dependent notification text Text alphanumeric You have success For more on formatting see Working i a with text fields on page 35 Save your entries by clicking Save The fields are mainly used in e mails as follows From sender address gt To customer data from database gt Cc lt cc address Subject lt subject lt header Data from database related to the event Order data Registration data Delivery data etc This data will be created automatically lt signature gt Figure 21 use of details in the e mail Page 92 User guide for Web site administrators Shopping basket settings Settings Exception E mail messages for the merchant Certain event e mails are only sent by the system to the merchant Warning when a minimal stock level has been reached Product sold out T Pay incorrect settings Change of user address ClickandBuy error e mail Product inquiries Product feedback Customer contact e mail For these e mail messages there is an additional entry field Recipient address in the general properties In this field enter the address of someone you have chosen to handle this topic Multiple addresses can be entered The delimiter is a semi colon Note the following about
108. a subsidiary of the Atos Origin Gruppe and offers payment services for the Internet throughout Europe A part of the payment methods offered are verification methods such as credit and ad dress checks as well as the Verified by Visa and MasterCard Secure Code systems You can offer credit card payment using Atos Worldline in your shop More detailed information about this topic is available at Atto www atosworldline de and http www atosorigin com The prerequisite for you is that you register with Atos Worldline This registration can be performed from your shop administration Read about the settings and necessary parameters in Atos Worldline payment method on page 80 Payment process from the customer viewpoint The customer selects Atos Worldline as the payment method in the shopping basket After the confirmation of the shopping basket the customer is shown the page for the Atos Worldline payment method Once there he clicks on the symbol of his preferred credit card The customer is forwarded to the page of the Atos Worldline payment system and enters his credit card data there After this the customer is shown a page with the reference information for this transaction If desired he can return to the shop To do so he clicks the respective button The order confirmation is shown in the shop Atos Worldline Transactions Page Orders Transactions Atos Worldline Once the customer has confirmed the transaction it is en
109. ab is inactive Although the product list cannot then be edited any assignments remain The Export button becomes active when the Export all products option is set to Yes or products are added to the product list Page 220 User guide for Web site administrators Product Portals Marketing Ifthe platform requires the export file to be uploaded to it the Upload button is displayed This becomes active when all parameters are set correctly and the export file is generated Note Once you have configured all the parameters and an interval test the settings manually using Upload This way you can make sure that the parameters are set correctly for the automated upload process To edit the product list go to the Products tab Product list and export Page Marketing Product portals portal Products The Products tab can be found in the details of every country platform in a product platform On this page you can manage the products which are exported to the relevant platform The editing for all portals is the same The table lists all the products which are to be exported You can sort the table by column For more de tails see Sorting using column headings on page 28 Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 The following specialised actions can be performed Table 142 specialised batch processing commands for product exp
110. able entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 User guide for Web site administrators Page 57 Settings User management User groups Page Settings User management User groups You need user groups if you want to allocate permission to your users to carry out certain commands These types of permission are always allocated using user groups For example if you want to restrict a page to specific users you must first link the corresponding page to the corresponding user group You must also assign the corresponding users to this user group All user groups which you have created are listed in the table To create a new user group the following options are available Proceed as described in Adding records on page 26 When you create a customer group a user group with the same name is created automatically To delete a user group proceed as described in Deleting entries on page 26 To display the list of assigned users click the name of the user group To add users to the list the follow ing options are available Proceed as described in Adding records on page 26 Ifyou add a registered customer to a customer group this customer will automatically be added as a user in the user group that has the same name as the customer group To delete users from the list proceed as described in De eting entries on page 26 To open the details of a user click the user name Registration P
111. age Booking system General Time interval in the appointment view The calendar contains the interval after pointment arrangement page is called pointment arrangement page is exited Booking system Field type Drop down menu Entry field alpha numeric Example 30 min Arrange appointment Entry field alpha numeric Text field You will receive an e mail in confirma tion Text field Price including VAT plus delivery Text field Price without VAT plus delivery Finalise appointment The table lists all the resources that you have created The symbols have the following meanings Table 106 legend for resource symbols Description Resource is visible on the Web site Resource is not visible on the Web site E ss the appointments list for this resource is called up directly To open the details of a resource click the name Click the icon to the left of the name to open a new browser window with the resource details To create a new resource follow the steps described in Adding records on page 26 To delete a resource follow the steps described in Deleting entries on page 26 You can sort the table by column For more details see Sorting using column headings on page 28 User guide for Web site administrators Page 165 Booking system Resources Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables
112. age Settings User management Registration This section defines the content of the registration form Your visitors must complete this form when regis tering By the act of registering your visitors become users The registration settings are described in Registration on page 95 Signing in Page Settings User management Sign in This section allows you to define the options for accessing your Web site Select the option Recognise returning users to activate automatic sign in for registered users on your Web site During the session a cookie is generated for the user and saved If the user leaves the Web site with out signing out by closing the browser or leaving the session to expire the cookie remains saved When the user next visits your Web site the cookie is recognised automatically by the system and he is signed in When the user signs out of the Web site the cookie is erased It is then no longer possible to sign in auto matically Using the Require sign in option you can make it compulsory for your users to sign in This means that only visitors who have a user account can navigate your Web site New visitors can only access the Web site once you have created user profiles for them in the administration area This is only allowed in a B2B busi ness model Page 58 User guide for Web site administrators User management Settings Enter a relevant text in the 7ext if signing in is required field to inform non
113. age 181 Note Due to security reasons credit card data in the database for orders paid to you by credit card is deleted after the order is set to the status of Paid The only information that remains is a note that the order was paid by credit card Payment method with WorldPay The basic details of working with WorldPay can be found in WorldPay on page 193 The ordering of the individual points and their entry fields and settings corresponds to the general process for configuring the WorldPay payment method 1 Register with WorldPay Click this link to open the WorldPay registration page After registration is complete you will receive an in Stallation ID Enter this installation ID in the nsta lation D field in section 2 2 To your WorldPay administration page Click this link to open the WorldPay administration page You need to set a few parameters in the WorldPay administration so that the data exchange between the WorldPay system and your shop can function cor rectly On the WorldPay administration page call up nsta llation management see Figure 20 Page 72 User guide for Web site administrators Delivery and payment Settings Payment Response URL httos 4 serverfepages Store storefront ObjectPath Shops Den Payment Response enabled Enable Recurring Payment Response Enable the Shopper Response Suspension of Payment Response Payment Response failure 0 count Payment Response failure email
114. age 26 Layout All the available options for displaying the images and the preview on the Web site are shown here The fol lowing options are available Page 158 User guide for Web site administrators Search in blog guestbook and forum Contents Table 104 Layout options for the image gallery Function Comment Sortorder The image gallery is composed of three elements Descriptive text slideshow and preview list of images Select what sequence in which the individual elements of the image gallery should be dis played here By selecting the corresponding icon you can select the order in which the elements are displayed This option allows you to set how the list of available images is displayed You can select options from a simple list to a scrolling image bar When selecting take account of the number of images and the width of the area available Select the corresponding option and save your entries by clicking Save For basic information on displaying using the datasheet view see Layout on page 147 Image search You can search for images both on the Web site and in the Administration area To enable proper search ing you can define search terms and other content for the images Searches can be conducted using this content You can add the following content for each image Keywords Individual keywords that allow images to be located Multiple terms must be separated by commas Image location Description Th
115. ails Sign in data on page 56 and Administrator details Sign in data on page 59 The Allow sign infield is not shown since you cannot lock the adminis trator account out of the Web site An additional setting is the option Always display Help for previously unseen pages This allows you to manage the display of the Help pages If you set this to Yes Help topics will be shown for every page that is being visited the first time See also Sidebar on page 21 Save your entries by clicking Save Caution f the Automatic sign in via cookies option is selected everyone who uses your computer will have access to the administration area In this case make sure only authorised persons have access to your computer Deletion confirmation For security reasons you will be asked for additional confirmation with every delete command The delete command will be performed after your confirmation You can switch off deletion confirmation using the De letion confirmation check box Caution f you clear the Deletion Confirmation check box every deletion is executed immediately and without the need for confirmation You will not be able to cancel the action later It is recommended that only experienced users deactivate this User guide for Web site administrators Page 51 General settings Settings 5 Settings Here you can manage all the basic settings and methods of your system General settings Use the General sett
116. ails see Sorting using column headings on page 28 Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 The following specialised actions can be performed Table 134 specialised batch processing commands for newsletters Command Comment Duplicate _ i The send date and subscriber list will not be applied To create a new newsletter proceed as described in Adding records on page 26 Save your entries by clicking Save User guide for Web site administrators Page 207 Marketing Newsletter campaigns Newsletter details General Page Marketing Newsletter General campaign Newsletter newsletter General The various fields have the following meanings Table 135 fields for newsletters Field name Description Field type Example Entry field alpha BooksAndMaps numeric Name used to display the newsletter Entry field alpha Announcement This is language dependent numeric max 255 Books and cards characters Template Selection of a template for the newslet Drop down menu Load template ter text Button This is loaded into the text field Any text present will be removed after the deletion confirmation is displayed and confirmed Yes All formatting information will be Option button included No The text will be sent without HTML codes If the recipient does not receive HTML th
117. alivery method Payment method Status C E Order 1003 29 06 2006 17 36 B 15 46 17 i Invoice C El Order 1002 2006 2006 16 58 Eh 232 23 24 press Delivery Cash on Delivery O E Order 1004 21 06 2006 16 45 29 30 34 i Invoice Mumber 3 Select entry Execute 2007 2008 2009 Figure 8 fold out calendar Page 30 User guide for Web site administrators Default settings Basic principles If a date is needed in an entry for example the validity period for a price list you can select the date from the calendar Click the icon to open the calendar If necessary set the time Select the desired date The information will be copied into the entry field Default settings A default setting can be configured to provide the standard setting for a value At various places in the shop the customer must select a value for example payment or delivery method or product variations For each selection you can define a standard value using Default as shown in Figure 9 Country settings Languages Currencies Countries Regions Hame Currency symbol Code from 150 4217 Visible Default Euro Pound Sterling Swedish Krona US Dollar Select entryi Figure 9 default settings and visibility Click the option button of the value that is to be the default setting Save your entries by clicking Save This default setting remains valid until the customer selects a different value Select the values your cus tomers use the most Vi
118. als Enter the interval between items and specify how often the items should be created Execute the command by clicking Create If the product is not available and the option Cannot be added to shopping basket or Set to Not Visible is enabled in the product settings the item cannot be uploaded automatically to eBay Verify You can only test items that are not yet for sale on eBay or that are already finished Offers that have not yet been verified cannot be placed on eBay Upload to eBay The selected items are placed on eBay immediately irrespective of a planned start time The item must have been successfully verified User guide for Web site administrators Page 231 Marketing eBay Command Comment Delete Items that are for sale on eBay or are finished are only removed from the table and not deleted in the eBay system Update all items Queries the state of all items on eBay and updates the display in the table To create a new item follow the steps described in Adding records on page 26 Enter the product number in the direct entry field Save your entries by clicking Save You can also upload the item to eBay when it is generated Select the Upload as an eBay item immediately check box before saving the entry or importing the item from the tray The item will be checked and sent to eBay The default values will be used for new items see Default values on page 235 Itis also possible to create a new item from a product di
119. ame of the fields in the product detail view You can modify this name if necessary The internal names IDs are enclosed in square brackets and must never be changed You can also interchange columns as long as each column keeps its own heading The following rules are applied to the values in the import file Column does not exist in the file The values in the database will not be changed Column does exist in the file but no data entered The corresponding data is deleted in the database Page 46 User guide for Web site administrators Setup assistant Basic principles Column does exist in the file and contains data The corresponding data is replaced in the database by the data from the file The various fields have the following meaning for the import Table 13 parameters for importing product data Field name Description Field type Example Object Type Oo fro p down ments Formatting Defines how numbers currency and Drop down menu date formats are interpreted during the import The formats in the import file must match the formatting setting for the import The selection also determines the cor responding separator symbol Delimiter Setting for the delimiter used to divide Drop down menu data fields in the import file This setting overwrites the delimiter setting entered in formatting Languages __ relevant for the import Import file Enter the name of the import file in this Entry field alpha C t
120. ample of this is items of clothing such as t shirts or one type of jacket Typical differentiating criteria include the properties size or colour The initial product is referred to as the master product while the variations represent sub products or variation products Variation products are completely separate self contained products You can modify any individual property if necessary Caution f you delete the master product all the derived variation products will be deleted as well Note You cannot derive any further variations from a variation product The tab allows you to edit variation attributes and variation products and to start the Variation assistant See also Variation attributes below Variation products on page 114 and Product variation assistant on page 115 You can read how to create variations in Creating a variation on page 115 You can read how to extend ex isting variations in Extending variations later on page 117 Variation attributes Page Products product Variations Variation attributes User guide for Web site administrators Page 113 Products Product details Variations Variation attributes are the attributes which differ from one variation product to another Attribute types with value selection are used for variation attributes see Product types on page 122 These attributes are defined in a corresponding product type The product type is assigned to the master product so that the
121. an 0 The various fields have the following meanings Table 60 inventory options Option Comment it remains available without The product can be added to the shopping basket without restrictions restrictions a notification about possi The product can be added to the shopping basket without restrictions ble delayed delivery is dis In addition the text in the Notification textfield is displayed played Use this to inform your customers of longer delivery times The text dis played is language dependent it cannot be added tothe The product cannot be ordered shopping basket In addition the text in the Notification textfield is displayed Use this to inform your customer about why he cannot order the product The text displayed is language dependent itis set to Not Visible The product is no longer displayed in the shop and cannot be ordered Save your entries by clicking Save Notes 1 This function requires that you fill out the Stock level field for the products If this field is not filled the subsequent options will be ignored 2 If a product reaches the stock level of O during an order that is two items are on stock but four items have been ordered the available amount will be added to the shopping basket in the case of options with order stop Page 96 User guide for Web site administrators Product settings Settings Caution f you increase the stock level in the administration area the pro
122. an edit the address information of the merchant side customer data A date of birth must be en tered in date format Use the calendar function for this purpose See also Date entry fields on page 30 In this section you can manage multiple e mail addresses for the customer The e mail fields have the fol lowing meanings Table 82 customer e mail settings Field name Description Field type HTML e mail mes Yes The message will be displayed with the Option button sages correct formatting No The text will be sent without HTML codes E mail If the customer is not a registered customer Entry field al j doe provider c all system generated e mail messages re phanumeric o uk lated to this customer are sent to this ad dress For more information refer to the note in Sign in on page 134 Business e mail Business e mail address of the customer Entry field al j doe provider c phanumeric o uk Private e mail Private e mail address of the customer Entry field al john home co u phanumeric k Save your entries by clicking Save If the merchant side user data differs from the user information you will be informed by e mail In addition the Synchronise data function will be displayed which you can execute if necessary See also Data syn chronisation on page 135 For more information about user data see Customer details User data on page 133 Customer account Page Customers customer General Customer acco
123. and cannot be selected To see the details click the ID The options are displayed in the same order in the shop as in the table Use the sorting key to change the order For more details see Sorting using key on page 28 You can run batch processing actions to process the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 To create a new delivery option follow the steps described in Adding records on page 26 Save your entries by clicking Save Delivery options Details general The various fields have the following meanings Table 51 fields for general details for delivery options Field name Description Field type Example Internal name Entry field alpha GreetingCard numeric Visible fOptionbutton Name Name used to display the option This Entry field alpha Greeting card is language dependent numeric Description Description and information displayed Entry field alpha Deliver the order with for customers This is language a greeting card dependent For more on formatting see Working with text fields on page 35 Price Price for this delivery option foreach Entry field numeric 3 00 available currency Po Prop down meni Display entry field Shows an entry field for the delivery Option button option In this field the customer can enter text that is submitted together with the delivery option for example text fora greeting card Save your entries
124. and export on page 159 Creating new pages This section provides the basics on how to create a page and insert this page into the existing Web site structure The Content area in conjunction with the page browser provide an overview of the current structure of the Web site and the content of each page See also Pages Preview on page 140 This is the starting point for creating a new page First you must decide what sort of page you want to add There are various page types depending on con tent and function see table Page types on page 140 To create a new page see New on page 142 The new page is displayed in the page browser and in the page preview If necessary move the page now to the correct position in your site structure See also Move on page 142 If you want to assign other pages as sub pages of your new page drag them under the new page Save the new structure using kH Now edit the content of the new page If the new page is not yet selected in the page browser click its name now The page layout view is shown on the right You can edit certain content immediately mainly texts and titles See page preview on page 141 You can also upload images Save your entries by clicking ll Additional parameters can be modified for each page To do this switch to the datasheet view see Datasheet view on page 143 To do so click the icon Switch back to the page preview using Current page Preview There are variou
125. andBuy for more information The transactions link parameters are _ Read only field encrypted in order to protect against manipulation This is done using a dynamic key that is created for the payment method The key is displayed in this field Copy the key in order to forward it to ClickandBuy Customers cannot see whether you are operating in live or a test mode before finishing the transaction Therefore create a suitable name for the payment method in test operation In addition you can include a note about test operation in the notes for the payment method User guide for Web site administrators Page 79 Settings Delivery and payment The ClickandBuy system can send messages Such as error messages to the shop system when various events occur These are sent as e mails Create an corresponding e mail event by providing a recipient e mail address For more information see E mail settings on page 90 Atos Worldline payment method The basics about working with Atos Worldline are available in Atos Worldline on page 200 The various fields have the following meanings Table 45 Parameters forthe Atos Worldline payment method Field Name Description Field type ZECU E Merchant ID Identifier code that you receive on Entry field alpha 011223344551111 registering your shop with Atos World numeric line The shop is identified with this ID Merchant country Country for which you register your a shop Certificate f
126. anguage Dependencies on page 29 Datasheet view Page Content Pages Datasheet view In a datasheet view you can configure all the available parameters for the current page Select this view to enter and edit data that cannot be edited in page preview mode The parameters are grouped into tabs which are described below The specific descriptions of each page type refer to any exceptions The following tabs are always available General see General below Pages see Pages on page 145 Products see Products on page 146 Images see mages on page 147 Layout see Layout on page 147 General Page Content Pages Datasheet view Pages page General There are general settings for each page type All available settings are listed in the table below Depend ing on the page type a specific selection of these settings are displayed and must be edited Table 89 Entry fields for general properties Field name Description Field type Unique ID for the corresponding page Entry field alpha Equipment numeric Page type see Page types on page Display 140 Visible _ See Visibility on page 31 Option button User guide for Web site administrators Page 143 Contents Datasheet view Field name Description Field type Example This page is set as visible or not visible Option button only in the corresponding page ele ment It remains visible generally however This mean
127. arch with the following addi tional criteria Transaction no Time period in which the transaction was performed For basic information on using the search function see Search on page 28 PayPal Pro PayPal Pro is a payment method from PayPal Customers use it to pay directly by credit card PayPal verifies the data immediately More detailed information about this topic is available at www PayPal com gt gt Mer chant Services The prerequisite for you is that you register and set up the PayPal Manager A manager account can be set up in the shop administration Read about the settings and necessary parameters in PayPal Pro payment method on page 75 Payment process from the customer viewpoint The customer selects the PayPal Pro payment method in the shopping basket In the last step of the order process he enters his credit card data PayPal immediately verifies the data If errors occurred the customer can correct these or select another payment method Once PayPal has verified the data successfully the order confirmation is shown to the customer along with the PayPal transaction number PayPal Pro transactions Page Orders Transactions PayPal Pro After the customer has completed the order this is shown in your PayPal Pro Manager as well as in the list of PayPal Pro transactions in your shop administration The table lists all the current PayPal Pro transactions Above the icon after the transaction number
128. are later entered in the field should be able to be formatted with HTML Name Language dependent name used to Entry field alpha Weight display the attribute numeric Tool tip text Language dependent short explanation Entry field alpha Tent weight travel of the field displayed in the administra numeric weight In the case of attributes with value selection and options you must also create and edit the value pool in the Value selection tab For more information see Using text with value selection on page 33 and Using options on page 34 User guide for Web site administrators Page 123 Products Price lists Product type details Layout Page Products Product types product type Layout Using the layout options for a product type you can configure how products of this type are displayed in the shop You can use the following layouts Table 73 layout variations for product display Layout Comment Product details Alignment of product image and descriptive text to each other in the product view in display the shop Variations display Shows the variations for a product If a large number of variations for a product exist select the layout using a drop down menu This allows the page to be displayed more quickly and increases clarity If only a few variations have been created we recommend the table layout is used Image lists are best used if a small number of variations with different images are to be disp
129. asket User guide for Web site administrators Page 93 Settings Shopping basket settings Option Comment does not change the num The entry in the shopping basket remains unchanged ber in the shopping basket creates anewlineitemin The product is added as a new line item to the shopping basket the shopping basket Layout of the function Add to shopping basket This function is used to place products in the shopping basket The function is available on product detail pages and in product lists The following options are available for displaying this function Table 58 Options for displaying the function Add to shopping basket Option Comment Link The function is a link By clicking the link the minimum order quantity of the product is placed in the shopping basket Entry field for quantity The function comprises an entry field and a link A minimum order quantity is entered in the entry field Any quantity can be entered Click the link to place the specified quantity in the shopping basket Entry field for quantity with The function comprises an entry field a function and a link A minimum function field order quantity is entered in the entry field The function can be used to change the amount by the increment defined It is also possible to enter any number Click the link to place the specified quantity in the shopping bas ket Quantity drop down menu The function comprises a drop down menu and a link
130. ation about PayPalis available at www paypal com To set all necessary parameters in the shop administration see Payment method with PayPal on page 75 Payment process from the customer s point of view During the order process the customer selects the PayPal payment method He is then transferred to the PayPal Web site Depending upon your membership he can select between credit card payment and Pay Pal payment methods The customer enters and confirms the data required by his selection Afterwards he is brought back to the shop and receives the order confirmation This contains the payment method and transaction number as signed by PayPal Paypal transactions Page Orders Transactions PayPal The table lists all the transactions customers have performed using PayPal The Status column informs you about the current status of the transaction Table 126 Status of Paypal transactions Description The transaction must be verified and manually finalised or rejected by you in the PayPal administration As soon as you have set the status in PayPal itis updated in the shop administra tion Closed Transaction is finalised automatically Payment has been initiated Use the Go to PayPal administration link to switch to your PayPal administration User guide for Web site administrators Page 195 Orders PayPal Pro Search for PayPal transactions Using the search you can group and filter PayPal transactions You can se
131. automatically refer to the description or recommend con tacting you as the seller Note Since the customer finalises the process in your shop the delivery methods mentioned here are only for his information The methods should however be the same as those that you offer in the shop The types that are valid for the customer are shown in the finalising order process in the shop Go from page to page by clicking Next gt gt or lt lt Previous or click the tab headings Payment This is where you define the payment methods that you wish to offer to your eBay customers Each eBay country platform offers certain payment methods which are listed in a drop down menu Select a method for each and save your entries by clicking Save You have to select at least one method If you save without selecting a method the Next button remains disabled A universal method is available This refers to the description of the item Use this if none of the methods offered applies to you Note Since the customer finalises the process in your shop the payment methods mentioned here are only for his information The methods should however be the same as those that you offer in the shop The types that are valid for the customer are shown in the finalising order process in the shop Go from page to page by clicking Next gt gt or lt lt Previous or click the tab headings Verification The last step of the eBay assistant consists of verifyin
132. ave Creating Moneybookers payment methods When you create a payment method based on Moneybookers you see a list of instructions on the side with settings for you to perform step by step Note the following When creating the payment method the Wa et method is selected by default The drop down menu is not yet available Fill out the entry fields and save your entries by clicking Save After this the drop down menu is activated and you can change the payment method as required To show credit card symbols in the shop select the corresponding checkbox and save your entries by clicking Save Place the page element for the Moneybookers payment methods that you accept on the Web site For more information see Page elements and navigation on page 181 Various payment types can be handled using Moneybookers However you must create a new payment method based on Moneybookers for each payment type This process is simplified by the Would you like to create another Moneybookers payment method function Click the link to create an additional payment method Select the desired payment type from the drop down menu and click Create This creates a new Moneybookers payment method All fields are already filled with data and the desired payment method is configured in the drop down menu Note The Moneybookers payment method is only shown in the shopping basket if you have set the methods to Visible User guide for Web site administrators Pa
133. ave configured price reductions for a product a Price reductions link will be shown in the product detail view in the shop The customer can click this link to see the price reductions Bulk discount Page Products product Prices Bulk discount In this section you can configure discounts based on unit numbers You can define bulk prices and or per cent discounts The reductions are connected to a price list in which you can also set the validity period and the customer or customer group see Price lists on page 124 In the table you can display and edit two price lists at the same time This lets you compare for example lists for different currencies or periods of validity When you call up the page the first two price lists of your price list table are displayed If these do not in clude the price list that you wish to edit simply select the correct price list from the drop down menu The icon to the left of the drop down menu shows whether the price list is currently active You can click this icon to call up details for the price list being displayed To do so click the H icon Note The price lists in which the current product is already included are marked with an asterisk This gives you a quicker overview of which price lists are associated with the product After you have selected a price list the entries it contains are displayed Edit the values directly in the entry fields Save your entries by clicking Save
134. ay The Amount column shows the value from the basket The Authorised amount column shows the value in the currency that the cus tomer paid to WorldPay The AVS column shows the AVS Code for the transaction The AVS code address verification system dis plays the results of the customer data check Not all WorldPay access methods support this AVS code It depends on the customer s bank and the type of contract you signed with WorldPay User guide for Web site administrators Page 193 Orders T Pay The code structure and the meaning of the individual areas are found in the AVS Code area in the lower part of the page According to the settings for the payment method the customer account is either debited the amount automatically or you must do this manually see Payment method with WorldPay on page 72 Click the 70 your WorldPay administration page link for this purpose Search for WorldPay orders Using the search you can group and filter WorldPay transactions You can search with the following addi tional criteria Transaction no Time period in which the transaction was performed For basic information on using the search function see Search on page 28 T Pay T Pay is the payment system from Deutsche Telekom Customers are offered various payment variations The customers are forwarded to the T Pay system for payment The transaction information is entered here You the merchant must conclude the transaction in you
135. ayment For the payment methods with special settings there is an addition Settings tab on which these settings can be configured This tab is used to set the tax rate prices maximum values and calculation basis and other parameters The current tax model is displayed for the prices see 7ax model on page 61 Customer groups in payment methods Page Settings Delivery and payment Payment methods payment method Customer groups Each payment method can be assigned to customer groups This means that only the customers that be long to an assigned customer group can use this payment method It is then only displayed for these cus tomers The table shows all the customer groups to which this payment method has been assigned To add a customer group select one from the drop down menu and click Save To remove a customer group from the list click the relevant check box and click Remove assignment Direct debit payment methods Before the ordering process is completed the customer is shown a from in which he enters the account de tails required for direct debit For international bank transfers the customers can enter IBAN and SWIFT codes in the form Payment method with direct debit via fax The various fields have the following meanings Table 32 Parameters for the payment method Direct debit via fax Field name Description Field type Example Fax form Document with the form which the Entry field alpha FaxForm_en
136. ayment method The basics about working with PayPal Express can be found in PayPal Express on page 197 The various fields have the following meanings Table 42 parameters for the PayPal Express payment method Field Name Description Field type Example Create new PayPal Link to live system of PayPal to create a Link account new merchant account Go to PayPal ad Link to open your PayPal administra Link ministration tion User name API pass Unique name and password generated Entry field alpha Pre_apil user com word by PayPal that can only be used for API numeric Z24DH2RTFOLF3W calls These are used in every API call The API user name and password are not the same as the PayPal user name e mail address and password You can find this parameter in your PayPal administration at My Profile gt API access Request API access data String for secure identification during Entry field alpha ACeyDba data transfer numeric Yy5qFWAOA2QHhyvP You can find these parameters in your NP AGWuwcdlUam PayPal administration at My Profile gt API Access gt Request API access data Operational mode To use the test mode you need a mer Drop down menu chant and buyer account on the PayPal sandbox The sandbox is a test system To create a new merchant test account click Create a PayPal test account on the sandbox system Page 76 User guide for Web site administrators Delivery and payment Settings Fie
137. c details allow you to edit the general settings for the topic and the list of associated posts Page 154 User guide for Web site administrators Blog Contents The various fields have the following meanings Table 98 Entry field for topics Field name Description Field type Subject Topic title Entry field alpha Forum etiquette numeric Permit further posts No further posts can be added to this Option button topic even if users have sufficient permission Save your entries by clicking Save The table lists all the posts for the topic If visitors report that a post is suspected of being spam the post is marked with the lt 4 icon As well as the username the IP address of the computer from which the post was submitted is also displayed You can sort the table by column For more details see Sorting using column headings on page 28 You can also create your own posts here To create a new post proceed as described in Adding records on page 26 To delete a post follow the steps described in Deleting entries on page 26 Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 The following specialised actions can be performed Table 99 Specialised batch processing commands for forum posts Command Comment Delete Suspected spam The marker that identifies a post or topic as being spam is deleted marker Save your entries by
138. campaigns Details Newsletter on page 207 Allocate a mean ingful name 4 Open the details of the new newsletter and enter the relevant data and lay out the text For more infor mation see Newsletter details General on page 208 and Creating the newsletter content on page 209 Conduct a test distribution and check the results Note that in this test e mail the placeholders will not be replaced by current data 5 Normally subscribers register for your newsletter using the Web site However if you already have ad dressees for the newsletter you must enter them Do this on the Addressees tab in the campaign de tails Enter the known addressees or import the data See Newsletter campaigns Details Address ees on page 211 6 In order to inform visitors to your Web site of your newsletters and to interest them in subscribing you need to enter and display a corresponding text For more information see Newsletter campaigns Texts Seite 205 7 Once all the preparatory work is complete set the campaign as visible You can do this either in the Campaign details or by running a batch processing command in the table of newsletter campaigns 8 In order to allow your Web visitors to sign up for the newsletters you also have to make the corre sponding function available on the Web site This is done using the navigation elements Newsletter subscription and Link to newsletter subscription See also Page elements and navigation
139. can control the slideshow Special control elements are displayed for this purpose You must stipulate whether large or small control ele ments are displayed Scrollbars Option button Value in pixels px specifying the size Drop down menu in which the images are displayed on the Web site Preview Size of images in enlarged Size of images view zoom function Detail view Large view of images in the slideshow Directory If you save your photos in a directory in Entry field alpha Photos File Management specify the corre numeric sponding directory here For more about this see File management on page 44 You can click Browse to open the File Management and select a di rectory Save your entries by clicking Save Images In the table you can see all the photos that you have uploaded for this image gallery To see a magnified view click an image You can enter additional data for archiving for each image This data is displayed along with the image on the Web site To enter this information for other languages se lect the corresponding language from the drop down menu above the table Save your entries by clicking Save You can set the sequence using the sorting key in the last column of the table For more details see Sorting using key on page 28 To upload new images follow the instructions found in Uploading images on page 43 To delete an image proceed as described in Deleting entries on p
140. can specify a different tax model for individual customers This setting then overrides the default set ting for this customer The customer Sees the prices according to the model that has been configured for him When selecting the tax model Gross you can set whether the VAT is shown in the shopping basket and in all e mails and documents associated with the order In some cases merchants are not required to show tax If you do not need to reveal the tax amount you can create a corresponding note for the customer us ing the text field This text is then displayed in the correct place Note that these settings must also match the text that is displayed in addition to the product prices For more information see 7exts on page 97 Entering prices The option Entry of prices in administration on basis ofstipulates whether the prices you enter are net or inclusive of VAT This applies to product prices reductions payment methods and delivery methods or for all price information that is linked to a tax class The tax model does not differentiate between prices for which no tax class has been assigned Such prices include for example coupon values Save your entries by clicking Save Delivery and payment Here you can manage and configure the payment and delivery methods you offer in your shop The system provides relevant calculation models which form the basis for the individual methods Delivery methods Page Settings Delivery and
141. cate when you have entered the maximum number of attribute values If you need additional val ues you must enter these directly for the corresponding product type Click Next to go on to the next step When doing this please note the following The icon allows you to delete values and attributes Attributes which have already been saved for the product type are displayed in grey The available val ues cannot be changed You may still add values Saved attributes can only be deleted in the details of the relevant product type See also Product type details Attributes on page 123 If variation products have already been created the product type assignment cannot be changed The drop down menu is displayed in grey You must first delete all relevant variation products before changing the product type assignment Only the attributes defined in the assistant are displayed for a new product type If you would like to create additional attributes open the details of the product type see Product type details Attributes on page 123 For language dependent attribute values you can only create the value for the administration language in the assistant The values for additional languages must be created in the product type details see Product type details Attributes on page 123 2 Variation products On this page you can see the variations which can be made by combining the attribute values The name consists of the
142. ce or day For basic in formation on using the search function see Search on page 28 Page 170 User guide for Web site administrators Design basics Design 10 Design The Design option has comprehensive functions to help you adapt the layout and design of your Web site to your needs Click Styles to edit the list of styles that you have prepared for your Web site see Sty es on page 175 A wide selection of templates is available under Templates The templates are categorised into topics and provide suitable designs for each topic For more information see 7emplates on page 176 In addition the sub menu contains the styles that you have already selected for your Web site The style that is currently active is highlighted You can call up each individual style directly and edit the design and layout You are working in a page preview The available functions are provided by the multifunction bar in the upper area see Multifunction bar and design on page 176 The Quick Design function helps you to make basic adjustments to the design For more information see Quick Design on page 183 Design basics You edit the design and layout in a WYSIWYG mode In the browser you can see the preview of the page that you are editing Any changes are displayed immediately The working area of the browser is split in two In the upper section you can see the multifunction bar This displays the available functions For more information see Mu
143. ceceuenes ines 193 VOT I ters cest starts cet cette cers sea teeth teenies O 193 Payment process from the customer s point of view 193 WorldPay transactions ccccscsccecscececececscscscsececscececesececs 193 Search for WorldPay O1d ers cccdssccnieetcieiinokinn cersteoeae eas 194 sale Vi PEA E raise E E A E AANE T EEA EEE 194 Payment process from the customer s point of view 194 PePay Wa lSac On S eani T A N 194 Search for T Pay transactions cccececececececscecscecececeseececs 195 Par E T T T 195 Payment process from the customer s point of view 195 PaypaltransactiONS cciunciwdsiuewscsastenticneues 195 Search for PayPal transactions cccsccscecececececscscscsececsces 196 Pay Pl Pion cossicansavastuacdedyencacucemantuassaeadeentend a N 196 Payment process from the customer viewpoint ceceeees 196 PayPal Pro transactions nciiciasvaaxoi stasaeieasadeeseonawoltaiessiededeatuns 196 Searching PayPal Pro tranSactiOnsS ccececececscscscecsceceeees 197 Pay Pal EXDIOSS scscsasciiswatnsdavetedsuencaguaaedeomseaenesentecaanteee ieee 197 Payment process from the customer viewpoint 0ee00 197 PayPal Express tranSactiOons cccscsccscecececscscsccecscscececececs 197 Searching PayPal Express tranSactiOns ccecececscsecececeees 198 BOOSIE CHECKOUT onoraria oa last suisel acne eluent eres 198 Payment process from the customer viewpoint
144. cscnscecscees 65 Delivery method Weight of the products in the shopping basket 65 Delivery method Number of products in the shopping DasSKet essees 66 Payment Methods reni 66 General properties for payment methodS sssssssseessssssessesesse 69 Page 4 User guide for Web site administrators Table of Contents Customer groups in payment Methods ceccscecececscscseeees 70 Direct debit payment Methods ccccecececscscscseececscececees 70 Payment method with direct debit via fax ceceecscecececees 70 Fixed price payment Method ceccccececececscscscsecececscececees 70 Payment method with exemption limits cccceceesecececeeees 71 Payment method with credit card Manual ceccececececees 71 Payment method with WorldPay cecececscecececscscscscecececs 72 FPaypayment metno decana a 74 Payment method with PayPal ccccecececscscsccccecscececececees 75 PayPal Pro payment Method ccecececscecececececcscscececececeees 75 PayPal Express payment method ccccecececscscscsececscsceeees 76 Google Checkout payment method cecececcecececececececeees 77 ClickandBuy payment Method cscscscsccececececececscseseeees 78 Atos Worldline payment method ccccecececscscsecececscececers 80 Sofortiiberweisung payment Method ccceceecececececscsceees 80 Payment method with HSBC
145. curity modular ar chitecture scalability high availability and on a user friendly interface Together with the high performance database the highest requirements for data volume and access can be met The program lets you set up and maintain a Web site on the Internet through which you can offer your products and take care of your customers all without a lot of help from a service provider Prerequisites The program is browser based The minimum specification for administrative purposes is Internet Explorer 7 0 and higher Mozilla 2 0 and higher When it comes to displaying the Web site or shop the system supports the latest browsers on various ope rating systems For administrative tasks the requires a screen resolution of 1 024 x 786 pixels and a colour depth of at least 65 000 colours In order to use all the functions of the application you must enable the following in your browser JavaScript Session cookies pop up windows Java Applets Flash content User guide for Web site administrators Page 13 Quickstart 2 Quickstart The following section describes the basic steps involved in making your Web site available for your cus tomers to use Once these steps have been performed the Web site is basically ready for use However there are many other options for optimising the Web site in respect of your own needs After completing the following steps your Web site is ready for use Sign in
146. currency is 5 Rappen all the prices must be rounded to increments of 5 Rappen that is every price must end with 5 or 0 As soon as you enter prices in the currency Swiss Francs the system checks the entry and rounds the price whenever necessary Countries Page Settings Country Settings Countries This is where you specify the countries available for users when registering on your Web site or when en tering their address Page 88 User guide for Web site administrators Country settings Settings The countries in the table will be listed in the country drop down menus Use the Defau toption button to set which country will be displayed as standard You can set the sequence using the sorting key in the last column of the table For more details see Sorting using key on page 28 Save your entries by clicking Save To add a new country to the list select it in the drop down menu below the table and click Save To delete a country from the table proceed as described in Deleting entries on page 26 This will delete the entry from the table The country will however still be available in the drop down menu below the table and can added again at any time Note Note that if you select a country from the list you must be able to guarantee order processing and delivery in this country Only include those countries in your list for which you can deliver under the given conditions Regions Page Settings Country Settings
147. d and click Generate codes automatically Creating new coupon codes using newsletter dispatch See Using coupons in newsletters on page 217 Note As soon as you have generated coupon codes you can no longer modify the basic settings on the General page Delete all coupons in order to be able to change the parameters again Note Deleted coupon codes lose their validity and can no longer be redeemed by customers Creating coupons What should you do when you create coupons The next section will describe the individual steps in volved without going into too many details These details are discussed in the relevant chapters To create coupons and make them available to your customers proceed as follows 1 First create a coupon campaign see Coupons on page 214 Allocate a meaningful name Page 216 User guide for Web site administrators Coupons Marketing 2 Enter the details of the campaign Add a description to further explain the name Describe clearly why and for what reason you are issuing coupons so that there are no misunderstandings when they are redeemed This especially applies to coupons to which specific conditions are attached For informa tion on the settings required see Coupon campaign General on page 214 3 Ifyou want to stipulate further conditions on the redemption of the coupon in addition to the mini mum order value and validity period see Coupon campaign Validity on page 215 Configure the cor r
148. d from the order to the invoice address and the default delivery address Sign in Page Customers customer User data Sign in On this page you can manage data used to control customer access rights to your shop The various fields have the following meanings Table 84 sign in fields Field name Description Field type Example Allow sign in This is where you give the customer the right Option button to access the areas of your shop that require signing in Name Display name in the sign in box in the online Entry field al John Doe shop if the customer has signed in phanumeric User Name Sign in name for the Web site Entry field al jdoe phanumeric HTML e mail mes Yes The message will be displayed with the Option button sages correct formatting No The text will be sent without HTML codes E mail All system generated customer relevant e Entry field al j doe provider c mail messages are sent to the registered phanumeric o uk customer at this address Language The language in which the user views the Drop down menu Web site This is the currency that the user has cur Drop down menu rently configured for the Web site You can change the currency settings The user will then see this currency when he next signs on Assign password Click Send new password to send the cus Button automatically tomer a new password via e mail The system automatically generates the password and sends it to the e mail add
149. d type Example Status When you click Save the current date Check box is added to the selected status Multi ple statuses can be set Registered customers can view the status in the shop Order number Unique number that is assigned by the Entry field alpha 1005 system when the order is created This numeric can be changed here 3 Send order receipt This sends information about the cur Link confirmation rent order to the customer by e mail The order confirmation is sent to the e mail address specified in the invoice address for this order Order comment During the order process customers Display can enter a comment about the order If the customer has entered a com ment it is displayed here Internal note Comments or information about the Text field alphanu Callthe customer order For internal use meric back tion Page 186 User guide for Web site administrators Orders Details Orders Field name Description Field type Example Edit This activates the order information for Button processing Delete You can only delete orders with the Button status Rejected or Archived Save your entries by clicking Save Notes 1 If you set an order to Rejected the stock level for the relevant product is corrected automatically 2 Due to security reasons credit card data in the database for orders paid to you by credit card pay ment method Credit card manual is deleted after the order is set to the stat
150. der to select a colour see Colour selector on page 43 Page 40 User guide for Web site administrators WYSIWYG editor Basic principles Comment Background colour The background colour of the cell replaces the background colour of the table for the cell Use the colour selector in order to select a colour see Co our selector on page 43 Drop down menu _ Here you can Set which cells are effected by the settings This can be just the current with values for cell or all cells of the table effected cells Click on Update to apply all settings Merge split cells You can merge cells together to one combined cell This can be done using the following methods Select the cells that you want to merge Do that by moving the mouse over the affected cells while keeping the left mouse button pressed down Then click the H icon The cells are joined together into one Place the cursor into a cell and click the H icon This opens a new window see Figure 18 Merge cells x7 Merge cells Columns Lines Figure 18 Merge cells Use this option to define the size of the merged cell When merging cells from within a cell you should be aware of the following The starting point is the current cell the cell you called the function from The cells to the right and below the current cell are effected Usethe Columns and Rows fields to define which cells will be merged The current cell is also taken into account in t
151. des the definition of colours images and fonts as well as the layout configuration and the distribution of functional elements on your Web page You can create several styles for your Web site The table in the My Styles section lists the styles you have created for your Web site A preview image is displayed for each style The image shows the original layout of the template for this style If you make changes to the style these changes are not visible in the preview image in the table As soon as a Style is edited and the changes have been saved the change is indicated by an icon paintbrush on the preview image In addition the date of the last change to the respective style is entered in the table The style that is set to Vis b e determines the appearance of the shop for your customers You can edit all the other styles without this having any effect on how the Web site is presented to your customer This allows you to prepare and test additional styles You can activate one of the other styles at any time Click the Visible option button for the corresponding style You can edit a style using one of the following methods Click the link Start Quick Design This takes you to the page preview where you can edit the basic style settings For more information see Quick Design on page 183 Click the link Start advanced design or click the preview image This takes you to the page preview where you can edit the style directly All style
152. details User data on page 133 lf user data is entered in the import file the customer is created as a user and can sign in to the Web site User guide for Web site administrators Page 137 Customers Import and export Note When a user is created the sign in name and the automatically generated password are sent to the customer by e mail The corresponding e mail events must be activated for this to occur however see E mail settings Events on page 91 In the import file you can set the default language and currency for the user in the columns Language country User Locale D and Currency User Currency D These settings are effective when the new user signs in to the Web site for the first time Page 138 User guide for Web site administrators Creating new pages Contents 8 Contents In the Content area you can edit the structure and content of your Web site Do this using the structure elements such as Cafegoryor Page These allow you to group the content for your customers into a desired hierarchy of pages In Pages Previewyou can manage the structure and edit text fields directly within the page preview See also Pages Preview on page 140 In Pages Datasheetyou can edit all the other data that forms part of a structure element See Datasheet view on page 143 Use the function Current page Preview Datasheetto switch between the edit modes You can import and export existing structures See mport
153. divided into the following sections Product portals see Product Portals below eBay see eBay on page 122 Product Portals Page Products product Portals Product portals User guide for Web site administrators Page 121 Products Product types The table shows an overview of the available product portals and the portals to which the current product is exported For these the corresponding check box in the Ass gned column is selected To assign the cur rent product to a list for a portal click the relevant check box To delete a product from an export list re move the tick in the relevant check box Save your entries by clicking Save To open the details for a product portal click the relevant link See also Product Portals on page 219 eBay Page Products product Portals eBay All eBay items based on a product are displayed in this table The table is comparable in composition and function to the table for all eBay items See also tems on page 230 in the eBay chapter On the product eBay page you can immediately create a new item for this product To do this click Create new item The item will be generated with the default values See also Default values on page 235 To edit item details see tem settings eBay assistant on page 232 You can also upload the item to eBay when it is created Select the Upload as an eBay item immediately check box before clicking the link The item will be checked a
154. ds Column Description Field type Example Credit card Name of the credit card Entry field alpha MasterCard numeric User guide for Web site administrators Page 71 Settings Delivery and payment Column Description Field type Example Credit Card Identifica A specific number usually in the signa Drop down menu See 7able 37 below tion Code ture field on the back of the credit card Extra issue numbers on some credit A i Table 37 below cards Issue date Issue date on some credit cards Drop down menu See Table 37 below The drop down menus offer the following options Table 37 options in the drop down menus Option Description Entry required The customer must enter the required value Entry optional The customer can enter the required value if desired Noenty JThe field is not displayed You can set the sequence using the sorting key in the last column of the table For more details see Sorting using key on page 28 To add a new entry follow the steps described in Adding records on page 26 Save your entries by clicking Save In the Credit card logos section select the card logos for display in your shop Select the relevant check boxes Save your entries by clicking Save Before the logos can be displayed in your shop the corresponding page elements must be placed on your Web site For more information see the section Page elements and navigation in the Page elements and navigation chapter on p
155. duct will not automatically be made Visible again since there could be other reasons for it to be Not visible You must set the product to Visible either in the details or using batch processing see Products on page 103 You can configure the system to notify you as soon as a product has reached the stock level Oor has reached or fallen below the minimum stock level To do this configure the corresponding e mail messages in the e mail settings For more details see E mail settings Events on page 91 Auto cross selling Page Settings Product Settings Auto cross selling As opposed to manual cross selling see Product details Cross selling on page 119 automatic cross selling is based on analysis of customer buying patterns In this process data is collected about how often a product is bought in relation to another product Using this information allows products that are often purchased together to be offered for sale together The various fields have the following meanings Table 61 auto cross selling fields Field name Description Field type Example Collect statistics Activate deactivate the automatic Option button collection of product data for auto matic cross selling Statistics collection must be activated in order for the corresponding data base to be set up and to provide data for meaningful cross selling sugges tions Visible Cross selling products are displayed in Option button the shop Number of
156. e Ifthe file contains errors the incorrect products are not displayed at Google Base Pay close attention to any error messages during export correct the error and start the export again Always use the same file name otherwise the system will not recognise the file and it will not be proc essed Your products will be removed from the Google Base catalogue after a certain time Therefore to offer your products on Google again upload a file at least once a month For more on product export see Product list and export on page 221 For more on etracker evaluation see etracker reporting on page 221 guenstiger de The general settings which must be edited for every portal are described in General settings on page 219 For more on product export see Product list and export on page 221 For more on etracker evaluation see etracker reporting on page 221 Preissuchmaschine The general settings which must be edited for every portal are described in General settings on page 219 For more on product export see Product list and export on page 221 For more on etracker evaluation see etracker reporting on page 221 Shopping com The general settings which must be edited for every portal are described in General settings on page 219 Note the following exceptions Page 224 User guide for Web site administrators Google registration Marketing Table 145 specialised settings for Shopping com export Field name
157. e Co English Deutsch Co English Deutsch English Deutsch Guenstiger iger English Deutsch Co a mn E Ta Fo L Tal 5 ie 8 ib Preissuchmaschine Preissuchmaschine Englizh Preizsuchmaschine Deutsch Personal recommendation English Personliche Empfehlung Deutsch English Deutsch Figure 11 Value pool forthe attribute type Language dependent text with value selection Save your entries by clicking Save The customer can then use the following drop down menu in the registration form Additional information Where did you hear about ws Select entry Kelkoo Yahoo guenstiger de Pri li N i Preizsuchimaschine m P rivacy policy Mo personal ini Percona recommendation YOUF express consent Figure 12 using an attribute with value selection You can use these attribute types in the administration area for example for product attributes This saves you time when creating elements helps you avoid mistakes and ensures valid values are entered You can read how to use attribute types for product variations in Creating a variation on page 115 Using options These attribute types provide the user with a value pool from which to select multiple values Each value can be selected by clicking the check box next to it This technique is useful for creating different product configurations Just as in 7ext with value selection you define a value pool which can be used for this a
158. e 164 These apply as default values as long as they are not overwritten by special settings for an individual re source see Resource details Appointments on page 167 Settings define whether appointments are confirmed automatically or manually by e mail To enable this the corresponding e mail events must be activated see E mail settings Events on page 91 Resources are managed in a similar way to products After editing the general properties with prices and descriptions you can assign images and define category assignments If your customers have to pay to reserve a given timeslot you have to define the payment methods that you accept for this payment For more information see Dependencies on page 84 The appointments for each resource are listed in a special tab see Resource details Appointments on page 167 Working with the booking system This chapter describes the basics of working with the booking system This covers the provision of re sources through the site to the editing of appointments This description is a guide it does not explore not every single last detail or option 1 Setand display business hours Enter the business hours during which you want to offer your resources or during which you are avail able for your customers See also Business hours on page 55 Display these hours on the Web site See also Business hours on page 153 2 Activate e mail events Various e mail events can be triggered in
159. e any necessary changes to your templates Page 102 User guide for Web site administrators eBay settings Products 6 Products Page Products The table lists all the products If you have created more than 100 products after calling the first page ini tially no more products will be displayed Start a search to display all products The symbols have the fol lowing meanings Table 65 product icon legend Description Product in stock at a sufficient level and visible or no stock level has been entered The product is a master product that is variations of this product have been defined see Product details Variations on page 113 Clicking the icon forwards you to a list of the variations which belong to this master product The product is a product bundle that is multiple products are combined into one package see Creating a product bundle on page 105 Clicking the icon forwards you to a list of the products which belong to this bundle To open the details of a product click its name Clicking the icon to the left next to the product number opens a new browser window containing the product details To delete a product proceed as described in Deleting entries on page 26 You can sort the table by column For more details see Sorting using column headings on page 28 Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 The
160. e between the top edge of the browser window and the top of the Web site To edit these settings click the display area of the browser in the area adjacent to the Web site The available functions are displayed in the multifunction bar When the display area is active the following function groups are available in the multifunction bar File see File on page 177 Area see Area on page 177 Page areas see Page areas on page 1 8 Icon set see con set on page 178 Horizontal areas The horizontal areas Header Top Bottom Foote mostly extend over the entire width of the Web site They are wider than they are high see Figure 27 on page 172 Horizontal areas mostly contain links and narrow display elements Typical page elements for horizontal areas include Logo Name of the Web site Link to the Home page Contact information Terms and Conditions Customer information Categories Shopping basket Flags forthe country selection For more information on page elements see Page elements and navigation on page 181 When a horizontal area is active the following function groups are available in the multifunction bar File see File on page 177 Area see Area on page 177 Font see font on page 178 Page elements see Page elements on page 179 Vertical areas The vertical areas eft rightare mostly located between horizontal areas and lie parallel to the content area They are higher than they
161. e booking system see Booking system settings on page 164 Duration Here you can set the duration of the Entry field numeric 45 minute s Service oe you can set the price per time Entry field numeric 24 hour s unit Save your entries by clicking Save Resource details Options Page Booking system General resource Options You can create options for a resource Using these options you can allow your customers to make certain selections for the resource For example in the case of a table reservation you could offer the type of table decoration as a Selection To create such options you must create a corresponding attribute for the default product type Proceed as follows Page 166 User guide for Web site administrators Resources Booking system 1 Click Edit product type This takes you to the page containing the attributes for the default product type 2 Enterthe ID and name of the attribute and select the attribute type Customer options Save your en tries by clicking Save 3 Click the name of the new attribute to edit the details Enter the general details 4 Click the Value selection tab to enter the selection values Save your entries by clicking Save 5 Switch to the page with the options for the corresponding resource Here you will see the attribute val ues with check boxes Highlight the options that you want to make available to the customers on the Web site 6 Save your e
162. e editor click Cancel RSS page content RSS page content RSS feeds are lists of short messages that can be integrated into your Web site They are comparable to a news ticker In an RSS feed the news is summarised briefly in headlines A link allows the visitor to jump to the entire message RSS feeds are available from many different providers on many different topics When you have clicked the icon a new window allows you to select various types of multimedia elements The area for selecting and inserting RSS feeds is expanded The RSS feeds are sorted according to topic To select an RSS feed click the name or the preview image The details page for the RSS feed is displayed You can configure certain settings here Try these settings out to optimise the way the RSS feed integrates into your page Click Update to check your changes in the preview Click Apply to insert the RSS feed into the text field at the cursor position Click Overview to return to the list of RSS feeds To cancel the command and return to the editor click Cancel Page 42 User guide for Web site administrators Uploading images Basic principles Uploading images You can load images using an Open file dialog in the administration A functional area is shown for this at the correct place in the corresponding page On this area you can see the Upload button To upload files click the Upload button The Browse for files dialog is then opened Search for the de
163. e field be displayed with the name See also Date Date entry fields on page 30 Description Language dependent short summary of Text field As well as a fresh the content to be displayed in the list design Milestones view and in the header for the detail offers you the oppor view of this page tunity For more on formatting see Working with text fields on page 35 Attachment Language dependent attachment for Entry field alpha Flyer_de pdf the Content page Either enter the numeric name of the file with its path directly or click Browse to search for the file Delete Delete attachment Button Attachment label Language dependent title forthe link Entry field alpha Print our Specials to the attachment numeric Save your entries by clicking Save Link You can use the Link component to place a link to another page in your Web site General In addition to some settings that are valid for all pages General on page 143 you must also edit the fol lowing settings Table 95 Additional fields Link Field name Description Field type Newwindow Display in a new browser window Option button web page Internet address URL of the link Text field http www meindl d Always enter absolute links in the form e http You can enter a separate URL for each language Save your entries by clicking Save Promotional products Promotional products are products which are presented separately in the shop U
164. e for the tollowing product s attached No Quantity Product no Hame UP VAT Discount TP T Leatherman Pocket Sur T2956 19 7295 piece Ht_ 0407107001 2 ae Jack Wolfskin Flexibi 49995 19 499 95 a piece ho_ 1112105010 3 Subtotal 572 90 4 Delivery method Postal service el 5 Payment method Invoice a B Tax area EU country T Total amount incl VAT 572 90 5 Total amount vvithout YAT 493 56 9 Including WAT of EU Land 16 19 79 02 Line tems are alzo available on other invoices Customer notice Best regards Karl Kaufmann Company Hudson House Tavistock Street 6 London WCE TPP United Kingdom Figure 28 Invoice view The sender information is taken from the Web site address data See Address on page 55 Various numbers and date entries must be entered for each document type To enter dates use the calen dar function see Date entry fields on page 30 Always click Save after entering the document number and date Otherwise the current data will not be applied in the print view The quantity values can be adjusted to fit the individual order positions Enter the relevant quantity You can create a notice for the customer in connection with the current document in the Customer notice text field Save your entries by clicking Save Totals in the document are updated User guide for Web site administrators Page 189 Orders Orders Documents If a position number is
165. e individual delivery methods have different underlying calculation models The general properties are the same for all delivery methods The various fields have the following meanings Table 23 general fields for all delivery methods Field name Description Field type Example Entry field alpha PickupByCustomer numeric Visible o fption button f S Defined as the default method Option button User guide for Web site administrators Page 63 Settings Delivery and payment Field name Description Field type Example Permit usage for fol This option allows you to set the re Drop down menu lowing delivery ad gional validity for the delivery method dresses For more on regions see Regions on page 89 Name used to display the method This Entry field alpha is language dependent Please check in at ery method i the depot The language dependent contents are displayed to the customer during the order process directly below the method and the packing slip is printed For more on formatting see Working with text fields on page 35 Save your entries by clicking Save The Visible and Defaultfields are not active for the method marked as Default If you want to edit the set tings for this method you must first set another method to default For all chargeable delivery methods there is an additional tab Settings that contains specific settings for the method This tab is used to set the tax class prices maxim
166. e remain the same the save button is displayed grey and is inactive If you have made changes the button is activated and appears with a green border sas As well as this a appears in the title bar of the browser so that you can quickly recognise from the Win dows taskbar that the content of the browser has not been saved Web site views If you create or edit information which is visible on the Web site you should also make sure that the infor mation has been transmitted and is displayed correctly You can call up the latest version of the pages of your Web site in a new window by clicking the first link in the Administration navigation bar see Administration navigation on page 19 The page is displayed using the active style If you edit a different style the Web site is displayed using the design stipulated by that style See also Styles on page 175 User guide for Web site administrators Page 25 Basic principles Tables Tables A table is a list of objects Information can be added to a table modified or deleted To increase the clar ity to fit your requirements you can sort the records according to various methods In some tables you can define the contents using a search filter Ifthe record is displayed as a link click it to display details In some tables the information is augmented with symbols These symbols are often links with varying meaning and functionality The meaning of the icons is explained in
167. e search form contains the fields Keywords and Text When searching the terms in the Keywords field are compared with the content of the Keywords attribute The terms entered in the 7exfsearch field are compared with the content of the fields mage location and Description Terms in more than one field are linked using the AWD operator This means that if you enter a keyword and a text in the search form an image must be assigned to the keyword and the text in order to be located Search in blog guestbook and forum There is a single unified search form for these page types You can use this form to search in a specific page type or in all three together You can restrict the search to a specific page type using the check boxes and drop down menus In the search results the corresponding page type is indicated for each entry For basic information on using the search function see Search on page 28 Import and export Page Content Import and export You can read a general description about importing and exporting in the chapter mport and export on page 45 User guide for Web site administrators Page 159 Contents Import and export The following import and export types exist for categories Note the following features for these types Import export of content categories see Content Categories Pages Import Export below import export of category product assignments see Category Product assignment Import and ex
168. e table lists all the transactions customers have performed using HSBC The 7ypecolumn provides in formation about the transaction Table 129 Type for HSBC transactions Type Description Authorised The customer has successfully finalised the transaction with HSBC Payment has not occurred Paid Payment has been initiated Note Note that in the table of HSBC transactions the type and not the status is shown Debiting of Authorised transactions must be done manually by you in the HSBC administration This will however not change the type display to Paid You must set this using either batch processing commands or for each order individually Search for HSBC transactions Using the search you can group and filter HSBC transactions You can search with the following additional criteria Transaction no a type Time period in which the transaction was performed For basic information on using the search function see Search on page 28 Moneybookers Moneybookers is an e money institute and offers all key national and international payment methods from one source The money will be transferred in real time This means that it is available immediately Moneybookers offers its payment methods in a unique way Simplicity for the merchant As a merchant you only need a Moneybookers account in order to use all payment methods Through this interface you offer your customers all the major payment methods without needing con
169. e text is sent without HTML in plain text regardless of the current setting Used as a Subject in the newsletter e Entry field alpha Travel literature at mail message numeric max 255 Milestones characters Text Newsletter content Text field On any amp nbsp tour For more information see Creating the you not only need newsletter content on page 209 the right equipment but also the right travel literature We are excited Add products and For more on working with the tray see Link categories from tray 7ay on page 21 Sender Name Together with the sender s e mailad Entry field alpha Milestones Team dress this comprises an extended e numeric mail address Milestones Team lt info provider de gt Sender e mail Entry field alpha _ info provider de numeric Send date Time at which the newsletter is auto Date field 10 8 2008 08 30 matically sent Dateset Dipy a Page 208 User guide for Web site administrators Newsletter campaigns Marketing Field name Description Field type Example Test e mail Test sending to this address balu provider de To do this click Send test e mail The button is disabled if no recipient has been entered for the test e mail see Newsletter campaigns Details General on page 206 When sending a test e mail the place holders will not be replaced by current data No coupons are created for test e mails Coupon campaign Adding coupon information to the
170. ePages User Guide for Creation and Administration of Web sites and Shops Version 6 epages 4 The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice at any time This document and all of its parts are protected by copyright All rights including copying reproduction translation storage on microfilm and all forms of archiving and processing in electronic form are expressly reserved All corporations products and trade names are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective owners Copyright 2009 ePages Software GmbH All rights reserved Should you have questions or suggestions about our products please contact us at the following address ePages Software GmbH Gerhofstrafe 2 20354 Hamburg Germany Tel 49 40 35 01 88 0 Fax 49 40 35 01 88 222 E mail pn epages de WWW www ePages com Jena February 2009 Page 2 User guide for Web site administrators Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 EERO U GLI Wi on E a E eames caees 13 General Informati ONS cccerceascdescs thecdaseveniaheduasndieseveatsiewsesdses acees 13 Prerequisites sreing a reuters nutes sbateedvecunccsetseesesestees 13 2 OUK aU oei 15 3 Bd SIC DEIN DIOS svecvsstadotaocrecagscancsadedsttecssbasaseacccnesss 19 GEN ETAL Pas lAVOUL cssceseisctsewcsesciessois eves tedinadevecisaseanwesareses 19 Administration NAVIGATION cccccccccccscscececececececscscscscscscecs 19 MEO Dares a att 20 W
171. eanings Table 79 fields for BMECat import Field name Description Field type Example Import file Either enter the name of the file with its Entry field alpha C BMECat import x path directly or click Browse to search numeric Import mode Only verify data Option button The XML file is examined for syntax errors missing elements incorrect external links incorrect units and so on Import and verify data The XML file is examined and imported Import contents Here you decide if the catalogue struc Option button ture is also to be imported If you only import the products and the assign ments you must make sure that the corresponding categories have been created Set new categories to Option button visible Set new products to Option button visible Tax area The tax area must be selected before Drop down menu the correct tax class can be assigned Save your entries by clicking Save The errors and warnings generated by mport and verify data are displayed If you consider the warnings to be unimportant you can ignore these A mistake while importing a record will cause the import to be aborted Note the following general points feature grouping systems and classification systems will be ignored buyer and supplier information will be ignored user defined extensions will be ignored User guide for Web site administrators Page 129 Products Product search in the administration area Product search i
172. eb site administrators Table of Contents CAVES OMY ea coca ve ue pase nee oa nce esos Gas tat wean cee eee 233 Detail senpase E soles souabur vane aee aaa soe 233 AVOUT EESE S E E E EE A P ASE EA E T A S sien 234 DEVEN aaran A vistwasebedteneateederentocsdoness 234 RAYMEN Eei E S 234 vernfitatoM enen n E E EE E EEA 234 Defadlt valties oori o A 235 Be KE EREI EITT AEE A OEA EEE E E EE ATE 235 Search for eBay items and orders cececececececscececececeeecs 236 T3 CGlOSSaNV aeir E 237 Ae WNC Ket e E E E moneema teen enae 241 User guide for Web site administrators Page 11 General Information Introduction 1 Introduction General Information This software is a modern and future proof e business platform for mid sized businesses It is an uncom plicated attractively priced and effective introduction to e commerce With this system you are setting up an additional sales channel for your area of business You can reach your customers in the Internet com fortably and without extensive technical knowledge or hardware expenditure Being a standardised technology platform the software is flexible and easily extendible Adjustments to fit a particular customer can be made in a Short time The many functions of our standard software provide the foundation for quick implementation of varied business models with low operating costs The focus of the software in addition to the large standard package of features is on se
173. ecscecececscecscscscscsess 164 ROS OUNCES orner a O E E 165 Resource details General ccececececscecececececcccscececeseces 166 Resource details Options cecscsccececececscscscsecececscecees 166 Resource details Images cscs ceescssses Pilea eeadoccdseeseoreceseesiar 167 Resource details Categories ccceseececececececcececececeeceees 167 Resource details Appointments cececscscsesecececececececees 167 Resource details CrosSs Selling cccceseccscececececceceseseees 169 BOOKING S sinus teavaeusdaeachsacavaceudaasecesduevantadnewetes duavetuddmeseceadees 169 Appointment details suiniudusnaccedndsorivcrrdacseeesataracsnddavededenoseds 170 CE aas E taccaunass acces 170 TO DESEM enoii E 171 DESIN DaS CS aere E a a 171 Configuring the general page layout in the browser 173 Hornzontal AVC AS wexisceesct sn EA 173 Vernicakared Suoro ee AE T teasieel oe 173 Configuring the content area e ssssssssoessoessossesssoessosssossess 174 Ediune the desig Nin vost vevevecstelewnsai eee sdeduiwaskeetansdaecoiuenteteuies 174 SLY OS EE E E E E E EEA E A E E E E A E 175 TEMPIE S iore e a wien sastanheea eatelawsoetks 176 Multifunction bar and design ccccececececececcscscecesecees 176 FF IMG EE EPEE EA IE E EE EE EEN A E E EE 177 Pe E EE EE ETE E A E A EE E 177 Pade aroa Suoi AAEE 178 EON OT an T tse eaw eae eee 178 FONT ooe E sehen EEE A 178 Page elemenl Ocerin a
174. ed in Adding records on page 26 Page 124 User guide for Web site administrators Price lists Products Note Information for the validity period must be entered in the correct format for date and time Use the date function next to the entry fields to avoid mistakes See also Date entry fields on page 30 Save your entries by clicking Save Caution Only one price list can be active for a customer and customer group at one time Price lists Advanced settings Page Products Price lists Advanced settings Here you can set which prices are displayed for the customer in product lists and product details Ifthe option Use list prices is active the list prices of the products are displayed These prices are edited in the general product details see Prices inventory delivery on page 106 Ifthe option 7ake account of bulk and value discounts on basis of price lists is active then a special price can be displayed in the product lists and product details view The prerequisites for this are Aspecial price must be entered for one ordering unit in the price list The price list is currently valid The customer belongs to a customer group that has been assigned to the price list Once these requirements are fulfilled the corresponding customer will see the prices that are valid for him in the product lists and product details view Other price reductions such as bulk prices are displayed on the product detail pa
175. ed to display the attribute This is language dependent Name Entry field alpha How did you find out numeric about us Tool tip text Short explanation of the field contents Entry field alpha displayed in the administration This is numeric language dependent Save your entries by clicking Save Dependent on the attribute type a Value selection tab may be displayed in the details This applies to the attribute types 7ext with value selection In this case refer to Using text with value selection on page 33 Search You can use the search to find individual customers or customer groups For basic information on using the search function see Search on page 28 Import and export Page Customers Import and export You can read a general description about importing and exporting in the chapter mport and export on page 45 In the import file the following columns are mandatory for creating new customers ID Alias If no further data is specified the customers are created using the corresponding alias The default settings are used for all other required data If other columns are filled in the import file the values are entered for the corresponding attributes If the customer number does not yet exist a new customer is created Note the following when creating a new customer If no user data is entered in the import file an unregistered customer is created For more information about user data see Customer
176. editing functions and options are available See also Design basics on page 171 The View in the shop link allows you to see how your Web site would appear in this style Before making comprehensive changes to the style you should first make a backup copy To do so click the link Create backup copy Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 User guide for Web site administrators Page 175 Design Templates Save your entries by clicking Save You can create new styles by importing them from the templates or duplicating existing styles For more in formation about importing see 7emp lates below You can duplicate styles using a batch processing com mand Templates Page Design Templates All available style templates can be found in the Templates section You can either use these styles un changed for your Web design or use them as a basis for individual customisations Each template defines a specific layout and design as well as site structure The style templates are classified into two major groups private Web sites and commercial Web sites Be low this level there are various suggested industry templates and style guides There are various basic styles per type for which additional colour variants may exist To select a template proceed as follows 1 Select atopic To do this browse through the structure displa
177. een placed on eBay as a Buy It Now item and the item is for sale It can no longer be edited The sale is finished the product has been sold for the Buy It Now price The sale is finished the product has not been sold for the Buy It Now price Page 230 User guide for Web site administrators eBay Marketing Description The sale is still running The customer has received an e mail about finalising the order in the shop but has not yet finalised the order You can resend the finalisation request e mail To do this click the link You are then forwarded to the page of eBay orders Run the corre sponding batch process command For more information see Orders on page 235 To open the details of an offer click the name As long as the item has not been sent to eBay you can edit the details See tem settings eBay assistant on page 232 The availability of the corresponding product is shown using an icon following each item The icons are the same as those used in the product table see Products on page 103 To view a product click the icon Details of items which are for sale on eBay and of closed eBay sales are displayed in an overview They cannot be edited To view the product details click the product link To view the item offered on eBay click the item link There is also an Orders tab All orders pertaining to this offer item are displayed here The ta ble is comparable in composition and function to the table for all
178. emp import csv field Either enter the name of the file numeric with its path directly or click Browse to search for the file When all the parameters have been set correctly start the import by clicking Import If problems occur dur ing import you will receive a relevant message In the case of large files the total number of errors is lim ited to 100 error messages Editing csv files with Microsoft Excel CSV files can be edited with Microsoft Excel The automatic cell formatting in Microsoft Excel can cause some data to be incorrectly interpreted and displayed This occurs in the following examples among other cases Long numbers may be displayed as exponentials e g telephone numbers where 123456789123654 becomes 1 234567 E 14 Dates and times may be displayed in numerical format e g 02 05 2008 becomes 39570 Leading zeroes in numbers may be deleted e g in postal codes 07743 may become 7743 In such cases you must check the corresponding cells or columns and correct the formatting so that the data matches the requirements of the export file Alternatively use a different program to edit your import data Setup assistant The Setup assistant will help you set up your Web site in just a few steps You can set the design configure some basic settings and enter the most important shop information here without spending a long time getting to know the software The Setup assistant starts automatically when
179. ending sort order The right arrow pointing downwards indicates descending sort order Clicking the column heading or the arrow reverses the current sort direction as indicated by the filled ar row In multi page lists all pages are sorted The first page is displayed after sorting Sorting using key The sorting key is anumber much like a row number which is used to determine the order of records ina table Every record is assigned a position in the table according to the sorting key If the table supports sorting records using sorting keys the column Sort orderis displayed In this column the sort key for every record is displayed in an entry field Changing the value of the sort key lets you sort the table records any way you like Save your entries by clicking Save The sorting key is entered in increments of 10 so that new records can be sorted more quickly After saving a new sort order the key fields are again displayed in increments of 10 Note This sorting command effects both the Web site display and the administration area Paging Paging deals with displaying and navigating the individual pages of a table This is necessary if the table contains more records than can be displayed on one page In this case the display and navigation ele ments are displayed in the footer of the table On the left the current page number and the total number of pages is displayed The number of records in the table is displayed on the righ
180. eneral details Shopping basket discount Prices User guide for Web site administrators 195 188 187 187 198 201 192 202 190 195 197 196 203 186 93 201 194 190 193 173 147 150 150 28 222 66 1 86 70 70 FA 70 69 70 2 75 195 195 196 197 196 76 197 198 75 196 197 121 224 124 125 125 126 125 126 117 118 119 Product bundle Product inquiries Product Portals Product rating Product recommendations Product references Product search Inventory search Text search Product settings Auto cross selling Product comparison Stock level options Texts Product types Attribute details Attributes Base product type Details Layout Value selection for attributes Products Bulk discount Bulk pricing category Comparison price Creating a product bundle Creating a product with variations Creating new Creating single Delivery information Description Discount calculation mages Prices Prices inventory delivery Search Special attributes Value discount Variations R Related products Related topics S Saferpay Payment process Search transactions Transactions Save Seach the Web site Search Search statistics Settings Setup assistant Shop name Index 105 230 121 219 T27 229 121 130 130 96 97 98 96 oF 122 123 123 122 123 124 123 103 118 118 113 108 105 105 104 104 109 108 109 119 111 117 106 130 110 119 112 120 25 84 204 204 204
181. ent methods on page 69 and Direct debit payment methods on page 70 As with Free the customer incurs no additional costs at this point The customer downloads a fax form during the order process that he uses to send his bank details For more details see General properties for payment methods on page 69 and Payment method with direct debit via fax on page 70 Basis for payment methods via credit card Using this method you can offer your customers all the credit cards you accept and manually process For more details see General properties for payment methods on page 69 and Payment method with credit card man ual on page 71 Basis for payment methods using WorldPay When using this method customers will be forwarded to the secure World Pay system for payment This is where the data is collected and the transac tion takes place For more details see General properties for payment methods on page 69 and Payment method with WorldPay on page 72 and WorldPay on page 193 Basis for payment methods using T Pay For the transaction and the payment method selection the customer is forwarded to the T Com payment system where the transaction is com pleted For more details see General properties for payment methods on page 69 and T Pay payment method on page 74 and T Pay on page 194 Basis for payment methods using PayPal This method allows the customer to use the PayPal payment system For more details see General proper
182. entries on page 26 Tax classes Page Orders Tax calculation Tax classes Note You cannot modify the tax classes until you click Customise on the tax matrix page See 7ax ma trix on page 60 The table lists all the tax classes which have been created for your shop To set a tax class as default click the option button in the corresponding row The preseftax class will be set as the default when new prod ucts are added To create a new tax class follow the steps described in Adding records on page 26 Save your entries by clicking Save To delete a tax class follow the steps described in De eting entries on page 26 Tax model Page Orders Tax calculation Tax model Here you configure whether prices are entered net or inclusive of tax how they are displayed in the shop Displaying and calculating prices in the shop The option Displaying prices and calculation in the shop based onsets the default tax model which de termines how the prices are displayed in the shop This applies to the way prices are displayed in product lists and in the product details The way prices are displayed and calculated in the shopping basket also depends on the tax model that has been configured According to the tax model that has been configured a suitable price text is displayed alongside the price for more information see exts on page 97 User guide for Web site administrators Page 61 Settings Delivery and payment You
183. entries by numeric clicking WA Add products from Link tray of Delete a product from an order Button The product itself is not deleted User guide for Web site administrators Page 187 Orders Orders Documents Field name Description Field type Example Update The order is recalculated and displayed Button with the new values This processing status remains until you accept the changes with Apply or cancel all changes with Cancel After the update you will receive a message that the data has not been saved permanently Apply Save all changes and end the editing Button mode Cancel Changes are deleted The order retains Button the original information Caution You must Update the page before you apply the changes Use search function to display all orders in edit mode See also Search on page 186 Note Itis also a good idea to notify the customers about changes made to their orders To do this use for example the Send order confirmation mail link see Orders Details on page 186 Orders Documents Page Orders Orders order Documents For each order it is possible to generate various documents such as invoices packing slips and credit notes The Documents tab becomes active when you are not in Ed t mode for an order The number shown in brackets after Documents shows the number of documents which have been created for the current or der The table on this page
184. er address on invoices and packing slips This information is also used when address information needs to be submitted to third party systems for example when registering for product portals such as Pangora or Kelkoo The Additional textfield allows you to enter additional information for your Web site such as bank account details This information is displayed on all order documents below the shop address Save your entries by clicking Save User management The User management function allows you to edit information concerning your users and administrators see Users belowand Administrators on page 59 This is also where you define the content of the registration form see Registration on page 58 You can also stipulate whether only registered users can visit your Web site and whether users can register automatically See also Signing in on page 58 Users Page Settings User management Users Users are visitors to your Web site who have completed the registration process and have been allocated a username and password Users have specific rights This allows you to make certain pages or even your whole Web site only accessible to registered users You can also assign user specific prices Alternatively restrict the use of forums and blogs to registered users The table lists all users who have registered to use your Web site The symbols have the following mean ings Table 17 status symbols for users Icon Descr
185. er settings disruptive headers and foot ers Such as page number Internet address date may also be printed You can change these settings For Internet Explorer click File Page Setup in the menu bar This has a Header and Footersection The values entered here are printed on every page printed via the browser If you do not wish to print any of this information simply delete the entries in the two fields Packing slip For basic information on editing the document see Orders Documents on page 188 The specialised fields have the following meanings Table 121 Specialised fields for Packing slip Field name Description Field type Example Packing slip no This number is suggested by the sys Entry field alpha 1001 1 tem and consists of the order number numeric and a running number for packing slips Packingsiipdate SOCOCS COD Fe 19 04 08 Save your entries by clicking Save UPS packing slip A UPS packing slip offers you the possibility of configuring order tracking for the corresponding orders This allows you and your customer to track the current status of the package For more information on the basic principles of packing slips see Packing slip aboveand Orders Docu ments on page 188 The specialised fields have the following meanings Page 190 User guide for Web site administrators Orders Documents Orders Table 122 Specialised fields for UPS packing slip Field name Description
186. ernating colours For more on selecting colours see Colour selector on page 43 Footer You can upload a background image or define a background colour for the footer See also Co our selector on page 43 and Uploading images on page 43 Page 180 User guide for Web site administrators Page elements and navigation Design Prices and product views Price information Product prices are displayed at various locations This is where you define how the prices are displayed at each location For more on selecting colours see Colour selector on page 43 Product box on the home page On the home page the products are displayed in special boxes You can upload a background image for these boxes See also Uploading images on page 423 Ordering process Progress bar background During the order process the individual steps are indicated to the customer in form of a progress bar The step that the customer has reached can be highlighted This is the active step You can upload two background images one for the inactive steps and one for the active step See also Uploading images on page 43 Page elements and navigation The term navigation describes how the customer moves around the Web site and how he opens individual pages or calls functions You can configure navigation for your Web site individually This is done by defin ing the distribution and arrangement of the individual functions on the pages of your Web site These func
187. erpay Depending on the selection made here the customer is taken through a specific Saferpay process to com plete the transaction Finally the customer is returned to the shop The order confirmation is shown to him here This contains the transaction number allocated by Saferpay Saferpay transactions Page Orders Transactions Saferpay After the customer has confirmed the transaction it is entered into the list of Saferpay transactions in the shop administration The table lists all the Saferpay transactions As soon as a transaction is debited the status of the order is set to Paid To see the details of an order click the order number To see the details of the transaction click the transaction number This takes you to the Saferpay admini stration where the corresponding transaction data is displayed If the transaction number is grey itis a test transaction No details can be displayed for these To execute the debiting of authorised amounts mark the respective table entries and click Debit The amounts are debited using Saferpay and the order status is changed accordingly Search for Saferpay transactions Use the search function to group and filter your Saferpay transactions You can also search specifically by Saferpay transaction numbers Otherwise searching for Saferpay transactions is identical to the general search for orders See also Search on page 28 Page 204 User guide for Web site administrat
188. ers are configured in the datasheet view General The general settings are edited as described in General on page 143 Save your entries by clicking Save Pages Here are all sub pages for the corresponding category For more on working with the table see Pages on page 145 Products Here are all products that have been assigned to the category For more on working with the table see Products on page 146 Images Here are all the images that have been uploaded for the category If no images are available the corre sponding upload button is displayed For more information on uploading images for categories see mages on page 147 Layout The table lists all the options that govern how categories are displayed on the Web site The options are similar to the layout options for the home page see Layout on page 148 Select the corresponding option and save your entries by clicking Save For basic information on displaying using the datasheet view see Layout on page 147 Content page The Content page component allows you to create text articles and display these on your Web site General In addition to some settings that are valid for all pages General on page 143 you can also edit the follow ing settings User guide for Web site administrators Page 149 Contents Link Table 94 Additional fields for a Content page Field name Description Field type Example If a date is entered it will automatically Dat
189. es a sub page of the pages above it in the same level The current page moves up one level in the structure It is promoted to the same structure level as its previous parent page and is located directly below it Layout This group contains functions allowing you to arrange and display the content of the individual pages Various layout options are available depending on the current page type The icons indicate the currently configured options Page 142 User guide for Web site administrators Datasheet view Contents Explanations about the individual options can be found in descriptions of the corresponding page types from chapter Home page on page 147 and following Explanations about the layout options for products can be found in Product type details Layout on page 124 Since there is no space here to describe each function individually we recommend that you try them out to learn how they work You can return to the original state of your work at any time using the Undo function You can also configure the layout using the datasheet view of the corresponding page on the Layout tab The various available variants are listed there in a table with a short explanation of each Language Here you can configure the language of the content that you want to edit for the individual pages When you select a language the current page is displayed in the corresponding language and you can edit the texts in this language See also L
190. escription Field type Example Sender address You can enter an extended e mailad Entry field alpha Milestones dress in the form numeric lt msinfo provider co Name lt e mail address m Set how your characters are coded and Drop down menu processed in the e mail Unicodeis a setting which allows all known charac ters to be processed Page 90 User guide for Web site administrators E mail settings Settings Field name Description Field type Example Signature Attachment at the end of each e mail Text field lt br xb gt Milestones which is displayed language Demoshop dependent GmbH lt b gt lt br For more on formatting see Working gt Leutragraben 1 lt br with text fields on page 35 Dan Save your entries by clicking Save Caution f the default sender e mail address is not entered no event e mails will be sent Note The sender address is the default sender for all e mail messages It is used when no other ad dress has been entered for the individual e mail messages E mail settings Events Page Settings E mail settings Events The icon next to the event name indicates the status The symbols have the following meanings Table 54 Status of e mail events Icon Description A Delivery is activated If the event occurs an e mail will be sent to the configured recipient ie Delivery is deactivated If the event occurs an e mail will not be sent Activate delivery by clicking
191. esign on page 171 contains a detailed description of how to customise the layout and design 6 Create products If you want to operate an online shop and sell products or services you must now create some products and assign them to categories To create a product click Products in the menu bar and then New The most important data you need to enter is a product number product name list price and the tax class Set the status for Vis bleto Yes If required fill in additional fields Save your entries by clicking Save Assign the products to categories To do this click the Categories tab and select the correct categories For a complete description on how to best implement and use all the functions for products see Products on page 103 7 Check important system settings All system parameters have a default setting and can be used immediately Check the most important ones at this stage to optimise the settings To do this click Settings in the menu bar We recommend checking the following settings at this stage Languages currencies countries see Country settings on page 87 Delivery and payment methods see Delivery and payment on page 62 E mail settings for various notices and confirmation messages see E mail settings on page 90 This completes the basic settings needed to operate your shop A complete description of all parameters and settings can be found in Settings on page 53 8 Testing Before publishi
192. esponding conditions on the Validity tab 4 Create the coupon codes For more details see Coupon campaign Coupon codes on page 216 If you want to distribute the coupons to your customers through a newsletter you do not need to assign cou pon codes See Using coupons in newsletters unten 5 Ifyou do not want to distribute the coupons to your customers through a newsletter you can export the generated coupon code and then distribute them to your customers via other channels Using coupons in newsletters For basic principles on newsletters see Newsletter campaigns on page 205 First create a Coupon campaign Note You do not need to generate any coupon codes The system generates a new code for each news letter that is sent In the newsletter you have the ability to select and assign these coupon campaigns see Figure 30 User guide for Web site administrators Page 217 Marketing Coupons Newsletter campaigns New keas at our Shop Announcement Books and maps General Attachments Recipient Note You have connected this newsletter to a coupon campaign Enter the coupon code in the text You can do so in the following ways Use the Coupon code placeholder Click ngert coupon template Mote when sending the newsletter t A code is created for every recipient inthe coupon campaign You do not need to create any coupon codes manually t A placeholder is shown instead of the code in the test e mail ID Bo
193. ess on ordering or in My account The table lists the names of all entry fields which you can assign to the forms The values the customer en ters will be saved as customer attributes Click the check box for the desired field in the V s b e column to display the field in the form You can configure whether or not a field should be mandatory In this case click the check box for the de sired field in the Required column User guide for Web site administrators Page 95 Settings Product settings Ifa field contains a gray check box you cannot assign this field or you cannot modify the assignment At the top of the table you can see the system attributes These are created by default You may use these fields but not modify them In the lower part of the table you can activate the attributes you have created yourself in Customers Cus tomer attributes See also Customer attributes on page 136 Click the name to edit the details Save your entries by clicking Save Product settings Here you can configure the behaviour when products reach a critical stock level You can also manage the basic settings for the Auto cross selling sale enhancing measure additional texts for prices and product comparison Inventory Page Settings Product Settings Inventory On this page you can define how the order process in the shop should continue if an ordered product is no longer available that is the stock level is the same or less th
194. etails General on page 106 Save your entries by clicking Save After the general product details have been saved additional tabs will be activated Enter the remaining in formation as described in Product details Images on page 111 and following In the Variations tab in the details you can add variations at a later date Page 104 User guide for Web site administrators Creating a new product Products Caution Save your changes before you click the tab to enter additional information Otherwise the changes will be lost Note Visibility is set to Not visible by default When all information has been entered set the product to Visible in order to display it in the shop Creating a product with variations To create a product with variations directly click the link New gt Product with variations in the sub menu This forwards you to the page where you can enter the general product details First enter a unique value in the Product numberfield Having done this enter additional general information see Product details General on page 106 Save your entries by clicking Save Having done this you will be forwarded to the product variation assistant directly For more information see Product variation assistant on page 115 For the basics about variations refer to Product details Variations on page 113 At the same time the remaining tabs will be activated in the background Enter the remaining info
195. etails of the Jacket product type Clicking Product types takes you to a list of all product types Attribute types Attributes are used to describe properties of objects For example customers have attributes such as salu tation username or e mail address Attributes can be divided into different attribute types You can set the usage and allowed values of an attribute over the attribute types When creating attributes for products or customers you need to define the attribute type This means that you define whether this attribute should be displayed and processed as for example a character string text a number or a date in the system In other words you define what kind of values you or the cus tomer can enter into the fields The individual attribute types have the following meanings Table 4 overview of the attribute types for entry fields Description Usage Example Character string Entry fields for names addresses text and Text field word sentence so on You can use any character There are no length restrictions Text with value Text for building a Multiple values can be assigned to the selection set of possible val jattribute The values are displayed ina ues drop down menu The user Selects one of these For more information see Using text with value selection on page 33 Language Language Can be used as 7ext with value selection Material dependent text dependent text for jone value can be entered foreach
196. f you want to remove a template page from the current Web site uncheck the corresponding check box on the left The symbols have the following meanings Table 14 Structure symbols Icon Description y This page already existed in the Web site structure before the template was loaded It cannot be removed using the check box Mandatory page Some templates contain pages that are defined as mandatory These pages can not be removed from the Web site structure using the check box The check box is disabled For basic information on editing the structure and the individual pages see Contents on page 139 Click Next or Back to open the next or the previous page 3 Contact data and presentation Here you can enter the contact information for your Web site The information entered is used for the Web site address and also for the initial entries in the Contact information The specified e mail address is en tered into the e mail settings The other information is used to generate an e mail signature To edit this in formation without using the assistant see Address on page 55 E mail settings on page 90 and Contact information on page 151 In addition you must configure the languages for your Web site The pages are then displayed in these lan guages For more on configuring languages see Languages on page 87 You can upload a logo for your Web site here See also Uploading images on page 43 Page 48 User guide for Web
197. ferpay supports various payment methods and means of payment It accepts both international credit cards and locally valid payments It guarantees customers a high degree of data security Before entering payment related data customers are forwarded to the Saferpay platform Since the shop software and Saferpay operate on different physi User guide for Web site administrators Page 203 Orders Saferpay cally separate computers the payment data of the customer is never stored in the shop system This sig nificantly reduces the risk of abuse of customer data All information on accepted payment methods security standards and about Saferpay in general can be found at www saferpay com As a prerequisite for using Saferpay you must first register with Saferpay To do this you must sign in to Saferpay and order the Saferpay eCommerce package This package forms the basis for the Saferpay func tionality in the shop You can agree advanced services as part of your Saferpay package The package de fines which payment options are offered to your customers on the Saferpay platform For information on the settings required see Saferpay payment method on page 84 Payment process from the customer s point of view The customer selects a payment method in the shopping basket based on Saferpay As part of the process he is then transferred to the Saferpay Web site A new window will open displaying the payment options that you have agreed with Saf
198. ferred payment Some payment methods allow you to Option button offer deferred payment See also Deferred payment on page 86 When using payment methods that do not permit deferred payment the op tion fields are greyed out Discount Percentage discount forthe payment Entry field numeric 3 method Creating order You can use this option to determine Option button whether an order is created before the data is passed to an external payments system or after finalisation of the transaction This option is not available for all pay ment methods Permit usage forthe Her you can define the region s for Drop down menu following invoice which this payment method is valid addresses Name Name used to display the method This Entry field alpha cash on delivery is language dependent numeric Comment Additional information about the pay Text field alphanu Cash on delivery ment method meric incurs a surcharge The language dependent contents are of displayed to the customer during the order process directly below the method and order documents are printed For more on formatting see Working with text fields on page 35 Save your entries by clicking Save The Visible and Default fields are not active for the method marked as Default If you want to edit the set tings for this method you must first set another method to default User guide for Web site administrators Page 69 Settings Delivery and p
199. fic and customer group specific price lists You can define prices for individual customers by entering the price or discount for the amount of 7 and assign only the one customer to the list Value discount Page Products product Prices Value discount In this section you can configure a price reduction which depends upon the total price The value discount is joined to a price list in which you can also set the validity period and the customer area see Price lists on page 124 When you call up the page the first price list of your price list table is displayed If this is not the price list that you wish to edit simply select the correct price list from the drop down menu The icon to the left of the drop down menu shows whether the price list is currently active You can click this icon to call up details for the price list being displayed To do so click the H icon After you have selected a price list the entries it contains are displayed Edit the values directly in the entry fields Save your entries by clicking Save To create a new value discount proceed as described in Adding records on page 26 To delete an entry follow the steps described in Deleting entries on page 26 If you have configured bulk discounts as well as value discounts the price is calculated as described in Discount calculation for product prices below Discount calculation for product prices Since you can assign more than one disco
200. following specialised actions can be performed Table 66 Specialised batch processing commands for products Comment The system creates a copy as a new product with its own unique product number since every product number may only exist once The duplicate is created as Not visible Assign to category The category is selected using a drop down menu in the second stage after starting the command As soon as a certain total number of categories for the shop is exceeded you can select a target category using a special cate gory browser Assign product portals Assigning selected products to active product portals can be performed in two steps 1 Select the desired products and start the command 2 Select the portals to whose export lists the products should be added and complete the process by clicking Assign Ifthe Export all products option is activated for a portal it cannot be se lected here See also Product Portals on page 219 User guide for Web site administrators Page 103 Products Creating a new product Command Comment Set Mew marker Highlighted products are all flagged immediately as Mew See also Mark as New on page 110 Remove Vew marker Marked products are no longer displayed as new products See also Mark as New on page 110 To create a new product refer to Creating a single product below Save your entries by clicking Save Creating a new product The sub menu offers the following possibili
201. for each country platform in etracker The relationship be tween the channel and the campaign in etracker is comparable with the relationship between the country platform and the portal in the shop administration To create an etracker parameter for a country platform you must create a channel in a campaign in your etracker administration and export the parameters there Proceed as follows 1 Todo this start the campaign assistant from Marketing Campaigns Management Campaign as sistant 2 Select the Manual option and click Next 3 Enterthe name and additional parameters for the campaign It is recommended that you name the Campaign after the portal for which it is being configured Save your entries by clicking Enter new cam paign 4 You can now add a new channel to the campaign This must be a URL parameter channel When you create the channel the necessary parameter is also created Enter the channel and the country plat form for which the parameter is intended Open the details for this channel The parameter is generated and is located in the read only URL field e g et_cid 3 amp et_lid 4 7 In addition you can enter some cost parameters which are specified in the contract for the relevant platform 8 Save your entries by clicking Save changes ON WM Enter the parameter in your Web site administration To do this open the portal page in the Web site ad ministration and click the corresponding country platform
202. for which de livery is not required or useful assign the corresponding payment methods here For example if you offer chargeable services through the booking system you can define the valid payment methods for this here see also Booking system on page 163 Save your entries by clicking Save Note After it has been created a payment method is assigned to all delivery methods by default In the same way new delivery methods are assigned to all payment methods Remove the check marks for the combinations that you do not offer Make sure that at least one combination is activated Otherwise no orders can be made in the shop Delivery options Page Settings Delivery and payment Delivery options Using delivery options you can offer your customers a Service in connection with the order This is where you can prepare services such as gift wrapping or similar The customer can access this service by clicking a link in the shopping basket Page 84 User guide for Web site administrators Delivery and payment Settings You can Set the name for the link in the Display name in shopping basket field Enter a different name for this link for each language The table lists the available delivery options The symbols have the following meanings Table 50 status for delivery options Icon Description 2 The delivery option is visible to the customer and can be selected a The delivery option is not visible to the customer
203. g Table 153 table columns for eBay orders Column name Comment Initial offer for the order The icon indicates the eBay platform User account eBay user who won the item Click the icon to send an e mail message to the address in the user s eBay profile Price Price for which the item was won Customer Name of the bidder in the customer administration of the shop When the details of a customer are transferred from eBay for the first time the system creates him as an unregistered customer The eBay e mail ad dress is saved as well During further data transfers the customer is identi fied using this e mail address and all eBay orders for this customer are bun dled Order Order number when sale has been finalised in the shop Otherwise a notification is issued that the customer has not yet finalised the order Feedback Displays the feedback for this item For more information see General set tings on page 99 Orders that the customer has not finalised within 3 days are marked in the Orders column with the icon In a case like this you can remind your customers to complete their purchase via e mail Use the corre sponding batch action for this See 7able 154belowon page 236 User guide for Web site administrators Page 235 Marketing eBay Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 The following specialised commands
204. g Product details You can use this link to call up the corresponding Web site view of the page For more in formation see Web site views on page 25 The icon placed in front of the link has the following meaning Table 1 Key for icons by Web site link Icon Description This Web site is open for visitors This Web site is closed for visitors Page cache link This link displays the status of the page cache For more information on the page cache see Page cache optimisation on page 54 The following statuses are indicated by the link and the associated icon Table 2 status icons for optimisation Link and icon Description Page cache Up to The page cache is active some pages are loaded from the cache There are no date outdated pages Clicking this link has no effect Page cache Update The page cache is active some pages are loaded from the cache Relevant infor now mation has been modified There are probably some outdated pages Itis rec ommended that you update your pages ty Clicking this link will cause the pages to be updated red Page cache Activate The page cache has been disabled All pages are regenerated each time they are now displayed Click this link to activate the page cache and update the pages grey Home link Click this link to call up the Administration home page Administrator link Click your administrator name to call up the page containing the user settings for the ad
205. g Save Note the following when using regions Anew delivery or payment method is available in all countries of the shop by default lfno countries are assigned to a region they cannot be entered for a delivery or payment method Ifall countries fora region are deleted the associated delivery and payment methods apply to all coun tries of the shop The customer is notified if he changes the country of the delivery or invoice address and the delivery or payment method that was previously selected is no longer available User guide for Web site administrators Page 89 Settings E mail settings PayPal Express and Google Checkout cannot be limited to a region because the invoice address is not known These payment methods therefore do not require the settings described in the administration The delivery methods that are assigned to these payment methods must support the countries that can be selected as delivery countries in the payment system Using regions you can define various prices for different delivery areas For example you can have a different price for delivery via UPS in Germany than delivery via UPS ship ping outside of the EU For this purpose create two regions Germany and Non EU Then create two de livery methods UPS Germany and UPS Non EU Assign the delivery methods to the corresponding re gions The regions should be named so that the customer can immediately see which regions a method ap plies to
206. g all settings If all entries are correct the item can be placed on eBay Page 234 User guide for Web site administrators eBay Marketing Click the Verify button or Activate scheduling to test your settings If all the information is correct the fees for the offer are displayed You can place the item on eBay by clicking Upload to eBay or Upload to eBay Now Scheduled items are placed on eBay at the entered start time If one of the settings does not fulfil eBay requirements an error message will be displayed Once an item is for sale on eBay the parameters can no longer be changed Default values Page Marketing eBay Default values There are many Settings for an item and many properties are the same for most items For this reason you can assign standard values to these parameters to avoid having to enter them again for each item An overview of all default values is displayed on this page The areas shown correspond to the steps of the eBay assistant You can change these default values at any time To do this click the link Customise default item values You are transferred directly to the corresponding page of the eBay assistant For more details see tem set tings eBay assistant on page 232 Orders Page Marketing eBay Orders As soon as a bidder buys your product or wins your auction this item is marked as closed and entered into the table of eBay orders The individual columns have the following meanin
207. g appointments via the Web site De Design your Web site using various templates Refine your we design by using images colours and page elements s 4 Quick design Customise design Search for gt Display contents Download guide customers gt Newsletter Coupons gt Product portals gt etracker Statistics eBay items 4 Trusted Shops 4 SafeBuy Shoplupe shop Tax calculation Country settings gt Delivery and payment E mail settings 4 Help x Setup assistant You will always receive relevant help while you work Find Aa Get help setting up your Yeb site In just a few steps your out how to receive this help First steps cz Contents S Web site will be designed and ready to go c lt Marketing 5 Settings Announce your offers in the Internet VVin and keep Configure the system and the order process to fit your Figure 1 Structure of Administration pages The areas are Administration navigation 1 see Administration navigation below Menu bar 2 see Menu bar on page 20 Working area 3 see Working area on page 21 Sidebar 4 see Sidebar on page 21 Administration navigation The Administration Navigation menu is available on every page The following links are available User guide for Web site administrators Page 19 Basic principles General page layout Web site link This link bears either the name of the Web site or the name of the current page that you are editing e
208. g re cords on page 26 To delete a comment follow the steps described in Deleting entries on page 26 Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 The following specialised actions can be performed Page 156 User guide for Web site administrators Guestbook Contents Table 101 Specialised batch processing commands for blog posts Command Comment Delete Suspected spam The marker that identifies a comment as being spam is deleted marker Save your entries by clicking Save Guestbook The guestbook provides your visitors with the opportunity to publish their own text comments on the Web site In general visitors to the Web site will use this option to leave their opinions notes or criticism of the Web site You can restrict who can write or read guestbook entries Visitors can report suspicious content using a special function Such entries are marked as spam in the Administration area You can then block these entries from being displayed The following parameters are configured in the datasheet view General The general settings are edited as described in General on page 143 Save your entries by clicking Save Entries The table lists all the entries in the guestbook If visitors report that an entry is suspected of being spam the entry is marked with the icon As well as the username the IP address of the computer from
209. ge 83 Settings Delivery and payment Saferpay payment method Basic information on working with Saferpay is available in chapter Sa erpay on page 203 The various fields have the following meanings Table 49 Parameters for the Saferpay payment method Field Name Description Field type Example Saferpay account You will receive this number from Saf Entry field alpha 123456 987654 number erpay after registration numeric Transaction type Set how transactions are finalised Drop down menu For Authorisation you must perform the debiting manually in the shop ad ministration For Debit every valid transaction is automatically finalised by debiting Operational mode Set whether transactions are per Drop down menu formed on the live or test system Selection of the sym Select the icons for the payment meth Check box a ods that you accept for payment via Saferpay and which will be displayed in the shop Save your entries by clicking Save Note The Saferpay payment method is only shown in the shopping basket if you have set the methods to Visible Dependencies Page Settings Delivery and payment Dependencies You can Set the availability of different payment methods for different delivery methods here If you would like to activate a payment method for a specific delivery method select the corresponding check box A special assignment is set using the No delivery column If you are selling goods or services
210. ge elements and navigation on page 181 Currencies Page Settings Country Settings Currencies On this page you can prepare the shop currencies for your customers to select from The currency the cus tomer selected remains active until a different currency is explicitly selected or the session ends You must offer prices in these currencies In the table you can see the currencies you have activated for the shop Using the check box in the Visible column you can Set if the currency is displayed for selection in the shop Use the option button in the Defau tcolumn to set the default currency for the shop An entry must be set to visible before it can be made to the default Save your entries by clicking Save To activate a new currency select it from the drop down menu at the end of the table and confirm with Save To delete a currency follow the steps described in Deleting entries on page 26 The currency will still be available in the drop down menu Note The currencies listed are part of the installation If you need additional currencies contact your provider Caution Products which are not priced in a particular currency cannot be put in the shopping basket or ordered in that currency The same applies for delivery methods In you want to offer products at no charge such as pamphlets or brochures enter the price as 0 00 Special case Swiss Francs Due to the fact that in Switzerland the smallest unit of
211. ge using the Price reductions link Note Using this option can cause the page display speed to fall for that page since the prices must be calculated first Price list details General Page Products Price lists pricelist General The various fields have the following meanings Table 75 fields for general price list details Field name Description Field type Example Entry field alpha RegularCustom numeric ers_EU Name Language dependent name used to Entry field alpha For regular custom display the price list numeric ers Currency valid currency for this price list Display Booo l Valid from See also Date entry fields on page 30 Date field 01 01 08 00 00 Valid until See also Date entry fields on page 30 Date field 30 06 08 23 59 Save your entries by clicking Save Price list details Customer groups Page Products Price lists pricelist Customer groups The table lists all the customer groups for whose members the price reduction is valid User guide for Web site administrators Page 125 Products Search statistics To add a new customer group select it from the drop down menu at the end of the table and click Save All the customer groups you manage in Customers gt Customer groups are listed in the drop down menu see Customer groups on page 136 To remove a customer group assignment select the entry you wish to remove and click Remove assign ment Price list details C
212. gister 2 Search orders 194 Transactions 193 WYSIWYG editor 36 User guide for Web site administrators
213. guide for Web site administrators Design basics Design Background images always take precedence over background colours This means that if you load a background image and also set a background colour the background image will cover the colour Note the effect of individual area parameters on other areas The height information for horizontal ar eas and the width information for vertical areas will affect the size of the content area for example All sizes and dimensions for the examples are shown in pixels px You can also use any other sizes which can be used in style sheets for example percent For more information on the possible set tings and how to use them please consult the corresponding specialist literature or Web sites such as http www selfhiml org only partially in English Test out the various settings Remember that you can use the Undo function at any time to restore the initial state Alternatively make a copy of the current style and test out the various options on the copy You can do this in the table of your own styles by using the Create backup copy function See also Styles on page 175 Once you have created the desired design there activate the style for your cus tomers Configuring the general page layout in the browser Alongside the design and layout of your Web site you can also define how the Web site is shown within the browser These settings include the width of the Web site or the spac
214. h fast loading times For this reason it is a good idea to find the optimum setting between displaying current content and quicker availability of the page The page cache allows you to configure how often certain pages are updated When deciding this bear in mind how often you change and update the data on these pages For example if you change the prices of your products weekly pages which display prices need only be updated every week after the price change During the rest of the week these pages can be loaded and displayed from the cache The same applies for stock data When inventory levels of products are evaluated for display in the shop the page cache must be set so that when the stock level changes during the order process the correspond ing pages are updated For more about this see nventory on page 96 The status of the page cache is displayed in the Administrator menu see Administration navigation on page 19 Use the check box Activate page cache to switch the page cache function on or off Once you have switched the page cache on select your preferred update intervals for the pages listed on the screen Save your entries by clicking Save If you have made extensive changes to data and information you can update all the pages with one click To do this click Update immediately Note If you make changes while in the administration area and these changes are not immediately visible on the Web site check the
215. ha This contactisa customer The customer cannot see these numeric sample customer notes Save your entries by clicking Save You can also verify the EU VAT reg no immediately Simply click Verify after entering the number This will forward you to the corresponding verification page provided by the European Union which will display the result Attributes Page Customers customer General Attributes In the Attributes section you can manage and edit the attribute information you entered in Customer attrib utes on page 136 Click the link marked with the corresponding attribute name to jump directly to the de tail page for the attribute Save your entries by clicking Save Customer details User data Users are registered customers They can manage their user data in the shop by clicking My Account This information can be viewed in the User data tab You can configure which information the customer can manage in My Account in the registration form See Registration on page 58 The tab is divided into the following sections Signin see Sign in on page 134 Invoice address see Billing address on page 135 Default delivery address see Default delivery address on page 135 User guide for Web site administrators Page 133 Customers Customer details User data Note You can convert an unregistered customer into a user by allocating sign in data for this customer After saving the address data is copie
216. he Statistics settings section Save your entries by clicking Save After you save the registration data the Show etracker statistics link is displayed Click this to go to your etracker administration The statistics displayed depend on your contract with etracker The following statistics are available by de fault User guide for Web site administrators Page 227 Marketing etracker statistics Table 147 default statistics for etracker Statistics area AEE Hourly performance Page impressions per page fp providers Poffo sites po Searchengines S O Geographic range by country Visitor tracking Last Visitor T per weekday aao ewe O oero O aoao Technology Operating systems Pp Screensize 2 Po Browsers Pe ftanguage O __ Supported techniques Daily statistics report Marketing reports Leads amp Sales Search engine reporting Using etracker you can evaluate how easy it is to find your Web site using search engines such as Google or Yahoo You must create a campaign to do this in etracker For basic information on campaigns and how to create them in etracker see etracker reporting on page 271 For this purpose choose the Search engine campaign type After you have created the search engine cam paign open the details The code parameter for this campaign is displayed here It takes the following form var et se 13 Enter the number in this case 13 in the field of the same name on the General tab in the
217. he bottom row of the table User guide for Web site administrators Page 135 Customers Customer groups Click New order in the sub menu This link only appears in the sub menu when you are located ina customer detail view An order will be created for the customer and you will now be in edit mode see Fd ting mode on page 187 Customer groups Page Customers Customer groups Here you can define and manage customer groups The table lists all the customer groups you have cre ated The names are displayed in entry fields Enter changes directly in the respective field Save your entries by clicking Save In the options fields of the Default for new registration and the Default for ordering without registration col umns you can set which customer group a new customer will be assigned to in each case To create a new customer group proceed as described in Adding records on page 26 To delete a customer group proceed as described in Deleting entries on page 26 Before deleting the cus tomer group the system checks whether any customers are still assigned to the group If this is the case you will receive a note stating the options available to dealing with the customer assignments To edit the group membership for a customer open his customer account see Customer account on page 122 To edit the details of a customer group click the ID The page with the general properties is then shown You can change the ID here Sa
218. he current product is linked with is displayed in the first column The last column shows the type of assignment how the current product is assigned to the target product In addition to the various cross selling types assignment to a product bundle is also displayed To remove an assignment select the relevant products and click Remove assignment Variation products and cross selling The following methods exist for assigning cross selling products to variation products Manual assignment using the Cross selling tab see Product details Cross selling on page 119 Assignment using the master product variation products inherit the cross selling products of the mas ter product The cross selling products inherited from the master product are displayed in the table above the manually assigned cross selling products You can not edit the Commentand Sort orderfields directly for the inher ited cross selling products To edit the entries in these fields proceed as follows Create a second cross selling product for the cross selling product for which you want to change the values see Adding records on page 26 Enter the desired values in the Commentand Sort orderfields Save your entries by clicking Save The system then uses the updated information for display in the shop Product details Portals On this page you can See the available portals for product export and the existing eBay items and orders for this product The page is
219. he image is uploaded in the opti Check box mised size 90 px The size can only be customised during uploading Delete Click the icon to delete the logo Symbol Create own favicon A favicon is generated from the Web Link from logo site logo see below User guide for Web site administrators Page 53 Settings General settings Field name Description Field type Example Favicon A favicon is a small image that appears Entry field alpha Favicon ico in the browser s address bar to the left numeric of the Web site address URL The file should contain an image in the size 16x16 pixels or 32x32 pixels For more on using images see Uploading im ages on page 43 Save your entries by clicking Save Page cache optimisation Page Settings General settings Page cache This function controls the speed at which certain pages are displayed The pages that your customers see contain both static and dynamic content Dynamic content is data and information that is read from the database and inserted into the page just before the Web page is dis played This ensures that the values are up to date This includes data about prices amounts and so on Updating and creating the page takes time The display rate of the page is therefore dependant on the pro portion of the content which has to be updated Pages where the content does not change can be cached and displayed more quickly Your customers expect up to date pages wit
220. he newly generated product type to the master product 3 Switch to the Variations tab in the product details of the master product and select the section Varia tion attributes 4 Inthe overview select the attribute values to be used to generate variation products Save your entries by clicking Save 5 Switch to the Variation products section The drop down menus in the bottom table row contain the va lues that you selected for creation of variations 6 Select the variations you wish to create in the drop down menu s If necessary enter a new product number Otherwise a number will be automatically generated on the basis of the master product num ber Save your entries by clicking Save Extending variations later The following methods exist for extending existing variations with a new variation attribute use the product variation assistant create a new variation attribute manually Extending a variation using the product variation assistant Start the product variation assistant in the Variations tab There you can click the Start product variation assistant link 1 Create a new variation attribute as described in step 1 of Product variation assistant on page 115 2 The existing variation products must also be assigned a value for the new attribute In the next step select the value that is to be used for the existing variations After selection click Display variation products to display the possible product variations
221. he number The cell contents will be joined and displayed in the combined cell Ifthe number entered in the Columns field is larger than the number of available cells the function will only be applied to the available cells The table will not be expanded The Split cells 484 function allows you to split merged cells This will divide the merged cell into the original number of cells The content to be merged will be written in one line Flash page content Flash page content contains animated images graphics The user must have installed a Flash player for his browser in order to be able to view the Flash files Flash files are used for example for banner advertising or to realise complex content in an animated format When you have clicked the icon a new window allows you to select various types of multimedia elements The area for selecting and inserting Flash page content is expanded This allows you to select between the Flash categories Eye Catcherand ntro User guide for Web site administrators Page 41 Basic principles WYSIWYG editor Eye Catcherelements are Flash templates for smaller areas that can be integrated into the content of the page and that attract the visitor s eye to a particular point The ntro elements are Flash templates that are larger than the Eye Catchers They dominate the page Templates that can be inserted as an introduction to your home page can also be found here See also Home page on page 147
222. he template is loaded into the 7extfield Text previously contained there will be deleted after confirmation The text and the design can be edited further in the WYSIWYG editor For more information see Working with text fields on page 35 To insert product and category information into the newsletter text put the desired objects into the tray and insert them using Add products and categories from tray See also ray on page 21 Page 210 User guide for Web site administrators Newsletter campaigns Marketing The information is entered at the cursor position Product images are inserted as attachments and a refer ence to them is placed within the text see Newsletter details Attachments below Insert customer data using placeholders The available placeholders can be found in the Placeholderbox on the right side of the text field To insert a placeholder in the 7exffield click its name It will be inserted in the field at the current cursor position When sending the newsletter the relevant information will be substituted for the placeholders You can also send coupons with newsletters You must create a corresponding campaign before doing this See Coupons on page 214 and especially the section Using coupons in newsletters on page 217 The following should be additionally noted Newsletter templates are pre set You cannot modify them To be able to create your own newsletter template you can create a newsletter with your own
223. hours during which you usually offer your services or during which your customers can book appointments The hours on this page are the centrally maintained default hours that apply for all resources as long as no special hours have been defined for a specific resource For more about this see Resource details Appointments on page 167 You can configure the same hours for all weeks or set different hours for odd weeks and for even weeks When entering hours you should remember You can split a day into two setting opening times for the morning and afternoon For round the clock operation enter the hours from 00 to 00 not 00 to 24 The end time must always be greater than the start time Therefore to specify business hours from 22 00 until 04 00 enter 22 O for the evening and 0 4 for the next day Save your entries by clicking Save To display the business hours on the Web site you must create a page using the Business hours type and set it as visible See also Business hours on page 153 In addition you can create a user defined page element of the type Link and create a reference to the business hours from there For more information see User defined page elements on page 182 Address Page Settings General settings Address User guide for Web site administrators Page 55 Settings User management This data is used when the address information for the Web site is made public For example it is the send
224. icon If you want to clear the list click the link De lete all favourites Favourites continue to be stored after signing out The number of favourites you can have is unlimited Sections Sections are subareas on tabs and serve to group data Sections are used if the amount of relevant infor mation is too large for one tab The individual sections can be selected by clicking the section title see A gure 3 Tabs Products Caimiping AZ Twister 270 cg_0100504001 General Images Categories Variations Prices Cross selling Portals y Prices Inventory Delivery Description gt Attributes Sections Figure 3 tabs and sections Help The application includes a comprehensive Help system Context sensitive Help explains the functionality of the current page Field specific Help explains the functionality of individual data entry fields This help is called short info Related topics refer to related settings or function on another page The following Help components can be accessed Help centre see Help area below Context sensitive Help see Context sensitive Help on page 24 Short info see Short info on page 25 Help area The help centre provides an overview of all help possibilities in the application The help centre can either be opened by clicking a link on the main navigation bar or a link on the home page see Figure 4 User guide for Web site administrators Page 23 Basic principles Administra
225. ide for Web site administrators Page 21 Basic principles History Orders Customers Products Content Appointment management Design Marketing Settings Help Name Customer number E mail Display per page ei 10Resuts Customers John Doe 1002 Standard 3 General User data Orders EN Empty tray E4 John Doe 1002 vy Address gt Customer account gt Attributes Figure 2 adding a single object to the tray This object has not yet been added to the tray To do this click the name of the object or the L icon This adds the object to the correct group in the tray The object link will be displayed as long as you are in the detail view for the object add a number of objects from a table using batch processing commands If you want to add several objects to the tray at the same time you must switch to the table view for the objects in question In addition the Add fo traybatch processing command must be available for this table Instructions for executing batch processing commands can be found in Batch Processes in Ta bles on page 27 On certain pages it is possible to add objects from the tray On these pages the Add from tray link is available Only objects applicable to the current task will be added from the tray To remove an entry from the tray click the icon behind the relevant entry To remove all entries from the tray click Empty tray When you sign out the tray will also be emptied History
226. ies by clicking Save modifying entries in groups by batch processing If multiple entries are to be processed in one action use the respective batch processing command See also Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 Deleting entries Entries can be deleted in the following ways Page 26 User guide for Web site administrators Tables Basic principles Button Delete In some tables there is a button marked Delete below the table Select the relevant entries and click Delete The batch processing command Delete In some tables De efe can be selected from the batch processing commands Select the relevant en tries and start the Delete process For more on selecting see Selecting in tables below For more on batch processing see Batch Processes in Tables below Furthermore see Deletion confirmation on page 51 Selecting in tables If a table contains records which can be selected the first column will contain a check box for each record Click the check box to select a record To remove the check mark click the check box again To select all records on the page click the check box in the column header Note The Se ect a function works on all the records on the current page To select any other records you first have to open the correct page and execute the command for this page Batch Processes in Tables A batch processing command is a command which is executed for all selected records in a table The batch processi
227. ify whether a splash screen should be displayed when your Web site is called up If you want to display a splash page you can create this from a predefined Flash template or create your own splash page This function always uses the most recently edited and saved splash All available splash templates can be found in the Select and adapt splash from template section To se lect a splash page click the corresponding preview image The details of this splash template are then displayed Edit these details and adjust the settings to your requirements Click Update to display the splash page with your current settings Save your entries by clicking Save Page 148 User guide for Web site administrators Page Category Contents You can create your own splash page using the section Integrate own splash Enter the required code into the text field For more on formatting see Working with text fields on page 35 Some example elements are listed in the Code examples area Click the name to copy the associated sample code into the text field Save your entries by clicking Save Page Category The category is the element which allows the construction of a hierarchical catalogue structure A category has a direct parent category and can be assigned any number of subcategories and products You can en ter a separate layout for each category In the page preview you can edit the category texts and texts of the associated products The following paramet
228. ile The certificate file is provided by Atos Entry field alpha Worldline Save it on yourlocalcom numeric puter and upload the file using Browse If a certificate file already exists the name of the file is shown Transaction type Debit The amount is automatically Drop down menu debited from the customer account The debiting occurs after the set num ber of days Authorisation The amount will be re served for you You must trigger the debiting yourself in the Atos Worldline administration The reservation is can celled after the set number of days Debiting of the Number of days after which the debit is Entry field numeric 14 amount occurs after performed automatically or the au SAN thorisation expires Validity of the au thorisation expires after Display shop logo on You can integrate your shop logo into Option button the payment page provided by Atos Worldline To do this you must send the image file containing the logo to Atos Worldline support Save your entries by clicking Save Sofortiiberweisung payment method The basics about working with So forttiberwe sung are available in chapter Soforttiberwe sung on page 201 The various fields have the following meanings Page 80 User guide for Web site administrators Delivery and payment Settings Table 46 Parameters forthe payment method So forttiberwe sung Field Name Description Field type Example Customer number You will receive this
229. ill be overwritten and the style will be reset to its original settings You will be asked to confirm this command Multifunction bar and design In the Design area you will see the multifunction bar in the upper section of the browser window This makes available the functions that can be used to design the Web site Only the functions that can be used in the selected area active area are shown The functions are grouped together as described in the next chapter Different content can be selected for some function groups This is indicated by the arrow in front of the group name Click the arrow to view the Page 176 User guide for Web site administrators Multifunction bar and design Design selection options Select the desired content for editing The associated setting options are displayed in the group area To save the changes that you have made to the design and layout of a given area always use the bel icon to save and exit the page The next section describes the functions and settings of the individual function groups For individual ar eas only a subset of these functions is displayed The following function groups are available File see File below Area see Area below Page areas see Page areas on page 1 8 Icon set see con set on page 178 Font see font on page 178 Page elements see Page elements on page 179 Preview with selection of function group see Preview with selection of function
230. imple Map the fields in the Recipients and Package tabs Map the data as follows a Select the field in the right list field for external data fields by clicking it b Select the corresponding field in the left list field for internal data fields by clicking it c Click Map If all the options are set correctly and all the fields are mapped click the Import button Continue to edit the shipment as described in the WorldShip instructions To create the UPS tracking num ber click Finish after you have entered all necessary information Among other things this saves the shipment in the delivery history and gives you the option of viewing the UPS tracking number Activating order tracking Enter the UPS tracking number in the UPS tracking numberfield of the relevant document UPS packing slip Save your entries by clicking Save After saving the Track shipment link is displayed next to the UPS tracking number Use this link to open the UPS page where you can see the status of your delivery Order tracking in the shop As soon as the tracking number has been entered and saved the order tracking link also becomes avail able for the corresponding customer The customer opens order tracking in My Account under the Query order status option The UPS tracking number is also displayed as a link in the order The customer can use this link to open the UPS page where he can see the status of his delivery A link to the order tracking is also
231. in the Entry field alpha info provider de campaign numeric Test e mail Every newsletter in the campaign uses Entry field alpha test provider de this address for test newsletters see numeric Newsletter details General on page 208 At the time of creation the Web site e mail address is entered automatically See Address on page 55 Default setting for all newsletters in the Entry field alpha Newideas at Mile campaign numeric max 255 stones characters Save your entries by clicking Save Newsletter campaigns Details Newsletter Page Marketing Newsletter General campaign Newsletter The table lists all the created newsletters The symbols have the following meanings Table 132 Newsletter status Description The newsletter has not yet been sent The newsletter has not yet been sent however a sending date has been entered on which the newsletter will automatically be sent The newsletter has been sent No more changes can be made You can however still dupli cate the newsletter The following icons supplement the status and apply to the send date Table 133 icons for the send date Icon Description No send date was entered The newsletter has not yet been sent fhe planned send date has been entered amp __ the date when the newsletter was sent is displayed To open the details of a newsletter click its name You can sort the table by column For more det
232. in the page browser you will see all the functions needed to edit the structure and assign existing content to the corresponding pages Depending on the page type the available functions may differ When in editing mode you will see all the functions needed for working with text fields The functions are grouped together as described in the next chapter Different content can be selected for some function groups This is indicated by the black arrow in front of the group name Click the arrow to view the selection options Select the desired content for editing The associated setting options are dis played in the group area To save the changes to the structure and content always exit the page by clicking Save The next chapter will describe the individual function groups The functions when editing the individual text fields correspond to those of the WYSIWYG editor See WYS WYG editor on page 36 The following function groups are available File see File below Commands see Commands on page 142 Layout see Layout on page 142 Language see Language on page 143 File This group contains general functions that are always available User guide for Web site administrators Page 141 Contents Multifunction bar and content Table 87 Function group f ein the multifunction bar Function Comment ye Use this to undo the previous edit This function can be carried out as many times as you wish Repeat an action that wa
233. ing value from the drop down menu Page areas Here you can define which individual sub areas of your Web site are displayed See also Design basics on page 171 Note Remember that the page elements assigned to the areas are hidden if their corresponding areas are hidden The page elements may then have to be arranged in other areas see Page elements and navigation on page 181 Icon set Some functions and statuses are triggered or displayed with icons There are pre defined sets for these icons Click this icon to view the list of the various icon sets Activate the set from the list that matches your design best Click the corresponding option button and save your selection by clicking Apply Font Different designs of font can be used for texts links and headings in the individual areas You can config ure the individual fonts here Page 178 User guide for Web site administrators Multifunction bar and design Design Formatting Here you can define the formatting of the text for the page elements in the active area For the specified text elements you can define the size colour and special formatting The sizes are entered in pixels px For more on selecting colours see Colour selector on page 43 To con figure special formatting click the corresponding button Font Here you can define the font for the individual text elements in the active area Select the corresponding value from the drop down menu Text
234. ings to set the address of your Web site and enter the business hours In addition you can control customers access to your Web site the speed at which individual pages are rendered dis played and you can check the extent to which your licences are being used Status Page Settings General settings Status The various fields have the following meanings Table 15 Fields for the general Web site status Field name Description Field type Example Date Web site created Display Monday 25 March 2008 Linkto home page Display The Web site is Depending on the option selected the Option button open closed Web site may or may not be available for customers on the Internet Name of the Web site This name is language dependent Entry field alpha Page element see Page elements and numeric navigation on page 181 Page element the text is language Text field dependent For more on formatting see Working with text fields on page 35 Information displayed to the customer Text field if the shop is closed This text is lan guage dependent For more on formatting see Working with text fields on page 35 Page element see Page elements and Entry field alpha navigation on page 181 numeric For more on using images see Uploading images on page 43 After clicking Save the image is dis played in the preview area To see the image original size click the image name or the preview image Scale image T
235. inistration area Option button Automatically sign in without the sign in process via cookies Cookies must be enabled in the browser to do this This field will only become active if you have activated signing in using cookies in User management Sign in see Signing in on page 58 Caution f the Automatic sign in via cookies option is selected everyone who uses your computer will have access to the administration area In this case make sure only authorised persons have access to your computer Save your entries by clicking Save Administrator details Posts Page Settings User management Administrators Posts This displays a list of all the posts or messages that the administrator has written in all forums blogs and guestbooks on your Web site You can use the links in the first column to call up each post You can sort the table by column For more details see Sorting using column headings on page 28 Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 User search You can use the search to find individual users or administrators directly or search via user groups For ba sic information on using the search function see Search on page 28 Tax calculation Here you can manage and edit all tax settings relevant to your shop Tax matrix Page Settings Tax calculation Tax matrix Your provider will su
236. inline editing mode This allows you to edit text directly in the page preview For formatting purposes use the WYSIWYG formatting tools in the multi function toolbar See also Pages Preview on page 140 and Multifunction bar and content on page 141 You cannot use HTML code directly during inline editing To enter HTML code at this position click the Edit HTML icon in the multifunction bar Using HTML code in text fields To do this HTML tags are used directly in the text to format and design the content For simple formatting the functions Bold talics or Underline are the most useful The tags listed in 7ab e 5 will cover most if not all of your requirements Table 5 Selection of HTML formatting tags Tag Description Usage Effect w JThe following text is shown in bold lt b gt Bold lt b gt Bold i JThe following text is shown in falics italics ko Ss Thee following text is shown underlined lt wounderlined lt u gt underlined lt S The following text is shownstrueceut lt s gt struck out streke c s lt br gt A carriage return is inserted at this point in New lt br gt row New the text row You can also use any other HTML tags User guide for Web site administrators Page 35 WYSIWYG editor Basic principles WYSIWYG editor As well as using HTML tags directly the program offers a second comfortable solution for designing text fields a WYSIWYG editor WYSIWYG What You See Is What You Ge
237. inserted into every status e mail sent to the customer Invoices For basic information on editing the document see Orders Documents on page 188 The specialised fields have the following meanings Table 123 Specialised fields for Invoices Field name Description Field type Example Invoice no This number is suggested by the sys Entry field alpha 1001 1 tem and consists of the order number numeric and a sequential number for invoices Invoice date ate fel 19 04 08 Save your entries by clicking Save The comments on the payment method are only printed on the invoice if the order status Pa dis not set Page 192 User guide for Web site administrators WorldPay Orders Credit notes For basic information on editing the document see Orders Documents on page 188 The specialised fields have the following meanings Table 124 Specialised fields for Credit notes Field name Description Field type Example Credit note no This number is suggested by the sys Entry field alpha 1001 1 tem and consists of the order number numeric and a sequential number for credit notes Credit note date ate fel 19 04 08 Save your entries by clicking Save WorldPay WorldPay Atto www WorldPay com belongs to the Royal Bank of Scotland Group They provide elec tronic payment solutions The WorldPay payment method offers an interface between your shop and the WorldPay payment system With this you can offer payme
238. ion Keywords for search engines as well as all the attributes based on the 7extvariable type For more information about attribute types see Attribute types on page 32 In addition the fields in which file names are saved are also searched With this you can also search for the names of product images used or attached files such as pdf files video files and so on Use the Language drop down menu to determine which rans ation fieldwill be searched for language dependent fields Inventory search There are two fields for searching the inventory the Stock eve field and the Minimum stock level field Use the Stock leve search field to query the stock levels of individual products To do this enter a number Note If the stock level of a product is lower than the number entered into the search field it will be displayed in the search results If you want to list all the products that have reached a minimum stock level or have already fallen below it select the Stock level below minimum check box Note Inventory searches find and list variation products and single products Master products are not included in the search Page 130 User guide for Web site administrators Customer details General Customers 7 Customers Page Customers Customers are visitors to the Web site who place orders in the online shop Customers have order related data such as the invoice address and delivery address tax model and tax regi
239. iption If a user is active then he is permitted to sign in to the Web site A When a user is not active he is not permitted to sign in to the Web site To open the details of a user click the name You can sort the table by column For more details see Sorting using column headings on page 28 Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 To create a new user proceed as described in Adding records on page 26 User details Sign in data Page Settings User management Users Sign on data The fields have the following meanings Page 56 User guide for Web site administrators User management Settings Table 18 User data fields Field name Description Field type Registration process The user will receive an e mail after Check box complete filling out the registration form This Read only field includes a confirmation link The user must click on this link in order to com plete the registration process This selects the checkbox If the checkbox is not selected the registration process was not completed successfully Allow sign in This allows you to deactivate the user Check box and thus prevent him from signing in to the site Display Name Entry field alpha Administrator numeric User Name User name used when signing in Entry field alpha WebAdmin numeric E mail If the user forgets his current passw
240. itions easily accessible on your page See also Terms and condi tions on page 152 Shopping basket only This option allows you to stipulate that Option button for registered cus only registered customers can place tomers items in the shopping basket Non registered customers are required to register first Permit ordering This option allows you to stipulate Option button Straight after registra whether the customer is able to order tion Straight after registering If you first want to check the registration data set this option to No and use the customer details to permit ordering manually Save your entries by clicking Save Texts Page Settings Shopping basket settings Texts Frequently it is necessary to display order information and additional information to the customer in the shop The following places are available for this above the shopping basket below the shopping basket onthe order confirmation page The text fields are language dependent For more on formatting see Working with text fields on page 35 Save your entries by clicking Save Registration Page Settings Shopping basket settings Registration This option allows you to define the contents of the various forms visitors must complete in the Web site There are the following Sign up form for registration new customers Entry of the invoice address on registration ordering or in My account Entry of the delivery addr
241. itten to the browser s memory when specific Web pages are opened at the beginning of a session This session cookie provides the authorisation details needed for you to use all the functions on the Web site After signing out or closing your browser to end a session the session cookie is deleted A Web site that provides functions that allow products to be sold online Merchants can use this to build up an Internet sales channel Product of the provider that he sells or leases to merchants or shop opera tors Each shop type is provided with specific functions and in varying price classes Merchants create their own shops by selecting from among these shop types A procedure for obtaining access to an application by entering a user name and password Frequently the combination of both a user name and pass word is called sign in information A menu the functionality of which changes according to the chosen working area The field in a form where you can type a large amount of text This can be used to compose descriptions or other information Text fields can be edited using a WYSIWYG editor For more information see Working with text fields on page 35 A short informational text that is displayed automatically when you move the cursor over a specific area The presence of a tool tip is often indicated by an icon next to an entry field If you want to publish files or pages on the Internet you must copy them to a server This co
242. ivate it as described above Page 82 User guide for Web site administrators Delivery and payment Settings Moneybookers payment method Caution You can offer various payment options using Moneybookers However you must create a new payment method based on Moneybookers for each option The basics about working with Moneybookers can be found in Moneybookers on page 202 The various fields have the following meanings Table 48 Parameters for the Moneybookers payment method Field Name Description Field type Example E mail address E mail address that you use for Mon Entry field alpha mb provider com eybookers registration numeric Customer ID Customer number that you receive from Entry field alpha 123456 Moneybookers numeric Secret word This is a Secret word that you enterin Entry field alpha your Moneybookers account in the numeric merchant settings The secret word is not the account password Payment method Setting how your customers can pay Drop down menu with Moneybookers Selection of the sym Select the symbols for the payment Check box methods that you use to accept pay ment via Moneybookers and which will be displayed in the shop Would you like to Click here to create another payment create another Mon ethod using Moneybookers For more Drop down menu eybookers payment method information see Creating Moneybook ers payment methods below Save your entries by clicking S
243. king with text fields on page 35 Keywords for search These terms are also used forthe in Entryfield alpha Jackets overcoats engines ternal search numeric They are not shown No third party brand names may be entered here Image on the detail It is possible to enter a local image file Entry field alpha category gif page or the URL Internet address of an numeric http www provider image com _data _globals For more on using images see logo gif Uploading images on page 43 If you click the link with the name of the image file the image will appear in a new browser window original size Page 144 User guide for Web site administrators Datasheet view Contents Field name Description Field type Example Scale image Upload and display the category image Check box on the Web site in an optimised size 50 x 50 pixels Delete Delete category image Translation See also Language Dependencies on page 29 Save your entries by clicking Save For some page types there are additional special settings These are explained in the descriptions of the individual page types Pages Page Content Pages Datasheet view Pages page Pages All structural elements which are located hierarchically beneath the current page are referred to as sub pages of this page The term Subcategory is also used The table lists all the sub pages that have been created for this page The icon next to the ID di
244. l characters set this to Unicode Other wise this character will be displayed as a question mark Delimiter Setting for the delimiter used to divide Drop down menu data fields in the export file This setting overwrites the delimiter setting entered in formatting Languages Setting that defines which fields rele Drop down menu vant for a language will be exported Once you have entered all the settings click Export to start exporting To complete the process you must enter a target directory for the export file to be saved Import Before importing you first need to create a correctly formatted CSV file It is especially important to use the correct field names in the header Figure 19 shows an example D Type ID Alias Sort orde Visiblel IsVisible List price EUR gross ListPrice EUR gross List price GBP grosq ListPrice GBP gross PL hres 1001 16 95 16 95 It_0401107001 1172 95 72 95 eg 0100504001 1122 95 22 95 Tent ho_1112105010 1 499 95 499 95 Tent eg_ 1000111010 1 339 95 339 95 Tent wb_ 1003111010 1 259 95 259 95 Tent nf_1005104010 1 264 95 204 95 Jacket be_ 40401 1199 95 199 95 Jacket be_4040104003 1 199 95 199 95 Jacket be_ 4040104004 1199 95 199 95 Jacket be_4040104005 1 199 96 199 95 M MNAM NNS i A ANM MAr ANM ar Figure 19 Field names in the header of the import file for products The field names in the header have two parts the name and the ID The name corresponds to the n
245. layed Bundle products Shows individual products for a product bundle display The compact layout displays the products with an image and the price Table layout is best suited for displaying a large number of products List view corresponds to the product list in a category Save your entries by clicking Save Price lists Page Products Price lists Overview Price lists form the basis for customer specific pricing A price list defines the validity period of the price reduction and the affected customers or customer groups The prices themselves are set in the product as signed to the price list see Product details Prices on page 117 n addition shopping basket discounts are configured using price lists All price lists that have been created are displayed in the Overview section of the table The symbols have the following meanings Table 74 icons in the table for price lists Description Price list is active The current date lies within the list validity period and the affected cus tomers receive the defined price reduction Price list is not active The current date lies outside of the list validity period and the price reductions are not applied To open the details of a price list click the price list name Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 To create a new price list follow the steps describ
246. ld Name Description Field type Example Header image URL Internet address for an image that the Entry field alpha http imageserver _ customer is shown on the payment numeric data index logo jpg page at PayPal Here you can show your shop logo for example Header background Use these colours to customise the Entry field alpha colour PayPal payment page to your shop numeric Header border colour colours Payment flow back Enter the colour code directly or click ground colour the colour chooser after the entry field See also Colour selector on page 43 Save your entries by clicking Save Caution Note that for test operation the correct access data must be entered for the test system and for live operation the correct access data must be entered for the live system Note The PayPal Express button is only shown in the shopping basket if you have set the payment method to Vis ble Google Checkout payment method The basics about working with Google Checkout are available in Google Checkout on page 198 The vari ous fields have the following meanings Table 43 Parameters for the Google Checkout payment method Field Name Description Field type Example Create new Google Link to the Google Checkout live sys Link Checkout account ltem to create a new merchant account This URL is generated automatically by Display http server provid the shop system You must enter it into er Store sf Change the G
247. le lists all the Soforttiiberwe sung transactions Search for Sofortiberweisung transactions Use the search function to group and filter your Soforttiberwe sung transactions You can also search specifically by Soforttiberwe sung transaction numbers Otherwise searching for Soforttiberwe sung transactions is identical to the general search for orders For basic information on using the search function see Search on page 28 HSBC HSBC www hsbc com provides solutions for electronic payment processes The payment method HSBC offers an interface between your shop and HSBC s own payment system This allows you to support pay User guide for Web site administrators Page 201 Orders Moneybookers ment by credit card in your shop via HSBC HSBC checks the customer s payment data and only permits transactions with secure data Note Since the recording and processing of an end customer s payment data is performed by HSBC you as the merchant are not involved in the handling of this sensitive data and therefore cannot be held liable To set all necessary parameters in the shop administration see Payment method with HSBC on page 82 You must register as a merchant with HSBC This qualifies you for a Client Alias and a security code Shared Secred as well as access to the administration area of HSBC After this you can configure the HSBC pay ment method for your shop HSBC transactions Page Orders Transactions HSBC Th
248. le products The table lists all the products which belong to the current product bundle To open the details of a prod uct click its name Clicking the icon to the left next to the product number opens a new browser window containing the product details The Quantity column allows you to set the quantity of a product offered in the bundle User guide for Web site administrators Page 105 Products Product details General The order in which the products are displayed is defined by the numbers in the Sort ordercolumn see Sorting using key on page 28 To add a product either enter the product number directly or insert a product from the tray For more infor mation see Adding records on page 26 Save your entries by clicking Save To remove a product from the product bundle select it and click Remove assignment The product is re moved from the table without any confirmation The product itself is not deleted The total price of the individual items is compared with the bundle price below the product list The price difference is also displayed The contribution of a product to the total amount is calculated using the quan tity and the list price per item These values are updated whenever you save Notes about bundles You should note the following information about working with product bundles The stock level and minimum stock level of the bundle are determined by the smallest respective value for the individual produc
249. lists all the documents that you have created for the current order The symbols have the following meanings Table 120 icons for order documents Icon Description Document is active and can be processed Document is finalised and can no longer be edited To open the details of a document click the type As soon as you finalise a document the date of finalisation is displayed in the last table column To open a print view for the document click the print symbol in the last column If you would like to generate a new document select the type from the drop down menu below the table and click Save To delete a document proceed as described in Deleting entries on page 26 You can only delete docu ments which have not been finalised All documents are constructed and processed in a similar manner The similarities are shown using the ex ample of an invoice in Figure 28 Specific details will be illustrated later Every document contains address information and order information as well as function fields Page 188 User guide for Web site administrators Orders Documents Orders General Print view Herr Invoice Prof Max A Mustermann oT 1001 1 Blumenweg 42 01234 Neustadt Thiringen Customer no 1001 Seuiec Mene Veer Teny Please include vith all payments and reguestsj Invoice date 16007 2008 Te Order date 21 06 2006 Delivery date 1607 2008 Te Thank you for your order Please find your invoic
250. ltifunction bar and design on page 176 In the lower section you can see the page preview You can edit the design directly there The page preview shows you the current Web page in the design and layout specified by the selected style see Sty es on page 175 The pages are split into the following possible functional areas see Figure 27 User guide for Web site administrators Page 171 Design Milestones Mae Equipped to meet your goals Home page Jackets Shoes O Backpacks Tents Equipment Product search Searchterm Advancet earch Coming soon to this shop Maps amp Books Welcome to the Milestones Demo Shop All products and prices shown on these shop pages are for demonstration purposes only They are here Home page Design basics Siz tala gt ontact Shopping basket Your shopping basket is empty Order form Sign in User name Password Page 172 to ilustrate the functionality of the ePages shopping system Forgot your password Promotional products Register Black Bear Gemini Subscribe to newsletter 29 95 fs oo oN yEstOnes Oreo Currency selection Euro Pound Sterling Meindl Air Revolution 2 0 169 95 pair s Mag Lite Mini 5 Old price 49 95 i npk 5 Jack Wolfskin Blizzar Leatherman Tool Survi Eureka El Capitan I v 215 95 Old price 89 95 339 95 72 95 Prices include VAT plus deliver
251. m the Recently used categories drop down menu After selection the number is entered into the Category field Select a category from the catalogue structure You can only select a category if an option button for this category is displayed in the Selection column Select the option button for the desired category Af ter selection the number is entered into the Category field You can also assign the item to additional categories There is one entry field for each category The as signment procedure is the same as for the first category The currently active entry field is indicated by an arrow If you own an eBay shop you can also import the item into two categories used by your eBay shop Select the target categories in the Category 1 and Category 2 drop down menus Save your entries by clicking Next gt gt or lt lt Previous Details This is where you define settings that affect the sequence of events for the item These are the same set tings you edit when you place an item on eBay directly Consult eBay for more information about the usage function and any costs of the individual parameters ri For the start time setting you can use the date entry function via the icon to enter the date in the right format See also Date entry fields on page 30 User guide for Web site administrators Page 233 Marketing eBay Save your entries by clicking Next gt gt or lt lt Previous Layout This is where y
252. m value relates the to the value calculated from the product prices and coupon values in the shopping basket Products coupons and The maximum value relates the to the value calculated from the product shopping basket discount prices coupon values in the shopping basket and the shopping basket discount Products coupons shop The maximum value relates the to the value calculated from the product ping basket discount deliv prices coupon values in the shopping basket and the shopping basket ery costs discount and delivery costs Payment method with credit card manual Use this payment method if you want to process credit card payments used by your customers manually Note In order for your customers to be able to use credit cards certification based on the Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard PCI DSS is required Make sure that wherever your customers credit card data is stored you are working according to this standard For more on this see https pcisecuritystandards org The table shows all credit cards with manual processing Using the drop down menus you can set which additional information the customer has to enter for which credit card Corresponding entry fields will be displayed to the customer Entry fields for Card number Card holder and Expiry date are displayed by de fault This cannot be modified The various fields have the following meanings Table 36 input parameters for credit car
253. mail Caution For the system to be able to send questions about products by e mail the event must be en abled in the e mail settings and you must have entered a recipient address For more information see mail settings on page 90 eBay You can manage your eBay items and orders here For information about the settings required see eBay settings on page 98 Items Page Marketing eBay Items The table lists all the items for sale on eBay The symbols have the following meanings Table 149 icons for eBay items Description The item has been created but not yet verified and not yet placed on eBay It can still be edited The item has been created and verified but not yet placed on eBay It can still be edited The item has been created has been verified and will be placed on eBay at the set time It can still be edited The item has been placed on eBay and the sale is running It can no longer be edited The sale is finalised The product has been sold The sale is finalised The product has not been sold The item has been created as a Buy It Now item but has not yet been verified or placed on eBay It can still be edited The item has been created as a Buy It Now item and has been verified but has not yet been placed on eBay It can still be edited The item has been created as a Buy It Now item has been verified and will be placed on eBay at the set time It can still be edited The item has b
254. manage all the files that can be inserted using the text fields You can also use file management in conjunction with uploading images in the design process In this case its usage is limited to image files The file management system allows you to create a folder structure into which you can sort your files You can import the desired file into the text from this structure In addition it also incorporates an image database made available by your provider This contains a selec tion of images that you can copy directly to your text or your own site structure The left side of the file management control displayed the folder structure Above this is a command bar If you select a folder the corresponding commands that are available for this folder are displayed in the command bar The following functions can be performed Table 10 Commands in file management left section Function Comment Create new folder A new folder is created in the folder structure This new folder is created as a sub folder for the currently selected folder Delete files JAI highlighted files in the selected folder will be deleted Page 44 User guide for Web site administrators Import and export Basic principles Function Comment This function allows you to copy image files from the image database into your site structure Proceed as follows Select the target folder Select a folder in the image database Highlight the relevant images Under
255. mat Description List view This image will be used in product lists A product list can be the representation of the products in a category or the results of a search This image is shown in a new window to a maximum size of 800 600px when the visitor clicks the product image in the product details promotional products You can upload images using the image upload button ay For more details see Uploading images on page 43 The individual formats can be prepared as follows Create all formats automatically when master image is uploaded When uploading the image using the large image upload button all formats are created automatically An image in the specified size is created for each format Any existing images are overwritten Create formats individually You can upload a separate image for each format For this use the image upload button for the specific format w To remove an image for a specific format click the icon Each image that is uploaded to the Views section is stored in the image list in the Gallery slideshow sec tion User guide for Web site administrators Page 111 Products Product details Images Gallery slideshow On this page you can upload and manage images that you want to show on the product details page in the image list or in a slideshow The following options are available to adding images to the list Upload the image as a master image or individual format in the Views section
256. ministrator See Administrator information on page 51 Sign out link Click Sign Out to leave the Administration area Signing out ensures that your connection to the system is closed correctly and securely and that no unauthorised user can gain access to the Administration area of your site After you sign out the sign in page will appear again Menu bar The menu bar provides access to the main modules managers of the Administration area It always re mains the same Page 20 User guide for Web site administrators Tray Basic principles A submenu is provided for each module The submenu contains the main functions for the corresponding module You can call up a submenu by moving the mouse pointer over or clicking the corresponding mod ule name To call up a function from a submenu simply click the name of the function Working area The working area may contain forms tables or other functional controls depending on its current purpose Each area is organised into tabs Every tab has a title which is displayed in the form of a link See Figure 3 You can click this link to activate the tab if more than one tab is visible at a time On the tabs you can enter and edit information check settings display search results and so on Sidebar The sidebar consists of the following sections described below Help see Help on page 23 Tray see ray below Favourites see Favorites on page 22 History see History on
257. misation ccecesceccscecescecsscecescecsececesceces 54 WIS AE ON eicessdsciducdastses ne chatanenacnoseenioehensactecesoodsseiutenesgresetesune 55 BUSINESS NOUNS 010 ss cnnecaceneneaneovene NR 55 PROTOS Si eiie a aaa tatntenaccusae E E 55 User manas emen erans E EN 56 WS ONS EEEE E OEE IE A E NE A A EE E E E T T 56 User details Sign in data sesssesoesesssosscssssssossssssossesssesses 56 USOT details POSES ths a cctecesncees n a e aa 57 USereroUpS ana TTO 58 RESISE ALION anae e a E e E O T eee 58 SISTING irois E E E 58 ACIMMIMISTI ALOIS oraa paniternecutss scceaaduwssaacmetereneneasateueeateaeeisas 59 Administrator details Sign in data ccccececsccececececseceeeeees 59 Administrator details Posts ccccecscsccecececscsecececscscececesecs 60 USOT SCANCIN sostavecadctacecean series Geswusesos metoneusateose tem atewsaaauseanaceeie 60 Tax calcula ON xcutrentiscenesesssceuweteesdeuctened EE 60 TAXMAN iaren aa E coeeereaaekeavaeaeenaneee 60 Tax AI CAS oenar aa E E NA 61 ETE ASS E E A E S TEE A A T estes 61 Tax MOTET aera a A contin 61 Deliver ANCAP ay MEN oera AT 62 Deliver Method Sesera rer a AS 62 General properties for delivery Methods ccccscececececsceees 63 Fixed price delivery MethodsS cccecececscscecececececcscecececeees 64 Delivery methods with an exemption limit cceceececeeees 64 Delivery method Shopping basket total ccccccscsceccs
258. mistaken for trademarked names or those which are identical with trade marked terms Attributes Page Products product General Attributes You can use the Product type drop down menu to assign a product type to the current product This sets additional product attributes see Product types on page 122 Page 110 User guide for Web site administrators Product details Images Products The relevant attributes will be displayed according to product type These can be edited to suit the current product Save your entries by clicking Save The edit product type link takes you to the current product type of the product Note Once a product has variations see Product details Variations on page 113 the product type assignment can no longer be changed Product details Images Page Products product Images Product images are displayed at various places in categories in promotional products as part of product lists and obviously also in the product details You can provide images in various sizes as well as group them together to form image galleries and slideshows There are two areas in which a product s images are managed Views and Gallery slideshow Views The images are made available here for display in product lists and product details Since the images can be displayed in different sized on each page you can upload the image files in various formats Table 69 Product image formats For
259. more information see Resource details General on page 166 The remaining parameters for the business hours are configured in the datasheet view General The general settings are edited as described in General on page 143 Save your entries by clicking Save Site map The purpose of the site map is to provide your visitors with a general overview of the structure of your Web site At a glance visitors can see what pages your Web site contains and can find their place Depending on the layout format up to four levels of the Web site structure can be displayed The following parameters are configured in the datasheet view General The general settings are edited as described in General on page 143 Save your entries by clicking Save User guide for Web site administrators Page 153 Contents Forum Layout In this table you decide whether the site map is displayed in a block form or as a tree Select an option and save your entries by clicking Save For basic information on displaying using the datasheet view see Layout on page 147 Forum The purpose of the forum is to provide your visitors with an opportunity to discuss various topics on your Web site Users can start discussions on a given topic as well as write responses to the various topics You can restrict who can read the forum and who is permitted to submit topics or posts Visitors can report Suspicious content using a special function Such entries are marked as
260. n price per currency for each product Once a comparison price is entered for a currency it is displayed in the shop for the corresponding product along with the current list price To show off the price comparison more effectively you can add text and define the way the comparison price is to be displayed For more details see 7exts on page 97 To display a product with the list price and comparison price proceed as follows 1 Enter the current list price or a special price for the product in the List price field Page 108 User guide for Web site administrators Product details General Products Click Display comparison price to view the entry fields for comparison prices Enter a comparison price per currency Save your entries by clicking Save Call up the page Settings Product settings Texts Enter a corresponding text in the field Text before comparison priceif desired Select the checkbox Strike through comparison price if desired Save your entries by clicking Save ee ae ee Call up the shop and check the way prices are displayed in product lists and in the product details Delivery information If you want you can also set delivery data for each product These include the delivery weight and dimen sions of the product You enter the delivery weight for the quantity or number of the product that you have entered as the base unit for the price The value is displayed for greater clarity You can also
261. n account proceed as described in Deleting entries on page 26 The following accounts cannot be deleted Ifitems still exist for this account Ifthe account is set as the default account in the configuration see Default values on page 235 eBay accounts details Page Settings eBay Settings eBay accounts account General This page is used to authenticate your account with eBay whether for purposes of renewal or creation of a new account The various fields have the following meanings User guide for Web site administrators Page 99 Settings eBay settings Table 63 general fields for eBay accounts Field name Description Field type Example Name Entry field alpha eBay_Germany numeric Sales platform Platforms will be made available and Display configured by your provider Authentication Access authorisation for eBay see Authentication below Useraccount Dipy a County Country where the productis located Drop down menu Region Region where the product is located Drop down menu dependent on country Town Product location Entry field alpha Jena numeric Save your entries by clicking Save Authentication To improve security eBay has introduced a new authentication mechanism During the authentication process you must sign in with your eBay user name and password once You then receive a so called token from eBay which is then saved in the shop system This token is used to authori
262. n opens the home page of the relevant country platform To deactivate a platform remove the mark in the relevant check box in the Active column and save your en tries by clicking Save If you cannot select a check box the requirements for the corresponding platform have not been satisfied A relevant notification is displayed The settings for each country platform are edited in the following tabs General By and large these are common Setting options see General settings below Specialised pa rameters are possible see the chapters on the individual portals Products The product list is edited for all platforms in the same way see Product list and export below Differing contents are possible etracker reporting All platforms are edited in the same way see efracker reporting on page 221 Dif fering contents are possible General settings Page Marketing Product portals portal General These settings and comments are valid for all portals To use a portal you must register there A link to the registration page is available for every portal In addi tion there is a link to the home page of the portal User guide for Web site administrators Page 219 Marketing Product Portals The fields which are the same for all portals have the following meanings Table 141 general settings for all portals Field name Description Field type Example Land Regional setting Display language oo iy Currency Di
263. n the administration area Products are the most important elements of your shop Therefore the access to individual products or product groups must be uncomplicated and convenient Not only is catalogue management important for this you also need an easy to use search with extensive filter options The product search can be accessed on every page in the Products area For basic information on using the search function see Search on page 28 Product search has been expanded with the following buttons amp ai Switch between inventory and text search see nventory search belowand Text search below Different search fields are displayed according to the setting Note The product search also applies to attributes and products set to Not Visible Both master products as well as variation products are covered by the search too see Product details Variations on page 113 Text search You can search for individual products in the Product numberfield You cannot use wildcards in this field The number of the product you are looking for must be entered completely Note Searching by product number is quicker than searching using the 7ext search field because in this case only one field is evaluated per record The following attributes will be searched for the term entered into the 7ext search field Product number Product name Manufacturer name Manufacturer product number Product code Short description Long descript
264. nd its ID cannot be changed The following parameters are configured in the datasheet view General Here you can edit the text that is displayed on the home page which greets the visitors to your Web site For more on formatting see Working with text fields on page 35 Pages Here you can See the entire structure of your Web site in table format All the pages and their correspond ing sub pages and products are listed At this stage too you can explore the entire structure but not as easily as in the page browser see Pages Preview on page 140 For more on working with the table see Pages on page 145 User guide for Web site administrators Page 147 Contents Home page Products Here you can See all products that are automatically displayed on the home page For more on working with the table see Products on page 146 Layout All the available options for displaying the elements in the content area of the home page are shown here The following options are available Table 93 Layout options for the home page Function Comment Sortorder Select what content should be displayed in what order here This applies to the page ele ments in the content area of the home page home page texts home page products and the sub pages By selecting the corresponding icon you can select to show or hide the element groups as well as define the order in which the elements are displayed Texts Select here how the home page te
265. nd sent to eBay In the case of master products the variation products are displayed in the table Product types Page Products Product types General Product types are used to group similar products These are products which share additional attributes as well as the standard attributes These additional attributes are made available in the product type The product type is assigned to all relevant products In this way the products receive the desired additional attributes The table lists all the created product types To open the details of a product type click the name To create a new product type proceed as described in Adding records on page 26 Save your entries by clicking Save To delete a product type follow the steps described in Deleting entries on page 26 Caution A product type can only be deleted as long as no products are assigned A special type is the Base product type This is the base product type for all other product types All attrib utes of this product type are passed to the other product types when they are created In this way you can specify additional attributes that apply to all products The base product type cannot be deleted The shared additional attributes can only be deleted via the base product type Note If you do not want any shared additional attributes delete all attributes from the base product type Page 122 User guide for Web site administrators Product types Products
266. ndatory Type Class Parent Object Parent ID Alias If no further data is specified the categories are created using the corresponding alias and specified type and are sorted accordingly into the structure The default settings are used for all other required data If other columns are filled in the import file the values are entered for the corresponding attributes Category Product assignment Import and export When category product assignments are imported or exported the assignment of products to categories is also swapped in or swapped out The assignment of products to categories is defined here An example is shown in Figure 26 Page 160 User guide for Web site administrators BMECat import Category Category Categories Categories Categories Categories SpecialOffers 6 Categories SpecialOffers Categories SpecialOtffers 8 Categories Jackets Categories lJackets Product Product Sort order Position ho 40407 10 It_O401 107001 eq 1000111010 vs 420211240106 md 49417110 hm 0100401001 ho 40407 be 40402 Contents Categories lJackets be 40401 Categories Shaoes md 49412090 12 Categories Shoes md 49417110 13 Categories Rucksacks de 3401212002 14 Categories Rucksacks de 3405104010 15 Categories Rucksacks vs 32402112010 16 Categories Rucksacks js_ 3200705005 1 Categories Rucksacks de 32406199010 18 Categories Tents ho 11172105010 19 Categories Tents Individualtents wb 10031
267. nforma Entry field numeric tion via FIP This is not displayed for security rea sons Promotional Text A short description of the product Drop down menu max 25 characters Save your entries by clicking Save For more on product export see Product list and export on page 221 For more on etracker evaluation see etracker reporting on page 221 Kelkoo The general settings which must be edited for every portal are described in General settings on page 219 For more on product export see Product list and export on page 221 For more on etracker evaluation see etracker reporting on page 221 Note the following exceptions The Export file and the Export interval fields do not exist for Kelkoo The export of the prepared products is done in two steps 1 Save the product list to the export file in Kelkoo format by clicking Export 2 Upload the export file to Kelkoo Register with Kelkoo before uploading Use the Register with Kelkoo link After you register select the country in Kelkoo for which you want to upload the product list This must correspond with the country dis played in the general platform settings in the shop administration In Kelkoo enter the shop URL that is displayed in the note at the top of the page Click the Upload product data link on your Kelkoo administration page In the next dialog enter the file name of the export file Either enter the name of the file with its path directly or click Browse
268. ng commands for tables are located in a drop down menu below the corresponding table Perform these steps to use a batch processing command 1 Select the records to be processed 2 Select the command in the drop down menu 3 Start the command by clicking Execute The following general actions will not be explained in the rest of the book Table 3 general batch processing commands Command Comment Add to tray Selected items are added to the tray see ray on page 21 Setvisible eeo Visibility on page 31 Set not Visible See also Visibility on page 31 Duplicate Generate an exact copy of the original item The ID will not be copied A new value will be assigned as the ID has to be unique See also Deletion confirmation on page 51 Delete all Deletes all records from the table selection is not necessary The individual chapters only explain specific batch processing actions or describe particular features relat ing to the general actions User guide for Web site administrators Page 27 Basic principles Search Sorting using column headings In some tables it is possible to sort the contents in columns In these tables the headings are displayed as links Next to the heading are two arrows Clicking a link sorts the table according to the value in this column The small arrows to the right of the column heading indicate the sort direction of the currently active column The left arrow pointing upwards indicates asc
269. ng the Internet address of your web site you should test it as a customer Doing this lets you check whether your settings and changes for your logo design products and so on have been cor rectly applied and are displayed as planned It is also important to check whether e mails such as registration confirmations or order confirmations are being sent Sign in as a customer to provide a valid e mail address for messages to be sent to Page 16 User guide for Web site administrators Quickstart Note If e mails are not being sent properly although you entered all the addresses correctly have your provider check the system settings If the tests run to your satisfaction delete all the test data products customers etc and make the Inter net address of your Web site available to your client le We wish you the best of success User guide for Web site administrators Page 17 General page layout Basic principles 3 Basic principles This chapter explains the basic structures functions and procedures that are used throughout the entire application This knowledge will be required to use the application effectively The context sensitive help for the individual functions will refer back to these basic principles where nec essary Read the next chapters in sequence in order to obtain an overview or review them individually to refresh your memory In the online help section you can use the table of contents to browse thr
270. nistration area and on the Web site In this way a descriptive name can be displayed in any language on the Web pages Active area with a structure of links for selecting specific functions Navigation bar that shows how you arrived at your current location in the program The individual hierarchy levels are shown as links so that you can go backwards one step at a time A field in a form which requires you to make a decision Option buttons allow you to select just one option from several possible Options User guide for Web site administrators PangV Path File path Pixel Provider Reference unit Session cookies Shop Shop types Sign in signing in Sub menu Text field Tool tip Upload URL Glossary German Price Indication Ordinance This sets forth which regulations a merchant must observe when setting prices in Germany For a version of these regulations in German see http bundesrecht juris de bundesrecht PangV Information about the location of a file on a storage medium for example C windows system32 notepad exe A pixel is the smallest graphical unit that a computer can display Providers provide hardware and software solutions Usually consulting services are also offered The base unit of quantity used for comparing products by reverse calculating the price of the products For more information see Reference unit on page 108 A session cookie is a piece of text that is wr
271. nt Settings Field Name Description Field type Example Go to the Clickand Link to the ClickandBuy administration tink Buy administration Merchant ID Parameter for identification during data Entry field alpha 12345678 transfer These parameters are found in the customer data in the ClickandBuy administration Transaction Link Parameter for identification during data Entry field alpha http premium transfer 123abc456 eu clicka This parameter can be found in the ndbuy com ClickandBuy administration It is the default link from the link list of the created domain For more details see the chapter on setting up ClickandBuy links in the ClickandBuy providers manual Transaction manager Parameter for identification during data Entry field alpha password transfer This parameter can be found in the ClickandBuy administration Domain name of your shop that you Read only field will enter into the domain management of the ClickandBuy administration Contact your contact person at ClickandBuy for more information Link Link to the domain named in the Read only field ClickandBuy administration that is entered into the domain management Contact your contact person at ClickandBuy for more information The ClickandBuy system sends mes Read only field sages to your shop Enter the URL from this field into your ClickandBuy administration to set the target of these messages Contact your contact person at Click
272. nt options for your shop by credit card and within Germany by direct debit WorldPay checks the customer s payment data and only permits transac tions with secure data Note Since the recording and processing of an end customer s payment data is performed by World Pay you as the merchant are not involved in the handling of this sensitive data and therefore cannot be held liable First register as a merchant This qualifies you for an installation ID and access to the WorldPay admini stration area After this you can configure your shop for the WorldPay payment method For more details see Payment method with WorldPay on page 72 After you set up and test the payment method you need to have WorldPay activate your shop This will allow you to offer your customers this payment method in your shop and display the WorldPay logo with the accepted credit cards Payment process from the customer s point of view During the order process the customer selects the WorldPay payment method As part of the process he is then transferred to the WorldPay Web site Data entry and the transaction are carried out on the WorldPay system After completion the customer is returned to the shop where he is shown the order confirmation This contains the payment method and transaction number assigned by WorldPay WorldPay transactions Page Orders Transactions WorldPay The table lists all the transactions which have been conducted using WorldP
273. ntent area is active The drop down menu contains a list of various content types that are displayed in the content area This means that you can check very easily whether all content is readable using the current design Sample text is displayed in the content area for each type that you select Depending on the selected content type an additional function group may be displayed in the multifunc tion bar The corresponding configuration options can be edited in this group You can configure and edit the following content types Texts and links Different elements in the content area are separated by dividing lines or separators You can upload a background image for use as a Separator See also Uploading images on page 43 Lists tables and dialogs You can define how tables lists and dialogs are displayed here These elements have header rows cells in which to display data and footer rows which you can design as required Header You can define the background and font for the header here For more on selecting colours see Colour se lector on page 43 f you want to set a special format for the heading click the corresponding button Header image You can upload a background image for the header See also Uploading images on page 43 Colours When displaying data in rows in lists or tables you can alternate the row colour to improve readability of the data You can define two row colours The rows are displayed using these alt
274. ntries by clicking Save 7 The options are displayed for the customer in the form of a drop down menu when reserving the re source To add or remove options click Add or remove values This takes you back to the page with the attrib utes which you can edit accordingly For more on product types and attributes see Product types on page 122 and Product type details Attrib utes on page 123 Resource details Images Page Booking system General resource Images The management of images for resources is identical to management of images for products See Product details Images on page 111 Resource details Categories Page Booking system General resource Categories The assignment of resources to categories is done in the same way as the assignment of products to cate gories See Product details Categories on page 113 Resource details Appointments Page Booking system General resource Appointments Here you will see all the appointments that have been reserved for a resource Overview You can use the calendar to access all the appointments for the resource Use the bar containing the day numbers to choose the corresponding day in the month that is displayed Select the month using the left and right arrows next to the month indicator The individual markers in the days bar have the following meanings Table 108 Key to calendar icons background Day number Current date with b
275. o confirm Caution f you delete a customer her orders will also be deleted The following methods exist to add new customers to the system The customer registers in the shop You can determine the contents of the registration form See Registration on page 58 A registered customer is also referred to as a user Acustomer does not register and orders without signing in He is created as an unregistered customer You can also convert this customer into a registered customer by providing sign in data for her See also Customer details User data on page 133 or Sign in on page 134 Use the New customer command in the customer context menu in the administration area Enter in formation as described in Customer details General belowand following To add a registered cus tomer a user enter the sign in information for the customer See also Customer details User data on page 133 Customer import see mport and export on page 137 Customer details General Here you enter and manage the merchant side customer data of a customer The user does not have access to this information The tab is divided into the following sections User guide for Web site administrators Page 131 Customers Customer details General Address see Address below Customer account see Customer account below Attributes see Attributes on page 133 Address Page Customers customer General Address Here you c
276. o do so he selects the newsletter and clicks Subscribe Due to security reasons the customer receives an e mail message that asks him to confirm that he has subscribed to the newsletter After confirmation he is added to the addressee list with the status Sub scribed This is to prevent unauthorised people from subscribing to the newsletter on behalf of others Unsubscribing from newsletter is done the same way The customer must confirm unsubscribing by e mail for his status for the corresponding newsletter to be set to Unsubscribed Note The subscription and unsubscription of newsletters and the corresponding confirmations are events for which the system sends e mail confirmations To enable this the corresponding e mail events must be activated see F mail settings Events on page 91 f you as the administrator assign customers to newsletters then no event is triggered For unregistered customers you must provide one of the following page elements Link to newsletter subscription The customer is shown a table listing the available newsletter campaigns He selects the newsletter and provides the name and e mail address of the recipient in the corresponding fields The rest of the proc ess is the same as for registered users Newsletter subscription User guide for Web site administrators Page 213 Marketing Coupons The customer provides a name and a e mail address and clicks Subscribe He is shown a table with the a
277. oading times M Marketing Menu bar Moneybookers Payment process Search transactions Transactions Multifunction bar and design N Navigation history Newsletter campaigns Addressees Creating new General Details Importing addressees Texts Newsletters Attachments Creating content General Details Recipients Subscription O Optimisation Options Usage Order tracking Orders Atos Worldline Clickandbuy Credit notes Details 82 201 202 202 178 43 45 46 159 137 128 46 192 223 29 54 205 20 83 203 203 203 176 31 205 211 205 206 213 205 207 211 209 208 211 213 54 34 192 185 200 199 193 186 User guide for Web site administrators Documents Editing details Editing mode Google Checkout HSBC Invoices Moneybookers Packing slip PayPal PayPal Express PayPal Pro Saferpay Search Shopping basket settings Soforttiberwe sung Pay UPS packing slip WorldPay P Page view in browser Pages Home page Link Promotional products Paging Pangora Payment methods Credit card manual Deferred payment Direct debit Direct debit via fax Exemption limits Fixed price Free Payment methods WorldPay PayPal General Payment process Search transactions Transactions Transactions PayPal Express Payment process Search transactions PayPal Pro Payment process Search transactions Portals Preissuchmaschine Price lists Advanced settings Customer groups Customers G
278. oducts are no longer displayed as new products See also Mark as New on page 110 Delete all variations for this All existing variations of this product will be deleted product To create new variation products proceed as described in Creating a variation below Save your entries by clicking Save Note You have the option of selecting a separate type of variation display for each product type see Product type details Layout on page 124 Creating a variation The following methods of creating variations exist use the variation assistant see Product variation assistant below Create the variations manually in the product details on the Variations tab see Manual creation on page 116 You can read about adding attributes to variations in Extending variations later on page 117 Product variation assistant The product variation assistant helps you to create variations for a product quickly and simply For the ba sics about variations refer to Product details Variations on page 113 The assistant can be started in the following ways Use the New Product with variations function from the product context menu see Creating a prod uct with variations on page 105 Open it directly from the Variations tab in the product details There you can click the Start product variation assistant link Perform the following steps in the assistant 1 Attributes and values On this page select the product type
279. oksAndMaps Use HTML ves O No Mame Announcement Books and maps Subject Travel literature in our shop Template Select entry Load template Text EE Edit text Inevery tour You need the right travel literature lt br J We are excited ta soon offer your travel guides and maps lt br f 5 Are you looking tor information for specific destinations Write uslebr i E mail cbr fs Display name four Milestone Team Gender Salutation Title First name Surname Street house no Town Postcode Coupon code aon ca E Si viiiiibbiee Tom tray Th Insert coupon template Sender name Shop Team sender e mail shopiprovider com Test e mail Mot specified for this campaign Coupon campaign F3 Send test e mail Select entry E Hew products 2 Related topics Coupon campaigns Create campaigns in order to insert coupon codes in newsletters Save Send row 0 Figure 30 selecting a coupon campaign for the newsletter After selecting the coupon campaign and clicking Save certain functions are available for your newsletter Anew placeholder for a coupon code Place the Coupon code placeholder in the newsletter text When sending the newsletter a separate coupon code is generated and entered for each customer The link Insert coupon template Page 218 User guide for Web site administrators Product Portals Marketing This allows you to add not only the code but also additional information about the
280. omers test the process to make sure it func tions correctly You can do this by selecting the corresponding mode in the Operational mode field Table 39 options for the operational mode Description The transaction data is not validated in WorldPay but is otherwise processed nor mally You can use this procedure to conduct positive test runs The responses from WorldPay are marked accordingly Test mode Error Use this option to simulate transactions that are returned by WorldPay as invalid This allows you to perform negative test runs User guide for Web site administrators Page 73 Settings Delivery and payment Option Description Live This is the setting for real transactions that customers perform with WorldPay us ing your shop Note As soon as you have sufficiently tested the payment method and have released it for your cus tomers set the operational mode to Live This will allow the invoiced amount to be deducted from your customer s account 4 Activate your account In order to activate the WorldPay payment method and use the WorldPay logo on your shop page you need to have your shop accepted and your account activated by WorldPay To accomplish this click the Activate your WorldPay account link and complete the form that is displayed 5 Select credit cards Once you have completed activation with WorldPay you are allowed to display the WorldPay logo in your shop In addition you can also display the log
281. on invoice data etc There can be registered and unregistered customers Unregistered customers must provide their customer data for each order Registered customers have undergone the registration process and have entered all the re quired customer data during that stage In addition they are allocated user names and passwords thus providing them with user accounts in addition to their customer accounts As users registered customers can be given permissions for certain commands See also Users on page 56 The table lists the customers of your shop The symbols have the following meanings Table 80 customer symbols Description A Customer is active and can sign in A Customer is inactive and cannot sign in fihe customer is a registered customer To open the detail view for a customer click the customer number Clicking the icon to the left next to the customer number opens a new browser window containing the customer details Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 The following specialised actions can be performed Table 81 specialised batch processing actions for customer administration Comment Assign to customer group Simple assignment of multiple customers to a customer group Select the customers you wish to assign and start the command In the sec ond step select the target customer groups and click Assign t
282. on the number of products in the shopping basket To do so enter the limit with the multiplier and the base price Save your entries by clicking Save Payment methods Page Settings Delivery and payment Payment methods The system provides the following calculation models as the basis of the payment methods Free Basis for payment methods where no further costs are incurred No other costs are charged to the customer when this method is used For more details see General properties for payment methods on page 69 Fixed price Basis for payment methods at a fixed price For payment methods at a constant price For more details see General properties for payment methods on page 69 and Fixed price payment method on page 70 Exemption limit Basis for payment methods with an exemption limit Apportion delivery costs to your customers dependent on the order value For more details see General properties for payment methods on page 69 and Payment method with exemption limits on page 71 Page 66 User guide for Web site administrators Delivery and payment Direct debit Direct debit via fax Credit card WorldPay T Pay PayPal PayPal Pro PayPal Express Google Checkout ClickandBuy Settings As with Free the customer incurs no additional costs at this point This model issues a request for the customer s bank details during the ordering process in the shop For more details see General properties for paym
283. oogle Checkout merchant admini Ac stration in Settings gt Integration tion BlockMonitor amp This URL is used to send status ViewAc changes and other notices to the shop tion GoogleCheckou tNotification Merchant ID Parameter for identification during data Entry field alpha 123456789098765 transfer Merchant key These parameters are provided by HxEsfgsdlfghVDLLUI Google Checkout Use the values from WEZ6 the place where the API callback URL is entered Operational mode In order to use test mode you needa Drop down menu merchant account and buyer account on the Google Sandbox The sandbox is atest system To create a new mer chant test account use the link Create a Google Checkout test account on the sandbox system User guide for Web site administrators Page 77 Settings Delivery and payment Field Name Description Field type Example Currency of your Google Checkout ac Drop down menu count Customers to your shop who use this currency can pay using Google Check out If the customer orders in a differ ent currency the GoogleCheckout func tion is not displayed Forward telephone _ This option allows you to decide Option button number whether the customer s telephone number should be forwarded along with the transaction data from Google to the shop system Size Size of the Google Checkout button Drop down menu displayed in the shopping basket Background colour Background forthe Google Checkout Drop do
284. operties for payment methods on page 69 and Atos Worldline payment method on page 80 and Atos Worldline on page 200 Basis for payment methods using Soforttiiberwe sung This allows the customer to use the Payment Network AG s payment sys tem For more details see General properties for payment methods on page 69 and Soforttiberweisung payment method on page 80 and Soforttiberweisung on page 201 Basis for payment methods via HSBC When using this payment method the customer will be forwarded to the secure HSBC system This is where the data is collected and the transaction takes place For more details see General properties for payment methods on page 69 and Payment method with HSBC on page 82and HSBC on page 201 Basis for payment methods using Moneybookers When using this payment method the customer will be forwarded to the secure Moneybookers system This is where the transactions take place For more details see General properties for payment methods on page 69 and Moneybookers payment method on page 83 and Moneybookers on page 202 Basis for payment methods using Saferpay When using this payment method the customer is forwarded to the secure Saferpay system This is where the transactions take place For more de tails see General properties for payment methods on page 69 and Saferpay payment method on page 84 and Saferpay on page 203 The table lists all of your payment methods The symbols have the follo
285. ord Entry field alpha j admin provider co for signing into the administration numeric area a new password will be sent to the address entered here Old Password Enter the currently valid password Entry field alpha i here numeric this is not displayed for security rea sons New Password This is not displayed for security rea Entry field alpha sons numeric The password must contain at least 5 characters Password Confirma This is not displayed for security rea Entry field alpha jadmin tion sons numeric isplay language for the administration Drop down menu C To change the password you must enter the current password in the field O d password f you do not enter the current password the password change will not be accepted Save your entries by clicking Save Note When a new user is created the password is not generated automatically You must enter a password so that the user can sign in to the Web site In this case you have not entered an Old pass word User details Posts Page Settings User management Users Posts This displays a list of all the posts or messages that the user has written in all forums blogs and guest books on your Web site You can use the links in the first column to call up the corresponding topics or pages You can sort the table by column For more details see Sorting using column headings on page 28 Batch processing commands are available to manage the t
286. order User guide for Web site administrators Page 167 Booking system Resources Description Day number Day has at least one appointment displayed in bold No appointments can be made for this day grey If you move the mouse over the days bar an overview of the appointments is displayed for the correspond ing day in a small window If you click a specific date the table containing the appointments for this day is displayed and you can edit the appointments for this day The number of columns that are displayed is governed by what was entered for this resource in the stock level The individual icons in the appointments list have the following meanings Table 109 Key to appointments list Icon Description e Released reservation period can be blocked for reservations e 0U Blocked reservation period can be released for reservations Delete Delete selected appointment This option appears when you move the mouse over an appointment To configure a new appointment the following options are available Click atime period in the day list and enter the details see Appointment details on page 170 Click the New appointment link and enter the details see Appointment details on page 170 Creating an appointment using the Web site To call up the details of an appointment click the corresponding name in the appointments list Set allowed booking times Here you can enter the periods during which the current
287. ors Newsletter campaigns Marketing 12 Marketing Here you can find the functions for all sales promoting activities Use this to manage your customer rela tionships and increase the market availability of your products Newsletter campaigns Page Marketing Newsletter General Use newsletters to send out the latest information about your shop such as promotional offers or dis counts for your customers Newsletters are sent as e mail messages Before creating a newsletter you must first create a newsletter campaign A newsletter campaign can be regarded as a container for newsletters and related data Campaigns can be used to group newsletters Visitors always subscribe to campaigns on the Web site not to individual newsletters This way they al ways receive all new newsletters of one campaign The table lists all the newsletter campaigns you have created The symbols have the following meanings Table 130 table symbols for newsletter campaigns Icon Description Blue icon Campaign is active and therefore visible on the Web site vistors can sign up for it ti Grey icon The campaign is not active and therefore not visible on the Web site visitors cannot sign up for it The newsletters can still be sent to addressees that you have assigned in the administration page Click the ID to open the details of a campaign Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this
288. ort to product portals Command Comment If you remove products from the export list the products themselves are not deleted Remove all assignments All the products are removed from the export list To add new entries follow the steps described in Adding records on page 26 Caution The products can only be exported to a portal if the prices are only specified for the tax model that is used by the portal For example if the portal expects prices that include tax you must have specified only the gross tax included prices for the products and no others To export products go to the General tab of the relevant platform and click Export When products are included in the export file the system checks whether all the requirements on format and content have been met If a product does not fulfil one of the criteria an error is displayed after the process is complete There are two classes of errors simple errors where the data can be automatically corrected in such a way that the product can be exported and Serious errors where the product cannot be exported If errors occur you will be notified of this and offered additional details To do this click the Details link You will receive notification of every error and can then directly open the relevant product using the link and edit and correct the information etracker reporting Page Marketing Product portals portal etracker reporting Etracker allows you
289. os of the credit cards for which you have a contract with WorldPay Save your entries by clicking Save T Pay payment method The basics on working with T Pay can be found in 7 Pay on page 194 The sequence of the individual points and their entry fields and settings corresponds to the general proce dure for configuring the T Pay payment method 1 Register with T Pay Click this link to open the T Pay registration page 2 Set up your T Pay account During the process of registering with T Com you will be allocated a MerchantID a ShopID and a Mer chantSecrets code Enter these values in the fields of the same name in section 2 You can Set the operational mode using the Operational mode drop down menu Table 40 Options for the operational mode Description In these modes no transactions are billed except for Micromoney live _ Transactions are marked real and are charged to the customer If all tests are successful contact T Pay support and request that your shop is activated Once you have done this switch the operational mode to L ve and set the payment method to visible for your customers Page 74 User guide for Web site administrators Delivery and payment Settings Caution Do not switch the 7 Pay payment method to L ve before receiving confirmation from T Pay sup port Doing this will result in errors in the transaction process for you and your customers 3 Selection of payment variants
290. otocol FTP is a method of transmitting data over networks This is used to transfer files between different computers regardless of the operating system and location Hyper Text Markup Language source code for Web pages that determines how the content is displayed Individual HTML formatting instructions are called HTML tags This is a unique identifier that is used to locate a data element product customer attribute etc The ID is used in the database and is not the same as the name displayed on the Web site Furthermore IDs serve to uniquely classify data when exporting and import ing and to manage objects in multiple languages A link to another Internet page or to a document Preparation of the data and content of a Web page so it can be displayed in another language Some attributes can be localised This means that you can enter different values for these attributes in different languages They are then displayed in the respective language for example descriptions or names The merchant is an administrator who sells products online The Web site and Administration provide the additional functions required for this task Area of the Web page that contains various functions for editing content Similar functions are classified into function groups For more information see Multifunction bar and content on page 141 and Multifunction bar and design on page 176 Name of a language dependent object or method in the admi
291. ou define settings that affect the presentation of the item on eBay These are the same set tings you edit when you place an item on eBay directly Consult eBay for more information about the usage function and any costs of the individual parameters In the drop down menus for image types all images are listed that you have available for the product See also Product details Images on page 111 The address of the image is automatically entered in the re spective entry field If you would like to link to an image which is not listed in the drop down menu enter the address of the image in the entry field You can test whether the image is available at any time by clicking Preview Save your entries by clicking Next gt gt or lt lt Previous Delivery This is where you define the delivery methods you wish to offer to your eBay customers Each eBay country platform offers certain delivery methods which are listed in a drop down menu There is a list for domestic delivery and a separate table for international delivery A maximum of three de livery methods can be selected for domestic delivery Select each method you wish to offer individually and allocate a price to it Save your entries by clicking Save A universal method is available which refers to the description of the item Use this if none of the methods offered applies to you Note that you must also enter a price here If you do not select a delivery method eBay will
292. ough each chapter and call up the individual help topics General page layout All Administration pages are based on the basic functional structure as shown in Figure 7 a ministration home pag 1 A Milestones T Page cache Up to date Start Administrator ad Sign out Orders Customers Products Content Appointment management Design Marketing Settings Help l 5 Welcome to the administration 3 2 I P The latest product news market trends and tips for your success in e commerce subscribe to the ePages customer newsletter now General page layout Navigation in the administration Orders Customers main navigation bar Manage customer orders Create documents such as invoices and packing slips Products Prepare your products for presentation with texts and images Organise your inventory gt Product types Price lists gt Search statistics Product rating Appointment management The customer database contains all addresses and access data Search by criteria such as customer groups or purchase volumes Content Organize your products into categories Supplement your site with your own content such as news and upcoming events gt Promotional products Contact information Terms and Conditions Design working area Right sidebar Use setup assistant Use help First steps Work with tray Work with history Work with favourites General basis Offer the option of bookin
293. ount of time Entry field numeric 2 day s cancellation of an between cancellation and the start of appointment the appointment i e the latest time at which the customer can still cancel The time units are defined in a drop down menu Page 164 User guide for Web site administrators Resources Field name Description Intervals for appoint ments overview which the next appointment can be made Varying intervals can be entered into the appointment details Variant text for the command Appoint ments up Name of the link via which the ap Variant text for com mand Finalise ap pointment Name of the link via which the ap Notification of re quirement for ap pointment confirma tion Notes and information for your cus tomer in respect of the reserving of appointments via the Web site For more on formatting see Working with text fields on page 35 Note text about the resource price gross This texts is shown when using gross prices together with the price This is similar to the texts for products See Texts on page 97 For more on formatting see Working with text fields on page 35 Note text about the This texts is shown when using net prices together with the price This is similar to the texts for products See Texts on page 97 For more on formatting see Working with text fields on page 35 resource price net Save your entries by clicking Save Resources P
294. ours and page elements gt Quick design Customise design Settings Configure the system and the order process to fit your shop Tax calculation Country settings Delivery and payment E mail settings Setup assistant Get help setting up your Web site In just a few steps your Web site will be designed and ready to qo e Start Administrator General page layout Navigation in the administration main navigation bar working area Right sidebar Use setup assistant Use help First steps Work with tray Work with history Work with favourites General basis Search for gt Display contents Download guide Help ad Sign out In the Help centre you can find out how to open the context sensitive Help and which additional Help func tions are available Context sensitive Help The sidebar displays a list of relevant Help topics for each page This list is split into two groups The first group lists topics that describe the functionality of the page being displayed directly The second group lists more general Help topics that explain how the current functions interact with other functions or set tings The Help content is displayed in a new window Alongside the content you will also find the following func tions Page 24 ae ees Go back one page Go forward one page Display the table of contents for the entire Help section Save a bookmark for this page Prin
295. out Only the ID is different since each ID may only be used once within a cate gory Use this function to move categories or other elements to a different place in your tree structure When you move categories all associated and subordi nate elements such as subcategories and products are moved as well These assignments remain in place To create a new page follow the steps described in Adding records on page 26 Select the desired page type Save your entries by clicking Save Note If you open the Web page view when in a page you will see the page even if it has been set to Not visible f you switch to the next higher page level this page will no longer be displayed as a sub page as long as the status is set to Not vis b e Take account of the page cache settings see Page cache optimisation on page 54 Products Page Content Pages Datasheet view Pages page Products The table lists all the products which are assigned to the current page The function and meaning of the icons is the same as in able 65 To open the detail view of a product click the product number or the icon The following methods exist to assign products to the current category Adding new entries as described in Adding records on page 26 Save your entries by clicking Save Create a new product directly via the Product s sub menu Click the New link and proceed as described in Creating a new product on page 104 The p
296. owand Delivery method Weight of the products in the shopping basket on page 65 Number of products in the Basis for delivery methods where the price depends upon the number of shopping basket products ordered Delivery costs are based upon the number of products in the basket see General properties for delivery methods belowand Delivery method Num ber of products in the shopping basket on page 66 The table lists all the delivery methods The symbols have the following meanings Table 22 status of the delivery methods Icon Description Delivery method visible Delivery method not visible it Some parameters have not been set correctly The link forwards you to the settings of the relevant method Caution A delivery method cannot be made visible until all necessary parameters have been set cor rectly To open the details of a payment method click the name You can set the sequence using the sorting key in the last column of the table For more details see Sorting using key on page 28 Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 To create a new delivery method follow the steps described in Adding records on page 26 Save your entries by clicking Save General properties for delivery methods Page Settings Delivery and payment Delivery methods delivery method General The properties and parameters for th
297. own menu Normal Calculation of the Selection of the weight unit used to Drop down menu weight of the prod _ calculate the total weight of the order ucts is performed in Multiplier Variable part used to calculate the Entry field numeric 0 1 delivery price The order weight is multiplied by this value See the formula below the table on the Web page User guide for Web site administrators Page 65 Settings Delivery and payment Field name Description Field type Example Base price Fixed part used to calculate the deliv Currency field 5 00 ery price See the formula below the table on the Web page You can scale delivery prices depending upon the weight of the order To do so enter the limit with the multiplier and the base price Save your entries by clicking Save Delivery method Number of products in the shopping basket The various fields have the following meanings Table 29 Specialised fields for the shipping method Number of products in the shopping basket Field name Description Field type Example Taxclass Dropdownmenu Normal Multiplier Variable part used to calculate the Entry field numeric 0 1 delivery price The number of products in the basket is multiplied by this value See the formula below the table on the Web page Fixed part used to calculate the deliv Currency field ery price See the formula below the table on the Web page You can scale delivery prices dependent up
298. p down menu Display per Pageyou can set how many rows are displayed on each page in the table Specific search details will be discussed in the relevant chapters Language Dependencies The application supports various languages both in the Web site and also on the administration page The administration language is set in the administrator settings see Administrator information on page 51 You can set up language selection for your visitors on the Web page so that every visitor can select his pre ferred language Activate these languages in the Country settings see Country settings on page 87 User guide for Web site administrators Page 29 Basic principles Language Dependencies Note that you have to enter and maintain your specific content for the various languages yourself This is information such as product descriptions or names language specific images files and other attach ments At all places where language dependent content must be maintained the corresponding entry fields for different languages are displayed see F gure for an example Products Camping AZ Twister 2 0 cg_0100504001 General Images Categories Variations Prices Cross selling Portals t Prices S Inventory Delivery Description Attributes English Translation Mame Camping 42 Twister 270 Campingaz Twister 270 Description i Edit text Edit text Long description i E Edit text E Edit text 4 great gas cooker with bayone
299. payment Delivery methods The system provides the following calculation models as the basis for the delivery methods Free delivery Basis for delivery methods where no further costs are incurred Use this to offer the customer free delivery for example see General prop erties for delivery methods on page 63 Fixed price Basis for delivery methods at a fixed price Use this to configure delivery methods for a fixed price see General proper ties for delivery methods on page 63 and Fixed price delivery methods on page 64 Exemption limit Basis for delivery methods with price limits Using this you can offer your customers Free delivery for goods above a certain total value see General properties for delivery methods on page 63 and Delivery methods with an exemption limit on page 64 Shopping basket total Basis for delivery methods where the price depends upon the order value In addition to product prices coupons and discounts can be taken into account when calculating the order value see General properties for deliv ery methods on page 63 and Delivery method Shopping basket total on page 65 Page 62 User guide for Web site administrators Delivery and payment Settings Weight of the products in Basis for delivery methods where the price depends upon the weight of the the shopping basket order Delivery costs are dependent upon the weight of the products in the shop ping basket see General properties for delivery methods bel
300. platform eBay offers this information on the eBay site Register with eBay as a Seller You will need valid seller registration data to send items to eBay from the shop offer them there and receive ordering information All relevant information to sellers can be found on the eBay page under Sell Configuration of notification e mail After buying an item the customer must finalise the order process in your shop He will be informed about this via e mail when he buys the item This e mail also contains a link which will forward the customer to the shop The item the customer bought is in the shopping basket The customer finalises the order proc ess here as a normal shop customer This e mail is an automatic system e mail with pre configured standard content You may however add your own hints information or advertisements Open the e mail referring to eBay under Settings E mail set tings gt Events For more information see ma settings on page 90 Note The customer can add additional products to the shopping basket You can offer him the option of adding the eBay productto the shopping basket again To do this you must go to the Shopping bas ket and orders settings and for the action Adding a duplicate product activate the option Creates a new line item in the basket See also Shopping basket settings on page 93 Page 98 User guide for Web site administrators eBay settings Settings General settings Page Settings
301. pply you with a table with the most widely used tax classes in the main tax areas This is called the tax matrix The default tax class and the default tax area are marked with a in the table The default setting of the tax matrix is read only Itis managed by your provider If necessary you can also edit the entries yourself To do this click Customise A security check will request confirmation of this Page 60 User guide for Web site administrators Tax calculation Settings command After confirming this you can edit the values in the matrix The same applies for tax areas and tax classes Caution After doing this you can no longer return to the default tax matrix Once you have made the decision to customise the tax matrix for your shop you will need to manage the tax settings yourself Save your entries by clicking Save Tax areas Page Orders Tax calculation Tax areas Note You cannot modify the tax areas until you click Customise on the tax matrix page See Jax matrix on page 60 The table lists all the tax areas which have been created for your shop To set a tax area to default click the option button in the corresponding row When a new customer registers this preset tax area will al ways be suggested as the default To create a new tax area follow the steps described in Adding records on page 26 Save your entries by clicking Save To delete a tax area proceed as described in Deleting
302. product Number of cross selling products to be Entry field numeric 5 recommendations displayed The values range from 1 to 20 Minimum match How often a product needs to be sold Entry field numeric 3 along with another in order to be dis played as a cross selling product The value ranges from 1 to 100 Save your entries by clicking Save Note This function can slow down the display of products because multiple products have to be read from the database and statistical information is managed and evaluated Immediate and constant sta tistical evaluation is also not available for the same reason The statistics are calculated at times when few users are signed in to the system usually at night Texts Page Settings Product Settings Texts Depending on the tax model the prices in your shop will be displayed with or without VAT included A text indicating the current tax model is displayed for the prices Select the section that matches your tax model for displaying prices on the Web site User guide for Web site administrators Page 97 Settings eBay settings The texts should also be used to inform your customers of any VAT that is or is not included and any addi tional delivery costs For example in Germany the text Price inc VAT ex deliveryis common You can configure the text as you wish including for singular and plural prices The text fields are lan guage dependent and the texts can be formatted For more
303. py Export all products The current product list is ignored All Option button products are exported New products are automatically con sidered during the next export Export variation If variation products exist this setting Option button products individually determines whether the variation products themselves are exported or only the master product The option becomes active when x port all products is set to active Delivery method The costs of the method you select Drop down menu here are displayed together with the product on the portal All the attachments for the product are Drop down menu listed in this drop down menu An image file is expected for the ex port If you have allowed other file types for the product type such as PDF files then you may only select one image file from the drop down menu Description Dropdownmenu The export and uploading if required Drop down menu are repeated automatically at set inter vals This updates modified product information on the platform This is also necessary for the portals which remove products from the cata logue after a certain time for example Google Base after 30 days This allows you to keep your products up to date in the portal catalogue Display export file Link to the export file This becomes Link visible after export Save your entries by clicking Save Ifthe Export all products option is set to Yes the Products t
304. pying procedure from a local computer to a foreign com puter is called uploading An abbreviation for Uniform Resource Locator the unique Internet address of a Web page The URL is used to open the page in a browser User guide for Web site administrators Page 239 Glossary Variable Visibility Web site Working area Page 240 Variables are placeholders for concrete values which are first entered by the user or program when the Web site is online The status of data this determines whether these data can be seen by the customer in the Web site or not An Internet application that contains all the functions required to offer products or services or content This application generates the Web site on the basis of a predefined type configured by the provider The Administra tion area allows the layout and design of the site to be customised and the content to be managed The portion of the administration page in which data and tables are dis played and managed The content depends on the function selected in the menu User guide for Web site administrators 14 Index A Accessories Address Administration navigation Administrator information Alternative items Atos Worldline Payment process Search transactions Transactions Attribute types Customer options Date Date and time Decimal number File Integer Language dependent file Language dependent options Language dependent text 120 55 19 51 120 80
305. r Web site administrators Page 209 Marketing Newsletter campaigns Newsletter campaigns New ldeas at our Shop Announcement Books and maps General Attachments Recipient Pi Hote You have connected this newsletter to a coupon campaign Enter the coupon code in the text ou can do so in the following ways Use the Coupon code placeholder Click ngert coupon template Mote when sending the newsletter t A code is created for every recipient inthe coupon campaign You do not need to create any coupon codes manually t A placeholder is shown instead of the code in the test e mail ID Books AndMaps Use HTML Yes Mo Announcement Books and maps Subject Travel literature in our shop EE Edit text E mail Display name Gender Salutation Title First name Surname Street house na Town Postcode Are you looking tor information for specitic destinations Write usl lt br t lt br f Your Milestone Team Logo Coupon code ik Add products and categories from tray eT Insert coupon template Sender name Shop Team Sender e mail zhopiprovider com Test e mail Mot specitied for this campaign Coupon campaign Top100 at Sa Pa mL i ar Send test e mail Related topics Coupon campaigns Create campaigns in order to insert coupon codes in newsletters Save send mos 0 Figure 29 creating the newsletter content The basic structure and design is selected using a template T
306. r current Web site style with just a few mouse clicks As in the design function the page is split in two with the multifunction bar above and the page preview below For more information see Design basics on page 171 The following special function groups appear in the multifunction bar for the Quick Design function Preview The content area displays various text tables product lists or product details etc according to the current function You can select and display these types of content using the Preview drop down menu This means that you can check very easily whether all content is readable using the colour selection Using the Editing help you can hide all the design elements from the page preview Images This option allows you to upload logos and images for the Headerarea of your Web site See also Uploading images on page 43 and File management on page 44 For more on editing the logo see Status on page 53 For more on the header and other areas of the Web site see Design basics on page 171 Settings You can Set a basic colour for the entire design using the Co ouroption Your selected template is dis played using the specified basic colour with the areas using matching colours This colour is displayed in the box If you select a colour this is used as the new basic colour for the design and the matching colours are recalculated The areas of the site are then displayed using the newly calculated colours If
307. r is displayed in the large box on the right The colour that is displayed in this box can be applied The parameters for the current colour are automatically entered in the entry field To apply the current colour click Apply Colour schemes matching colours The Colour schemes tab displays a number of colour schemes These are complementary colours that are a best match for the current colour according to colour theory The schemes are calculated on the basis of the basic principles of design technology You can select a type The corresponding colours in this scheme are always displayed to the right of the box with the current colour If you want to set one of the other col ours in the scheme as the current colour click the corresponding box The scheme that you selected most recently is always active User defined colours You can save the colours that you want to reuse in the fields for user defined colours To save a colour drag the current colour from the box and drop it into one of the user defined colour fields Some of the user defined colours will initially be preset according to your selected design template To set a user defined colour as the current colour simply click the corresponding colour box This causes the colour to be displayed in the box for the current colour where it can be applied File management You can use the file management function to upload and manage various types of file The WYSIWYG editor allows you to
308. r search engines Save your entries by clicking Apply You can also select a specific layout for each image To do this click the Advanced tab Here you can posi tion the image in relation to the text set the distance to the text and activate a border for the image Changes are displayed in the preview Insert link Remove link Insert links by clicking the icon Select the text the link should be added to and then click on the icon This opens a window where you can enter the desired URL see Figure 15 Edit link x7 Link EE C Open link in a new window yi Startseite Contact information Terms and Conditions Important customer information E Privacy Policy Fresh wind inthe online shop al Promotional products H i Jackets gg Shoes Backpacks 9 Tents Figure 15 general parameters for links If you have not highlighted any text you can enter the corresponding text in the L nk textfield Enter an Internet address in the Link URL field Always use the following format Attp You can also link to specific pages of your Web site as created in the administration area These pages can be seen in a tree structure in the bottom part of the window Select the desired page The name and ad dress of this page are transferred to the entry fields The list also contains any anchors you have added to the text in the lower section See also nsert anchor on page
309. r shop administration To use this payment sys tem your customers must register and you must register as a merchant with T Pay All information about T Pay can be found at www T Pay de The following payment variations are configured for the shop system MicroMoney Telephone bill from Deutsche Telekom Direct debit Credit cardand Anonymous payment with credit card For more information about merchant registration and setting the necessary parameters in the shop ad ministration as well as testing see 7 Pay payment method on page 74 Payment process from the customer s point of view During the order process the customer selects the 7 Paypayment method He is then transferred to the T Pay Web site The payment variations you have activated are displayed there from which the customer can select one Then he must enter his identification After he has successfully signed in he enters the infor mation required by the payment method he selected Finally he checks the information in an overview and confirms the transaction Afterwards he is brought back to the shop and receives the order confirmation This contains the payment variant and the transaction number assigned by T Pay T Pay transactions Page Orders Transactions T Pay The table lists all the transactions customers have performed using T Pay The Status column informs you about the current status of the transaction Table 125 status of T Pay transactions Status
310. ransaction numbers The advanced search provides search for delivery and payment status and Buyer ID Otherwise searching for Google Checkout transactions is identical to the general search for all orders For basic information on using the search function see Search on page 28 ClickandBuy ClickandBuy is an Internet payment system that enables secure payment processing Customers can either register or create a prepaid account ClickandBuy checks the customer entries for completeness and accu racy After registration and verification the account is activated During the order process the customer is forwarded to the payment page of ClickandBuy There he selects his payment method finishes payment and is returned to the shop More detailed information about this topic is available at Atto www clickandbuy com The prerequisite for you is that you register with and create a merchant account at ClickandBuy Clickand Buy is only enabled as a transaction system for premium accounts You can register with ClickandBuy in the shop administration Read about the settings and necessary parameters in ClickandBuy payment method on page 78 Payment process from the customer s point of view The customer selects the ClickandBuy payment method in the shopping basket For the payment step in the order process he is transferred to the ClickandBuy page The ClickandBuy settings for the specific country set in the customer settings will be used
311. ration This requires you to register with Sofortueber we sung de Do this using the link Register with Sofortuberweisung in the shop Administration area Below is a description of the settings of the shop related parameters in your So forttiberwe sung admini Stration Sign in to your Sofortuberweisung administration Under Project create a New project If necessary select the ePages entry for Shop system Enter the required data in General settings Please enter your bank details including the IBAN and BIC Under Interface Success link you need to enter the success link from the shop administration pay ment method Sofortiiberweisung Settings Nm BW NHN BP User guide for Web site administrators Page 81 Settings Delivery and payment 7 Under Interface Failure link you need to enter the failure link from the shop administration payment method Sofortiiberweisung Settings 8 Enter your e mail address under Notifications E mail address If you have enabled this option se lected the check box then you will be informed of the exact transfer data when the transfer has com pleted successfully 9 Under Notifications HTTP S URL you need to enter the HTTP notification URL from the shop admini stration payment method Sofortiiberweisung Settings 10 Save your entries by clicking Save In case of queries regarding the creation and processing of a project please contact your account manager at sofortube
312. rectly For more information see eBay on page 122 Item settings eBay assistant Page Marketing eBay Items item The eBay assistant helps you create edit verify and upload eBay items Apart from the product information which is imported from the shop all other parameters are eBay specific You use these as if you were entering an item on eBay directly If you are unsure about the mean ing of these parameters or how to use them they are explained in depth on eBay The assistant contains multiple steps that can be performed sequentially as well as in any order Caution To save the information you have entered or modified on individual pages you must change page by clicking the Next gt gt or lt lt Previous buttons The information is only saved if you do this If you change pages using the links in the tab headings the information is not saved The same applies if you leave the assistant without confirming your changes via Next gt gt or lt lt Previous To start the assistant click the name of an item in the eBay items table Title The various fields have the following meanings Table 152 Fields in the t e page Field name Description Field type Example Product tink Possibilities are provided by eBay eBay account You decide which eBay page the offer Drop down menu is placed on For more information see eBay ac counts on page 99 Name Entry field alpha Deuter Hydro 2 numeric Subti
313. rectpay24 com The prerequisite is registration with So forttiberwe sung This registration can be performed from your shop administration You must also create a project for the shop in the So forttiberwe sung administration Read about the settings and necessary parameters in Soforttiberwe sung payment method on page 80 Payment process from the customer s point of view To use this payment method the customer must have an online banking account In order to make the payment he must have all the information required for the online transfers such as bank account details PIN and TAN The customer selects Soforttiberwe sung as the payment method in the shopping basket He is then trans ferred to the So forttiberwe sung Web site Here he fills out a transfer form The transaction is performed af ter the PIN and TAN have been entered When this has been completed the customer receives a transac tion confirmation If desired he can return to the shop To do so he clicks the respective button The order confirmation is shown in the shop This contains the payment method and transaction number assigned by So orsttiber we sung Sofortiberweisung transactions Page Orders Transactions Soforttiberweisung After the customer has confirmed the transaction it is entered into the list of Soforttiberwe sung transac tions in the shop administration Since the transaction has been performed the Paid status is set for the order The tab
314. registered visitors of the configu ration and explain the steps required to register This field is only active if the Require sign in option has been set to Yes Once you start to use customer information for purposes not simply restricted to the ordering process you must inform your customers of the reasons of your using their data and the customers must agree to this usage You can enable the Activate privacy policy option to require customers to agree to you saving their personal information This step ensures that your customers have agreed to this usage before they register The customers are asked to agree to the privacy policy on registration or for unregistered customers when they enter their address For more on the privacy policy see Privacy policy on page 153 Save your entries by clicking Save Administrators Page Settings User management Administrators The table shows all the administrators who have been created for your Web site The symbols have the fol lowing meanings Table 19 Status icons for administrators Description amp The administrator is active He is authorised to sign into the administration area The administrator is not active He is not authorised to sign into the administration area To open the details of an administrator click the name The user name of the administrator who is cur rently signed in is not active as a link You can edit this information in the administrator menu For
315. resource may be reserved The standard business hours are entered as the default setting see Business hours on page 55 You can override these times here These times then only apply for this resource Save your entries by clicking Save Batch release You can use the batch release function to configure simple releases blocks for specific periods of time Such exceptions could be special opening hours closure for vacation etc During these periods the re source is not available as usual However in order not to have to change the general hours of business for this resource for this limited period you can enter the exception period here The various fields have the following meanings Table 110 Fields for batch release Field name Description Field type Example Start date Date of the first day from which the Date field 12 02 2008 exception should apply Page 168 User guide for Web site administrators Bookings Booking system Field name Description Gere type Example End date Date of the last day to which the excep Option button 12 04 2008 tion should apply date field Repeated occurrence Number of occasions that the modified Option button times may be used entry field numeric This is evaluated in conjunction with the field Repetition Repetition The time interval between repetitions Option button of the exception periods Repeat as many times during the repe tition period as specified in the Re peated occurrence
316. ress entered in the ma field The function can only be used if the cus tomer has registered in the shop Password Manual assignment of a new password fora Entry field al Password customer phanumeric After being saved the password will be sent to the e mail address entered Itis not displayed for security reasons Repeat password Entry field al Password phanumeric ID Confirmation ques A security mechanism that works together Entry field al What is the name with the confirmation answer in case the phanumeric of my grand password has been forgotten mother s cat ID confirmation an The customer s answer to the confirmation Entry field al Nostradamus swer question phanumeric Page 134 User guide for Web site administrators Data synchronisation Customers Field name Description Field type Check box This function is only available if you are managing a non registered customer Send the user the sign in data for his user account via e Save your entries by clicking Save Billing address Page Customers customer User data Invoice address This option shows the invoice address the customer entered in My Accountin the shop Changes you make here can be seen by the customer in My Account f there are differences to the merchant side customer data the Synchronise data function is displayed See Data synchronisation below Default delivery address Page Customers customer
317. ription Field Field type Example Text for Financing This text is displayed on the page using Text field We can offer deferred stage of ordering the table of financing options Provide payment options for your customers with all the information your order Select and notes relating to your deferred payment options Currency for which you set the monthly Drop down menu rate One table per currency Minimum amount Order amount above which you offer Entry field numeric 1000 deferred payment Interest rates forthe Interest rates in percent forthe dura Entry field numeric 5 number of monthly _ tion payments The possible durations are shown in months in the column headings Enter values for the durations you offer Note For interest rates simply enter the annual interest rate the system calculates the monthly amounts Save your entries by clicking Save The customers will be offered a selection of the available financing models in the order process In the or der summary the financing selected is displayed In the Payment Method line in addition to the deferred payment parameters the additional amount that the customer must pay for using this payment method is indicated Page 86 User guide for Web site administrators Country settings Settings The instalments are calculated according to the following formula a r for continual monthiy payments cf Here Z is the duration
318. rmation as described in Product details Images on page 111 and following Creating a product bundle A product bundle is a packet or set made up of products that belong together and that are then offered to gether for a combined price To create a product bundle click the New gt gt Product bundle link in the sub menu This forwards you to the page where you can enter the general product details First enter a unique value in the Product numberfield Having done this enter additional general information see Product details General on page 106 Note the following exceptions You cannot enter any values in the Stock level and Minimum stock level fields These values result from the smallest values of each of the individual products The Reference unitfield and the corresponding Amount in productfield are inactive This is because the packages cannot be compared to other products as they are compiled individually Save your entries by clicking Save After saving additional tabs will be activated You are forwarded directly to the Bundle products tab This tab is displayed for product bundles in place of the Variations tab Enter the associated products here see Bundle products below After this enter the remaining information as described in Product details Im ages on page 111 and following Bundle products For product bundles you must select and compile the products that make up the packet These are the bund
319. roduct is assigned to the category on completion You can set the sequence using the sorting key in the last column of the table For more details see Sorting using key on page 28 Save your entries by clicking Save Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 The following specialised actions can be performed Table 92 Specialised batch processing commands for category products Command Comment Remove assignment S Sort alphabetically a Sort by ascending price Sort by descending price Save your entries by clicking Save Page 146 User guide for Web site administrators Home page Contents Note Sorting via batch processing commands is not dynamic If you change the value of an entry in the current sort field the display is not updated to show the new sort order If you wish to update the sort order to fit the current values you must execute the sort command again If you execute more than one sort process the current sort process bases itself on the previous process If for example you sort the products in alphabetical order and then sort them again according to Mew the new products will be sorted alphabetically as will the others Images Page Content Pages Datasheet view Pages page Images You can manage up to four images for each category The List viewimage is used for category lists A small
320. rtunity to give their opinions on the products and discuss their own experiences Positive feedback is great advertising for the product Ratings are also a means of obtaining feedback on the quality of your products so you can react accordingly Customers are able to award points from 1 to 5 and can also enter some feedback text You must activate the function using the product ratings settings see Settings below For the list of re ceived feedback see General below General Page Products Product ratings General The table lists all the product ratings that have been submitted to your shop with the corresponding prod ucts The most recent rating is at the top The symbols have the following meanings Table 76 Status of product rating Description The product rating is displayed in the shop 7 The product rating is not displayed in the shop Grey icon The icons before the product name correspond to those in the product table see Products on page 103 To delete a rating follow the steps described in Deleting entries on page 26 You can sort the table by column For more details see Sorting using column headings on page 28 Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 To open the details of a rating click the name The details allow you to configure the visibility of every rat ing as well as delete the rating
321. rwe sung de Payment method with HSBC The basics about working with HSBC can be found in HSBC on page 201 The various fields have the following meanings Table 47 parameters for the HSBC payment method Field name Description Field type Example Go to HSBC admini Link stration Client alias Client user name for sign in to the Entry field alpha HSBC administration numeric Shared Secret Security code from registration Entry field alpha numeric Transaction type This setting determines whether debits Drop down menu are made automatically or manually by you in the HSBC administration Operational mode Setting that determines whether trans Drop down menu actions are processed on the test or live system See also Caution below Selection of credit Selection of credit cards whose sym Check box cards bols are displayed in the shop for pay ment using HSBC Save your entries by clicking Save Caution f you have not yet activated your HSBC account set the operational mode to 7estand perform a test transaction using your own HSBC account information This activates your account with HSBC If the transaction was successful set the operational mode to Z veand activate the payment method for your customers An HS8 amp C account only supports one currency If you want to offer the HSBC payment method for multi ple currencies you must create an HSBC payment method with a separate HS8C account for each cur rency and act
322. s The colour selector is used in all instances where colours can be defined for text background colour etc All elements for which a colour can be set are identified by a corresponding icon that shows the current colour Click this icon to open the colour selector in a new window On the left side you can see two tabs Colour selector and Colour schemes On the right side the current colour is shown with its parameters as well as a scheme of matching colours and your user defined col ours The current colour is highlighted by a square on the Colour selector tab Colour selector When configuring a colour the following options are available Direct entry When entering a colour directly you enter the colour code in the field in the form of an RRGGBB code RR red GG green BB blue starting with a hash sign If you do not enter the hash sign it will be automatically added to form a valid colour code during saving You can also enter values for bright ness and saturation The coding of colours in HTML will not be discussed here further Please consult the corresponding technical literature Selection via the colour palette User guide for Web site administrators Page 43 Basic principles File management Here you can select the colour using the mouse Use the vertical slider to select the colour shown in the colour field You must select the corresponding colour hue in the colour field The currently selected colou
323. s for example that if you have a large catalogue structure you can elect to just display the most important categories for navigation purposes All the categories are dis played in the category list in the dis play area and the user can access them from here Allow display for The corresponding page canonly be Drop down menu called up by the configured user group Permit editing for This setting is valid for pages on which Drop down menu visitors can edit entries forum blog etc These entries can then only be edited by the configured user group Language independent name used for Entry field alpha Equipment the page For links the name of the link numeric which is assiged to the Internet ad dress It is shown on the title page of the browser Caption for page ele Language dependent name of the link Entry field Contact information ment in the corresponding page element alphanumeric for example in the list of the catego ries Text that is shown language Entry field Contact information dependently on the Web site as a page jalphanumeric heading in the navigation history and on the title page of the browser Text Texts Language dependent information text Text field Big and small things Description depending on page type complete your tool Some page types have a separate set Browsing is Texts section in which several text worth it fields can be managed For more on formatting see Wor
324. s and links Here you can format the texts and links in the content area The sizes are entered in pixels px For more on selecting colours see Colour selector on page 43 To configure special formatting click the corre sponding button Headings Here you can format the headings in the content area The sizes are entered in pixels px For more on se lecting colours see Colour selector on page 43 To configure special formatting click the corresponding button Page elements Page elements are functional elements that can be placed in all areas apart from the content area These page elements are used to insert various functions For more information see Page elements and naviga tion on page 181 In addition to making the elements available you can also edit their design to a certain extent by uploading images and changing colours New page element If your current layout and design does not contain all the page elements that you need you can add the missing elements to the corresponding areas Activate the corresponding area and click o The overview shows all available page elements Page elements that are marked by an asterisk have al ready been added to the Web site This display will be updated after saving To place an element highlight the associated check box and click Insert The element is placed in the ac tive area Active button Active button Right Image Buttons are areas that contain links You can u
325. s layout options for each page You can use these to select the best page layout See Layout on page 142 Save the settings using lel If you also want to offer the page in additional languages switch the language using the selection box This way you can see what language dependent data you still have to enter Ifthe page is part of a product catalogue you must also assign products to it This assignment can be done using the page browser or from the datasheet view In the page browser simply drag the products under User guide for Web site administrators Page 139 Contents Pages Preview the current page In the datasheet view use the tray to assign the products to the current page See Products on page 146 Texts can also be edited for the products in the page preview Once the new page has been configured as you want set it to visible so that your customers can see it too Save the page using kl The chapters Pages Preview belowand Datasheet view on page 143 explain the basics on editing the individual pages Pages Preview Page Content Pages Preview This area allows you to generate and edit the structure of your Web site and to edit the text directly in the page view The page is divided into the following three areas Multifunction bar in the upper area see Multifunction bar and content on page 141 Page browser on left Page preview on right The left part of the page shows the page bro
326. s previously reversed using Undo This function can be carried out as many times as you wish Ft Show or hide highlight for active area Editing help Commands This group contains functions allowing you to edit the structure of your Web site Table 88 Function group Commands in the multifunction bar Function Comment This allows you to create new pages Proceed as follows 1 Activate a page in the page browser The new page is then created as a sub page of the selected page Click the icon In the entry field enter the name of the new page Select the page type from the drop down menu Decide whether or not the page should be visible immediately Click Create The new page can be seen immediately as the current page in the preview Text fields can be edited immediately Other parameters can be edited in the datasheet view This option allows you to set the corresponding page as visible or not visible The visibility status of the page is indicated by the icon in front of the page name Call up the datasheet view of the current page see Datasheet view on page 143 Delete the current page The page is deleted from the view immediately Deletion from the site will occur when you save the changes for the current page Move up or down within the same branch of the site structure This allows you to define the sequence in which pages on a given branch are displayed The current page moves down one level in the structure It becom
327. s will be included in the index and will be found during a Google search Trusted Shops Page Marketing Trusted Shops Your customers require a high level of security for online purchases Certification from Trusted Shops www TrustedShops de ensures this security for your customers and helps build trust in your shop Along with checks for security and data protection Trusted Shops also offers a money back guarantee and com prehensive customer service Your shop is optimally prepared for certification with Trusted Shops The quality seal offers you as a merchant additional benefits You present the image of a professional proven online merchant and are listed on the Trusted Shops Web page There is a lower rate of purchase cancellations because customers trust the seal of approval Your shop is also advertised on the secure shopping portal The customer can click the seal This opens the Trusted Shops site and shows him the advantages and se curity measures of you shop You can find all relevant information at Atto www trustedshops com When the check is successfully completed you will receive a Trusted Shop ID from Trusted Shops Enter the Trusted Shop ID in the entry field Save your entries by clicking Save You then have the right to display the Trusted Shops quality seal in your shop There are two navigation elements which you can place on your Web site for this purpose For more information see Page elements and
328. s wqciesasincds rane eornnneoatiss dich 121 Variation products and cross selling cccecscsseececsceeeees 121 PrOGUCE detallS POltalScucsiscsorsatcaccreasdewadecalawescwngatesseeuencs 121 PrOGUCE Portals oisinnean an O A 121 OD A E E E E EE E E E E E E E ieaesnee 122 PROGUET BY DGS apoien arae E EES 122 Product type details General ssssssesssseesessessesosseeseeseseeseeo 123 Product type details Attributes eesssssseeseesessesoeseeseeseseesee 123 ALE b tes Detail Ssenari E E 123 Product type details LayOut esssseseeseesessssosseseesossereesesee 124 PIC CANIGSES onana a 124 Price lists Advanced SettingS cccccscsccccsceccsseccececcesess 125 Piicelistdetails General masin n eek 125 Price list details Customer groupS esesssessssescssesorsesesceseseses 125 Price list details CUSTOMETS ccccccsssrscsccnsvssescoccnscvscsccnes 126 Price list details Shopping basket discount cceeeee 126 Search SEALISUICS siccae n n a 126 Page 6 User guide for Web site administrators Table of Contents PROGUCE Tali o Sicaccisescenudediebuscwatedaeeand vbadseacnieaneiehiawbauidaad 127 Generalene aeaa E EE 127 SEIN a E AEE enna onan eon teaenttons 127 MpOrt and EXPO enana wassiaiensdenetaneccateseaonaieeaee 128 BME CICI DOTE sore a REANO ONNO IRE 129 Product search in the administration area ssseeeesssseo 130 TEX SEa Neena N apessacunssaaaacanbectasestseaetoves 1
329. scscececs 203 Dale dy EE E E AEA E E AA E AE A er eancs 203 Payment process from the customer s point of view 204 Saferpay tranSactiOns sssssesseesessesosseesesoesesseseesorserseeeesosse 204 Search for Saferpay tranSactiOnS ccsccccscececececscscseeceees 204 12 MUKOM E ein a a aa 205 Newsletter campaignS essssssssseesceseeeseesocssessoeseeesosseeeseseo 205 Newsletter campaigns Texts ssseseessseesssesoseeseesesesoseesesee 205 Creatine a Newsletter mmecnenanenan a 205 Newsletter campaigns Details General ssssssessssseseesseesee 206 Newsletter campaigns Details Newsletter ccecees 207 Newsletter delalls General s cccreswe seid eee ee ateers 208 Creating the newsletter CONTENT cccsecsscscescsscecescsecscescecescees 209 Newsletter details Attachments cccceccecsccecsccecscsececeeees 211 Newsletter details Recipients cccecscnscsceececscescsceecsceeees 211 Newsletter campaigns Details Addressees ceeecees 211 importins addresses socsrencaavecedsconeiicasbseweensevecddesnteeeduacseasedvestace 213 Addressee Seat Presna E R 213 Subscription from the Web site sssesssesesesossesesesessssesesesesesees 213 COUPONS esa a N 214 COUDOM Cain Palen General niine a a 214 Coupon campaign Validity eesesssseeseeseseescesersessesossereesoese 215 Coupon campaign Coupon codes ssesssss
330. se all further data transfer you conduct with eBay It is used among other things to upload offers query offer statuses and to download sales data You cannot exchange any data with eBay without authentication The authentication has a time limit and must be renewed periodically The system checks your authentication details on a regular basis If they are no longer valid for whatever reason you will receive an automatic e mail with a corresponding error report In order to receive this e mail you must set the default sender e mail address in the e mail settings For more information see ma settings on page 90 The following methods exist to receive a token for an account Request the token from eBay Click the Request authentication button The system tests whether a connection to eBay can be cre ated and shows the results If the test is successful the link Request authentication by eBay is displayed Click the link After this you must sign in to eBay eBay verifies the information and generates a corresponding token To transfer the token to your shop click Agree and continue on the eBay page You will be returned to the shop You will see confirmation in the authentication field in the eBay ac count details see Figure 22 Page 100 User guide for Web site administrators eBay settings Settings eBay accounts SandBox General Sales platform Ee SandBox Authentication Authentication saved Expires on OF 05 20
331. se these buttons to provide the links with background col ours or images If you just want the background to be an image simply upload an image for the button If you want the background to be a tab label for example you have to upload left and right hand image sec tions each containing the respective parts of the tab image In such a case you can upload the left hand section using Button and the right hand portion of the image using Button Right image In such a tabbed layout the active tab is often highlighted You can upload appropriate images for this purpose Do this using the Active button and Active button right image options Box A box consists of a header row and a list of entries or entry fields Examples of this are Sign in the Currency selection from listand Shopping basket overview with all items in box format User guide for Web site administrators Page 179 Design Multifunction bar and design You can upload a background image and configure a background colour for the entire box See also Uploading images on page 43 and Colour selector on page 43 Box header row This is where you define the background image and colour of the header row See also Uploading images on page 43 and Colour selector on page 43 Box width This is where you define the width of the box within the navigation bar Enter the values in pixels px Preview with selection of function group This function group is only displayed if the co
332. se this opportunity to conduct promotions or special offers Note There are two navigation elements for displaying promotional products in the shop Promotional products and Link to the promotional products These are placed on the Web site in the Layout area For more information see Page elements and navigation on page 181 In the page preview mode you can edit the category texts and texts of the associated products Page 150 User guide for Web site administrators Contact information Contents The following parameters are configured in the datasheet view General The general settings are edited as described in General on page 143 Save your entries by clicking Save Products Here you can prepare the products you wish to display as promotional products For more on working with the table see Products on page 146 Layout The table lists all the options that govern how promotion products can be displayed on the Web site The options are similar to the layout options for the home page see Layout on page 148 Select the corre sponding option and save your entries by clicking Save For basic information on displaying using the datasheet view see Layout on page 147 Contact information The contact information is an important part of your Web site and may be a legal requirement For example the German Teleservices Act Section 6 has required commercial Web sites to include a contact informa tion page since 01 01 2002
333. see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 To create a new campaign follow the steps described in Adding records on page 26 Save your entries by clicking Save Newsletter campaigns Texts Page Marketing Newsletter Texts You can configure and edit the texts that describe your newsletters here The language dependent text is displayed on the Web site above the list of newsletter campaigns It allows you to display information and notes on your newsletter campaigns for your customers For more on formatting see Working with text fields on page 35 Save your entries by clicking Save Creating a newsletter What should you do when you create the newsletter The next section will describe the individual steps in volved without going into too many details These details are discussed in the relevant chapters To create a newsletter and send it to your customers proceed as follows 1 Create a newsletter campaign see Newsletter campaigns above Allocate a meaningful name User guide for Web site administrators Page 205 Marketing Newsletter campaigns 2 Enter the details of the campaign Add a description to further explain the name and edit the sender data You must set the e mail address for test distribution For the basics about the campaign details see Newsletter campaigns Details General below Do not make the campaign visible until all data has been entered and tested 3 Create a newsletter see Newsletter
334. setting for the period of validity If necessary click Update immedi ately Remember the following Page 54 User guide for Web site administrators General settings Settings The page cache only applies to users who are not signed in Customers will not see the changes until after the administrator has started the update or it has been performed automatically We recommend that while setting up the Web site you disable the page cache option in order to apply fre quent changes immediately When your shop goes into ve operation click the check box and set the longest possible periods of validity Utilisation Page Settings General settings Utilisation Your Web site supports a range of functionality with defined limits The Utilisation tab shows you which functions are available in which scope and to what extent the maximum values are being used The symbols have the following meanings Table 16 legend for resource symbols Icon Description w The function is activated for the Web site x The function has not been activated for the Web site Status bar The status bar shows how much of a limited function is being used A red bar indicates that the limit has been reached If you have reached the limit or want to use new functions contact your provider Business hours Page Settings General settings Business hours On this page you can manage your usual hours of business These are the times or
335. sibility The visibility setting defines whether an object is displayed in the Web site If you activate Visible the cus tomer can see and order these elements in the shop If you deactivate V s b e the element can only be seen by you in the preview Using this feature you can prepare settings and functions for example for products and make them available to the customer at a later date You can manage the visibility using option buttons in the detail views or using the check boxes in the ta bles as in Figure 9 Click the check box of the element which should be visible in the Web site Save your entries by clicking Save Note Newly created elements such as products categories and so on are set by default to Not Visible so that you can first collect all the necessary data before the element appears in the Web site Navigation history The navigation history shows your current location in the application It contains the links which lead to this point according to the page structure Using the navigation history you can track the page hierarchy step by step An example is shown in Figure 10 User guide for Web site administrators Page 31 Basic principles Attribute types Product types Jacket Size General Value selection Size Text with value selection Figure 10 example of navigation history In this example you are currently located in the detail view of a product attribute Clicking J acket takes you to the d
336. sired file in your file system and confirm by clicking Open In some instances you can also enter the filenames directly in an en try field a To delete the current image click the icon Notes on background images Matching templates are loaded for the background images in each style You can replace these with your own images If you delete your own images the template is reloaded automatically If you do not want a background image at all you must delete the template image too Do this by clicking Delete template which is then displayed When the template has been deleted the name of this link changes to Restore template Click this link to restore the default template for the background image without having to search for file names Note If you set both a background colour and a background image the background image will always be on top of the background colour Therefore if you want to display the colour delete the background image If the background is to be filled completely the image must be resized to fit the area or you can activate le image Tile image Background images can either be displayed as a single image or repeatedly displayed so that the back ground of the entire page is filled This arranges copies of the image next to and below each other until they fit the whole page Select Yes if the image should fill the whole page Colour selector The colour selector is a tool used to help select colour
337. site administrators Search the Web site Basic principles Click Next or Back to open the next or the previous page 4 Settings for your shop Here you determine the tax model according to which prices are displayed and calculated in the shop and and the tax model used when entering prices in the administration area For more on the tax model see also Jax model on page 61 You also have to enter data such as the VAT registration number etc Your shop statistics will be collected and reported by etracker If you have not yet configured etracker an etracker account can be set up here automatically To do this select the relevant check box and enter a password For more on etracker statistics see etracker statistics on page 226 Click Next or Back to open the next or the previous page 5 Finish The information you entered is displayed on this page Click Back to edit the information again or Finish to apply the information Once this has been done the home page for your Web site is displayed in a new window using the design you have selected On the administration page you will see a page with suggestions for the next steps Caution When you apply the data by clicking Finish the existing data in the fields mentioned previ ously will be overwritten Fields in which you did not enter any values will not overwrite the existing data Search the Web site A search function on the Web site is provided to allow visitors
338. spam in the Administration area You can then block these posts from being displayed You can create new topics in the page preview The following parameters are configured in the datasheet view General The general settings are edited as described in General on page 143 Save your entries by clicking Save Topics The table lists all the topics in this forum Click the ID to display the details of the topic See also Topics Details below You can sort the table by column For more details see Sorting using column headings on page 28 To create a new post proceed as described in Adding records on page 26 To delete a post follow the steps described in Deleting entries on page 26 Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 The following specialised actions can be performed Table 97 Specialised batch processing commands for forum topics Command Comment Delete Suspected spam The marker that identifies a post or topic as being spam is deleted marker Layout The table lists all the options that govern the way that forum topic and post entries can be displayed on the Web site You can decide whether the entries are displayed in a list form or as a tree Select an option and save your entries by clicking Save For basic information on displaying using the datasheet view see Layout on page 147 Topics Details The topi
339. splays type and status A coloured icon means vi s b e while a grey icon means ot visible See also Visibility on page 31 The other icons have the following meanings Table 90 customer symbols Icon Description Call directly the list of sub pages for the page in this row amp cal directly the product list for the page in this row 7 The corresponding page is visible in the navigation menu Oe The corresponding page is not visible in the navigation menu See the Visible in page element option in General on page 143 The corresponding page can only be edited by certain users To open the details of a page click the name You can sort the table by column For more details see Sorting using column headings on page 28 You can set the sequence using the sorting key in the last column of the table For more details see Sorting us ing key on page 28 Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 The following specialised actions can be performed Table 91 specialised batch processing actions for categories Comment Set as visible not visible in See the Visible in page elementoption in General on page 143 page element User guide for Web site administrators Page 145 Contents Datasheet view Comment Results in an identical image with the same general data the same category and product assignments and the same lay
340. ssessessesoesosseeeeseesee 216 creatine COUDOWS rue a EN 216 Using coupons in newsletters sssssseeseseesoesesseseesoeseeeeseeseee 217 Product Portals iicncdubideuiasandevassndscvolestdoiesrsatiuaentadtenaseriessins 219 General Selno S srren aa EE E 219 Product listand CX POM isiiwcsssssccss nn a a 221 etracker TE DOING ceavewmesiee des siincdanspuaseamwearacaveuesesesantwacewetenadtenss 221 Pano Ordea duet acticeaeasuawecrsaceccetsesesteatewscuueecely sas ES 222 KEIKOO oora A E uses ubsewodeee 223 GOOSIE DiS Enaurenoa certo ches ta ior aa aac ee eueeaness 223 SUT SE SCL decoren aE N E Siebnctes 224 PFEISSUCIIMASCHING xi sactsunsisnsatawereaccustevesecasetescnpietesataeieriewess 224 SIOD DING COM iere E AE 224 Cla O ORTE aaa EE E E EEE E A E A S E N 225 Google registration eeesseeessossssossssosssoossseossssossssossssoe 225 trusted SNOP Sesericeriss pnr 226 etraCKEr StS rien R 226 GENEI lerene oi n a bassin ear weasuewene tents soteevouiate 227 Setting UP an etracker actouUnt creensa T 227 RESISTALION Gal susisices suisse tomo E a TN 227 SearcENneine TEPOMINS aici a e a eel 228 E A E E EA A P E E E EE S T 229 Product TECOMMENGAUIOINS dsnesasderdaetsesttesbetsatoanesheneaseaicess 229 Product inguine S uinnean a A 230 OBOY EE E ETENE AO OOTAN 230 E aE ET A A 230 Item settings eBay assSiStant ccccceccescsecseceecseceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 232 A E E AN EIEE ANIE EA E EEN E EI RR ETE EE E N 232 Page 10 User guide for W
341. ssssseses 94 OX EEO E E T E E E E 95 RESISTFALION ai a a a a a a 95 Product Setin Sarani rnn a aT 96 VENON en a a E TR oraeecmesentn 96 AUTO CrOSS SeW IN 2 iorra ea a a a ENEE 97 TOX ES aae a oa unmgseeeeectae 97 Product cCompalsO Meisene 98 eBay SCUUNGS nepre 98 Preparat OM eearri re E TE 98 Configuration of notification e mail ssesssssesesessesossesessesessese 98 General SetHNe S sennoina E E A 99 eBay ACCOUNTS veerra a E 99 eBay accounts detalls crererrior i a E E 99 User guide for Web site administrators Page 5 Table of Contents Authentication sepisan a a saasesieooaeenties 100 Template Sneon E 101 Templates detal urn Guess tacnemeenseee nal taseanuuetenes 101 6 PrO dHC O eea bascaneaaeescnuaee aise tne 103 Creatine anew DrodUCt comrrie ao an aai 104 Creatine a sinele Produ teinin R 104 Creating a product WIth variationS sssssssesseesessesesseesesesse 105 Creating a product Bundlecsiciisicersiercenii e ete 105 BUNGLE products cesson E eleo aaa 105 Notes about bundles ssssessssesesesscsessescescscescsceseseeseseeseseesese 106 Product details General cccecescecececcccsceccccesscecceses 106 PriceS invVentOry elIVETY ccccececcsceccsceccsceccscecesceceseecess 106 RETETOIICE UMI ideantouesos ates iensdveesonadansionoanatninninndsousiadeesscacsoas 108 COMDAlISON DICE Teea nc ceaecaced ec AEN 108 Delivery information csecsdacovcismacswseadeeduieciesvensdvecdedtsVendoareceatennsed
342. t In the middle of the footer the elements for page navigation are displayed The numbers are the numbers of the pages which can be accessed directly To do this click the number of the desired page The current page is framed with square brackets To page through the list use the arrows lt and gt to go to the previous page or to go to the next page If you want to go immediately to the last page click gt or to go to the beginning of the list click lt If the list is more than 10 pages long 10 page numbers will always be displayed along with the current page In order to see the next or previous 10 page numbers click one of the page numbers on the end of the list Search Searching is used to filter and group objects The results are shown in a table If searching is possible on the page a search box is displayed in the upper part of the working area An example of this can be seen in Figure 6 Page 28 User guide for Web site administrators Language Dependencies Basic principles Customer number E mail Display per page Resuts v ii LUStOMmMETS General F Customer number Hame Country Ey Customer group A E anid ma hi stermann hiar Dei tarhlar hler m stammer Figure 6 Search box The search box consists of entry fields and drop down menus Enter the terms you want to search for in the entry fields The entry fields adjust to the type of objects to be filtered For products there are product
343. t means that the text is shown during editing exactly as it will be displayed later You format the text not with HTML tags directly but using but tons with formatting functions This has the advantage for you that you can simply and professionally de sign texts without knowing formatting commands You can insert images links and tables easily Open the editor by clicking the i Edit text button for a text field This opens the editor in a new window containing the existing text from the field Long description han ll S tp E Format A Fort Size oe A MR New for 2007 A small drinking system pack with back cooling Because the backpack stands out from your back air can circulate and cool you A shoulder padding system and belt keep the weight on your hips where it belongs Total volume 4 litres Reflectors 870 g Colour orange granite Tiny MCE licence LGPL Figure 14 WYSIWYG Editor To close the editor and enter the formatted text in the first text field click Apply The individual functions are started by clicking buttons If you hold the cursor over a button a tag appears explaining the button If the button is greyed out this function is not currently available A function is applied at the current cursor position Tables or multimedia elements are inserted at this posi tion When formatting text select the text you wish to format before activating a function The
344. t connector feasy clip and a precise regulation Ein pfiffiger Kocher mit Bajonettanschluss Easy Clipi und prazizem valve For Camping 42 valve cartridges CW 270 and 470 can be removed for Regulierknopt F r Campingaz ventilkartuachen CY 270 und 470 k nnen zum transport Transport dimensions Approx 11 x 65x 55cm 220 g Transport auch abgenommen werden Transportmala Ca 11 x 65x 5 5 om 220 q Figure 7 translation fields The language of the text is set using a drop down menu and the translation is entered The procedure is the same for images and attachments Select the desired language and upload the correct files for this language The drop down menu contains the languages you selected in Languages on page 87 The language settings often require different formats for numbers and dates These are formatted accord ing to the regional settings which are selected while choosing the administration language An entry field is displayed to enter the price in each currency Enter the values in a format according to the administra tion language The prices will be displayed in the shop according to the language Date entry fields Date fields have an aid to facilitate selection of a day of the week and entry of dates in the right format This is a fold out calendar which can be opened by clicking the icon see Figure 8 Status Order no Time frame Display per page cAI Orders Inbox General L Order no Created on D
345. t is shown in the administration as a transaction number Google Checkout transactions Page Orders Transactions Google Checkout Once the customer has confirmed the transaction it is entered into the Google Checkout merchant admini Stration as well as in the list of Google Checkout transactions in the shop administration The order status is then set to nvo ced The table lists all the Google checkout transactions The risk information for this transaction is displayed using the icon after the transaction number This data is transferred from Google AVS means Address Verification System and CVN means Cardholder Verification Number Page 198 User guide for Web site administrators ClickandBuy Orders The columns Delivery status and Payment status indicate the current status of the transaction This status can be set in the Google Checkout Merchant Administration Open your Google Checkout Merchant account manually or using the Display Google orders link The customer receives an alert mail with every status change You must activate the corresponding e mail events before doing this For more information see mail settings on page 90 As soon as you have set a status in the Google Checkout administration it is updated in the shop admini Stration as well Search for Google Checkout transactions Using the search you can group and filter your Google Checkout transactions You can also search specifi cally for Google Checkout t
346. t is the online payment system from Google For this payment method the shopping bas ket data is transferred to the external system All additional steps of the order process are conducted there The customer selects his payment method enters a delivery address and finalises the order there More detailed information about this topic including a list of countries that can use Google Checkout is available at Attp checkout google com sell The prerequisite for you is that you register with and create a merchant account at Google You can register with Google in the shop administration Read about the settings and necessary parameters in Google Checkout payment method on page 77 Payment process from the customer viewpoint Once the customer has placed products in the shopping basket he can start Google Checkout Buttons for this are available in the mini shopping basket and in the shopping basket itself The customer is transferred to the Google Checkout page and must register there If he does not yet have an account this is created automatically after entering the credit card data At Google Checkout the customer sets the payment and delivery data and finalises the payment The order is filled out with Google data and not with the data that are in the shop system After successful completion a link is shown to the customer that allows him to return to the shop He re ceives an order confirmation e mail with the Google order number tha
347. t the current page Download the guide as a pdf User guide for Web site administrators Active button Save Basic principles Short info Short info is a way of receiving specific help for individual elements on a page such as entry fields or drop down menus Tips about usage or entering information are displayed in the Short info This sort of Help is available ifthe icon is displayed after the element in question Hold the cursor over the icon to display the Help window Related topics The current page may contain links to related topics on other pages functions or settings which are related to the current page These references are displayed in a special display area see Figure 5 Related topics Financing Set smallest amounts duration and interest rates to allow deferred payment Dependencies Determine which delivery methods are offered to the customer if he selects this payment method Countries Set which countries you would like to offer inthe country selection section of the order process Regions Create regions and assign these to countries to limit their usage for billing addresses Figure 5 Related topics Using these links you can open the specified page immediately Active button Save In the application Save is an active button This means that the button can only be used when a value has been changed on the current page and saving is necessary As long as the values on the pag
348. tall this after it has been received Follow the instructions provided by UPS Creating the UPS tracking number To create the UPS tracking number the packing slip must be exported and opened in WorldShip A shop address is necessary for this The packing slip cannot be exported without this address If your shop ad dress does not satisfy the UPS requirements you will receive a relevant notification with a link to the shop address Proceed as follows 1 If all information is correct export the information by clicking Export Choose a place to save the file and a name for the export file 2 Start WorldShip and activate the Import function in the File menu 3 Enter the name of the export file for the import file name Either enter the name of the file with its path directly or click Browse to search for the file Enter the remaining parameters according to the instruc tions in WorldShip User guide for Web site administrators Page 191 Orders Orders Documents 4 Since the file always contains a header you need to select the First row contains field names check box 5 To import information correctly you must select the corresponding data and map the field names in the import file to the internal WorldShip field names when you first import a file If the language in your shop administration when exporting the file is the same as the language of your WorldShip software the field names will also be the same This makes mapping s
349. tered into the list of Atos Worldline transactions in the shop administration No status is set for the order in the shop The table lists all the Atos Worldline transactions A transaction number is shown if the authorisation was successful The code shows the transaction result 00 means that the authorisation was accepted Search for Atos Worldline transactions Using the search you can group and filter your Atos Worldline transactions You can also search for Atos Worldline transaction numbers and authorisation IDs The advanced search also supports searching by transaction type Page 200 User guide for Web site administrators Soforttiberweisung Orders Otherwise searching for Atos Worldline transactions is identical to the general search for all orders For basic information on using the search function see Search on page 28 Sofortuberweisung Soforttiberwe sung is an online payment system from the Payment Network AG company This method al lows the order amount to be transferred directly from the customer s online banking account to your mer chant account This payment method is certified by the TUV and boasts TUV audited transaction security Once the transaction has been completed successfully you receive a notification and ship the goods im mediately This means you can offer your customers reduced delivery lead times More detailed information about this topic is available at www sofortueberwe sung de or http www Di
350. the administrator can add addressees to newsletter campaigns You can do so through the following methods Direct entry of customer name and an e mail address This possibility is best for addressees that are not registered customers Direct entry using customer number Add all customers of a specific customer group Add from tray Importing addressees see mporting addressees on page 213 Basic information on creating new entries in the table is available in Adding records on page 26 Save your entries by clicking Save Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 The following specialised actions can be performed Table 137 specialised batch processing actions for addressee administration Command Comment Subscribe Status is set to Subscribed Unsubscribe Status is set to Unsubscribed Delete This cancels the assignment of registered visitors to the campaign Unregistered visitors are deleted from the system for this campaign Caution Deleting this also deletes the Subscription status subscribed or unsubscribed for the cor responding customer If one of the customers is added to the campaign later the status is automatically set to subscribed This can lead to legal problems if a customer receives a newsletter from which he had actually unsubscribed Think about this before deleting a customer from the addressee list
351. the customer contact e mail To enable customers to be able to use the customer contact form you must place a contact form as a page element on your Web site see Page elements and navigation on page 181 The contact form is only shown on the Web site if a recipient address is inserted for the e mail event Shopping basket settings Here you can configure the behaviour of the shopping basket by certain events and define basic settings for the order process Shopping basket Page Settings Shopping basket settings Shopping basket You can set the following commands and settings Add to shopping basket command Set the command is run after the customer has added an object to the shopping basket The following op tions are possible Table 56 Options for add to shopping basket Option Comment Does not change the current The customer remains on the current page view Opens the shopping basket The shopping basket is displayed to the customer Adding a duplicate product This option allows you to configure what happens to a product in the shopping basket when an identical product is added The following options are possible Table 57 options for adding a duplicate product Option Comment increases the number in the The number of the product already in the shopping basket increases accord shopping basket ingly replaces the product inthe The product in the basket is replaced by the new product shopping b
352. the design template consists of several basic colours there is a selection option for each colour For more on selecting colours see Co our selector on page 43 You can define the font for the entire Web site using the Fonfoption The con setoption allows you to select a matching set of icons for the Web site For more information see con set on page 178 Template You can select a template for your Web site here All other design settings will be overwritten Use the function nsert page elementto place additional page elements in any area of the page See also Page elements and navigation on page 181 User guide for Web site administrators Page 183 Design Quick Design If you are happy with the basic settings but wish to customise individual areas further you should read the chapter Design basics on page 171 and following Page 184 User guide for Web site administrators Orders 11 Orders Page Orders Orders Opening the page by clicking Inbox displays the new orders to you New orders are orders for which the Viewed status has not been set You must use the search function to display additional orders see Search on page 186 Note The last status set is always shown for the order in the table The symbols have the following meanings Table 116 legend for order icons Description Order will be opened in display mode The Viewed status is not set Order will be opened in display mode The Viewed
353. the item the actual values for the product are then used The placeholders are located to the right of the text field To insert a placeholder simply click its name The placeholder is inserted at the current cursor position Save your entries by clicking Save Templates details The various fields have the following meanings User guide for Web site administrators Page 101 Settings eBay settings Table 64 general fields for eBay templates Field name Description Field type Example Name Entry field alpha MyDesign numeric Item text Presentation of the item which is dis Text field lt td width 680 played on eBay align center gt For more on formatting see Working lt h1 gt Name lt h1 gt with text fields on page 35 lt p Description lt p The placeholders in the box to the right a of the sale text are used to include product data Position the cursor and click the desired placeholder When the item is offered the placeholders are replaced with current information Instructions about using these templates with your eBay offers are available in the description of the eBay assistant in tle on page 232 Note Due to security reasons eBay restricts the use of active page contents such as JavaScript Flash and so on If you use such elements in your templates it is possible that your pages will not be dis played properly on eBay For this reason check how your items on eBay are displayed and mak
354. the respective chapter If there are more records in a table than can be displayed on one page the display can be managed using paging see Paging on page 28 The functions are explained individually below Adding records The following methods are available for creating new records Manual record entry The last row in the table has a yellow background Instead of entries there are entry fields and in some cases drop down menus Enter the information in the fields and save by clicking Save It is possible that the record is inactive and not yet visible Click the name to edit the details and set the record to visible This will activate it Add information from the tray If you can add information from the tray to the table the last row in the table with a yellow background takes the form of a link for example LS Add products from tray Click the link to insert the records For more on working with the tray see ray on page 21 Which methods you can use are determined by the table Working with Entries You can modify entries in the following ways manual modification in the table If multiple or individual entries are shown in entry fields their value can be modified here directly Save your entries by clicking Save open the detail view and modify the entries in the detail view If the ID is shown as a link in the entry click this link to open the detail view Modify the information in the detail view Save your entr
355. the search tool If the manual confirmation option is active you must check and confirm each appoint ment individually so that the confirmation e mail is sent to the customer If required you can change the appointment times in the appointment details at any time or also cancel the appointment See also Appointment details on page 170 Once that is done the appointments are entered into the calendar and confirmed with the customer Booking system settings Page Booking system Resources Here you can edit the default settings that apply for all resources as long as specific settings have not been defined for an individual resource The various fields have the following meanings Table 105 Fields for general resource settings Field name Description Field type Example Confirmation of ap pointments by admin istrator is required The appointment is only considered to Option button be entered or reserved It is not yet binding The confirmation must be issued manually using a check box in the ap pointment details Minimum period for Lead time Entry field numeric 2 day s agreement of ap This is the time before an appointment pointment starts up until which the appointment can still be reserved i e creating a buffer period between the end of regis tration and the start of the appoint ment The time units are defined in a drop down menu Minimum period for This is the minimum am
356. this stage of the setup process is that you check the existing sample content for its appropriateness for your requirements and make any modifications you need 4 Check place the main page elements Page elements represent the functionality of the Web pages they are the means by which your customers can operate the various functions and browse your site These page elements include for example Link to Terms and Conditions and Privacy Policy The categories tree ora list of categories that provides access to individual product categories and products The Search function User guide for Web site administrators Page 15 Quickstart The sign in function for registered users Functions to switch language and currency Shopping basket What you activate all depends on what you want to offer your customers on the Web site Depending on the topic you have selected the most important associated page elements will be displayed on each Web page You will get information on the basic principles of design and working with page elements in Des gn on page 171 and Page elements and navigation on page 181 To view an overview of all available page elements proceed as follows 1 Click Quick design to start 2 Move to the header and click Insert page element 5 Modify the design Your selection of a topic for the site determined the matching site design If required you now have many options for modifying the design The section D
357. ties for creating a new product Creating a single product see Creating a single product below Creating a product with variations see Creating a product with variations on page 105 Creating a product bundle see Creating a product bundle on page 105 Creating a single product The following methods exist for creating a new single product Direct entry in the table The New Product function in the sub menu The entry fields in the last row of the table are available for direct entry Proceed as described in Adding re cords on page 26 and save your entries by clicking Save The following specifications apply to products created in the table directly the product number is a required field the name entered is assigned to the language of the administration the price entered is valid for the currency displayed in the table the new product is set to Wot visible the new product is not assigned to a category the default product type is assigned to the new product You can edit all remaining parameters in the product details see Product details General on page 106 If you create a product using the context menu you will be forwarded to a page where you can enter the general product details First enter a unique value in the Product numberfield A product cannot be saved without a valid number Repeated numbers are rejected by the system Having done this enter additional general information see Product d
358. ties for payment methods on page 69 and Payment method with PayPal on page 75 and PayPal on page 195 Basis for payment methods using credit cards via PayPal This allows the customer to use the PayPal payment system to pay by credit card For more details see General properties for payment methods on page 69 and PayPal Pro payment method on page 75 and PayPal Pro on page 196 Basis for payment methods using PayPal This allows the customer to use the PayPal payment method For more de tails see General properties for payment methods on page 69 and PayPal Express payment method on page 76 and PayPal Express on page 197 Basis for payment methods using Google This allows the customer to use the Google payment method For more de tails see General properties for payment methods on page 69 and Google Checkout payment method on page 7 and Google Checkout on page 198 Basis for payment methods using ClickandBuy This allows the customer to use the ClickandBuy payment system For more details see General properties for payment methods on page 69 and ClickandBuy payment method on page 78 and ClickandBuy on page 199 User guide for Web site administrators Page 67 Settings Atos Worldline Sofortiiberweisung HSBC Moneybookers Saferpay Delivery and payment Basis for payment methods using Atos Worldline This allows the customer to use the Atos Origin Group s payment system For more details see General pr
359. tion ho A Milestones T Page cache Up to date Orders Customers Products Content Appointment management Design Marketing setings Hep Welcome to the administration The latest product news market trends and tips for your success in e commerce Orders Manage customer orders Create documents such as invoices and packing slips Products Prepare your products for presentation with texts and images Organise your inventory gt Product types Price lists gt Search statistics Product rating Appointment management Offer the option of booking appointments via the Web site Marketing Announce your offers in the Internet Win and keep customers gt Newsletter Coupons Product portals etracker Statistics eBay items 4 Trusted Shops gt SafeBuy gt Shoplupe Help You will always receive relevant help while you work Find out how to receive this help First steps cz 4 Contents Gc Figure 4 Access to the Help centre JN e gt subscribe to the ePages customer newsletter now Customers The customer database contains all addresses and access data Search by criteria such as customer groups or purchase volumes Content Organize your products into categories Supplement your site with your own content such as news and upcoming events gt Promotional products gt Contact information Terms and Conditions Design Design your Web site using various templates Refine your design by using images col
360. tistics Page Products Search statistics The search statistics provide an overview of the search terms used in your shop by your customers and how often they are used The table lists all the search terms your customers have used They are all written in lowercase letters because capitalisation is not considered in the search For every search term you can see how often it was used and how many hits it yielded You can sort the table by column For more details see Sorting using column headings on page 28 Page 126 User guide for Web site administrators Product ratings Products Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 You can evaluate the overview to adapt to the search terms used in your shop The following considera tions or actions are recommended Use the search terms as keywords for products that you offer in these areas see the Keywords for search engines field in Description on page 109 Use these search terms in descriptions or product names if possible Fill any existing gaps in your assortment by adding often searched for products Display products which are searched for often on the start page or in main categories so that your cus tomers find them immediately Decide if you wish to keep products for which no one searches in your assortment Product ratings Product feedback gives your customers the oppo
361. tle This is a Short description of the item Entry field alpha which is displayed on the eBay page numeric and also in the gallery directly under the name of the item Page 232 User guide for Web site administrators eBay Marketing Field name Description Field type Description Description of the item that is dis Text field alphanu lt PxSTRONGXFONT played for eBay bidders meric size 5 gt Deuter Hydro For more on formatting see Working 2 0 lt FONT lt STRONG with text fields on page 35 gt lt P gt Product information is displayed via lt P New 2004 Small the template drinking system backpack with Formatted sample texts for the descrip Drop down menu tion After selection these are imported into the Description field See also 7emplates on page 101 Caution Payment and delivery settings are lost if you change eBay accounts This is because they de pend upon the country platform and are imported again when you change Note Due to security reasons eBay restricts the use of active page contents such as JavaScript Flash and so on If you use such elements in your description your pages might not be displayed properly on eBay Save your entries by clicking Next gt gt Category Each item must be assigned to at least one specific eBay category The following methods exist for cate gory assignment Enter the category number directly in the Categoryfield Select the category fro
362. to monitor the efficiency of a portal connection Using statistics you can generate a cost benefit analysis for each platform This provides you with full control over your costs and a tool that will allow you to manage your work with individual portals User guide for Web site administrators Page 221 Marketing Product Portals To do this the etracker functionality must be available in the Web site administration Verify that the etracker link in the Marketing sub menu is active Contact your provider and apply for the activation of this function The etracker functionality which is activated for your Web site by default is based on the Basic services from etracker To configure an etracker campaign you must apply for the Advanced Services Open the Configuration in the etracker administration Open the Change service function Select the Advanced Services option and complete the process according to the instructions The basis for the reporting is a parameter you enter on the etracker reporting tab for each country plat form Each platform has its own parameter The parameter is linked to the products which are exported to the platform If a customer is forwarded to your shop through the portal the platform is recognised by the parameter and the transactions are evaluated by etracker The parameters can only be generated through your etracker account in the channel of an etracker cam paign You must create a channel in a campaign
363. to show the cus tomer the valid payment methods for this country Unregistered customers select their payment method and enter the required data Registered customers sign in at ClickandBuy The preferred payment method is selected for them After successful payment the customer is returned to the shop page The order confirmation will be shown there with the ClickandBuy transaction number ClickandBuy transactions Page Orders Transactions ClickandBuy Once the customer has confirmed the transaction it is entered into the ClickandBuy administration as well as into the list of ClickandBuy transactions in the shop administration The payment status is set to Paid The table lists all the ClickandBuy transactions User guide for Web site administrators Page 199 Orders Atos Worldline The Status column shows the status of the payment at ClickandBuy Use the Go to ClickandBuy administration link to switch to your ClickandBuy administration Searching for ClickandBuy transactions Using the search you can group and filter your ClickandBuy transactions You can also search specifically by ClickandBuy transaction numbers The advanced search provides a search by ClickandBuy status cus tomer reference number and BDR ID Otherwise searching for ClickandBuy transactions is identical to the general search for orders For basic in formation on using the search function see Search on page 28 Atos Worldline Atos Worldline is
364. tracts with each payment method provider You can very easily offer credit cards and local payment methods without installation costs and monthly fees Page 202 User guide for Web site administrators Saferpay Orders Simplicity for the customer Your customer can select his desired payment method without being a Moneybookers customer He sees the payment methods he is familiar with on the payment page The customer s data is transferred to the payment page for Moneybookers so that he does not have to reg ister there Another advantage of Moneybookers is that the customer does not have to enter any sensitive information such as bank details or credit card numbers in the online shop These are all processed by Moneybookers The company has an e banking license and was licensed by the FSA Finance and Securities Market Regu lator of the UK as an electronic money issuer to issue electronic money More detailed information about Moneybookers is available at Atto www moneybookers com You can offer your shop customers the Moneybookers wallet and all additional payment methods Create another payment method for each payment option The prerequisite for you is that you register with Mon eybookers and activate the respective payment options This registration can be performed from your shop administration Read about this and about the required parameters in Moneybookers payment method on page 83 Payment process from the customer viewpoint
365. tries by clicking Save To activate a new language select it from the drop down menu at the end of the table and confirm with Save Note The languages listed in the drop down menu are part of the installation If you need additional languages contact your provider Before you can deactivate a language you must make sure that none of the associated countries are set to Default and that all associated countries are set to Not visible Once these requirements are fulfilled you can deactivate the language as described in Deleting entries on page 26 The language will still be avail able in the drop down menu Note Note that for language dependent fields a translation can no longer be displayed if you delete the corresponding language User guide for Web site administrators Page 87 Settings Country settings Caution You must make sure you create and manage all the text for the product data and its associated contents in the relevant languages As soon as you have activated an additional language check all the objects products categories and so on for language dependent fields and enter the translation If the text data does not exist in the corresponding languages it cannot be displayed If you have set up more than one language for your Web site you can offer your visitors the option of se lecting a preferred language A corresponding page element is available for this For more on working with page elements see Pa
366. ts After the order has been placed the inventory for all the associated components is updated at the Same time Only products of the same VAT class can be assigned to a bundle The status Not for sale is taken into account for bundle products If one of the bundle products is set to Not for sale the entire bundle cannot be bought During import the bundles are imported as normal products The assignments for the individual prod ucts are not retained The unit price is calculated by adding the respective list prices of the individual products together Any price discounts defined in the price lists are not considered at this point As soon as products have been added the total of the list prices of the individual products is displayed next to the bundle price The price difference possible the saving is displayed Product details General Here you can collect basic information for your product such as prices units manufacturer information and so on The tab is divided into the following sections Prices inventory delivery see Prices inventory delivery below Description see Description on page 109 Attributes see Attributes on page 110 Prices inventory delivery Page Products product General Prices inventory delivery The various fields have the following meanings Table 67 Product detail fields Prices inventory delivery Field name Description Field type Product number Unique product I
367. ttribute This allows you to make sure that only the values you suggest can be applied to an attribute The following example demonstrates this A basic product is to be offered with various additional components In a Configuration attribute you pro vide possible configuration characteristics see Figure 13 Page 34 User guide for Web site administrators Working with text fields Basic principles Products Deuter Hydro 2 0 de_3201212007 General Images Categories Variations Prices Cross selling Portals t Prices Inventory Delivery Description Attributes Product type i E Edit product type Translation Wholesale Price Handbook i Configuration Camel back C Rain cover Figure 13 attribute type options When creating a product of this type the configuration of this product is displayed in the check boxes Working with text fields Text fields are entry fields where longer texts can be entered They are used to contain for example prod uct descriptions or the text of a newsletter You can format these texts to make the layout more attractive This can be done in the following ways Using HTML formatting commands in the text directly see Using HTML code in text fields below Using the integrated WYSIWYG editor see WYS WYG editor on page 36 The Edit text button above a text field identifies it as a field that can be formatted When working in the page preview there is also the option of using the
368. u can sort the table by column For more details see Sorting using column headings on page 28 Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 The following specialised actions can be performed Table 111 Specialised batch processing commands for appointments Command Comment Confirm appointment oom appointments can be confirmed at once An e mail for this will be sent to the corresponding contact person Cancel appointments Multiple appointments can be cancelled at once An e mail for this will be sent to the corresponding contact person Appointment details Page Booking system Bookings gt appointment This shows an overview of all the data for the corresponding appointment You can change the data if you need to or move or cancel the appointment To confirm the appointment manually highlight the Appointment confirmed check box When the ap pointment is saved a corresponding e mail is sent to the customer To cancel the appointment highlight the Appointment cancelled check box When the appointment is saved a corresponding e mail is sent to the customer Before the e mail message can be sent the corresponding e mail event must be activated See also E mail settings Events on page 91 Save your entries by clicking Save Search The search allows you to access specific appointments You can also filter by resour
369. uct Option After In the associated date field enter the date from which the product should be displayed as a new product To select a date use the 12 icon See also Date entry fields on page 30 The display will be activated automatically on the specified date Option Wo The product will not be specifically highlighted For sale This sets whether a product is avail Option button able for sale or should only be dis date field played Option Yes The product can be pur chased Option From In the associated date field enter the date from which the product should be available for sale To select a date use the icon See also Date entry fields on page 30 The dis play will be activated automatically on the specified date Option No The product cannot be pur chased Note if not available If you enter a date from which the Text field Available from for purchase product will be on sale a correspond 01 07 2008 ing text proposal will be entered in this field The text is displayed as long as the product is marked as not for sale You can change this text at any time For more on formatting see Working with text fields on page 35 Save your entries by clicking Save Note Trusted Shops warns against using company brand names and labels as keywords for a search engine It is recommended that questionable search terms are not used Questionable terms are those which are capable of being
370. ucts Page Products product Cross selling Related products Products that lend themselves well to being related products are products that enhance the functionality of the base product that are necessary to use the product or that make using the product more comfortable for example flashlights for tents and so on The table is comparable with the table in the Accessories section see Cross selling Accessories above Cross selling Alternative items Page Products product Cross selling Alternative items Page 120 User guide for Web site administrators Product details Portals Products The alternative items function is not so much about offering the customer product enhancements as pre senting alternatives for the chosen product You can use this function to show the customer similar prod ucts you are offering and therefore show him products for sale that he otherwise may not have ever seen In its basic functionality the table is comparable with the table in the Accessories section see Cross selling Accessories on page 120 We recommend comparing products of the same type since then these products all have the same attrib utes which make a meaningful comparison possible Cross selling References Page Products product Cross selling References The table shows an overview of the products the current product is linked with and the type of link The ID of the target product the product t
371. uctured hierarchies A subgroup of a catalogue Categories act as containers for product groups such as computers office supplies and shoes A field in a form which is selected or cleared by clicking it with the cursor It is used to make specific selections A small file containing text information that is sent from a Web server to a Web browser This information is saved on the hard drive and can be re trieved later Cookies are often necessary for Internet applications See also Session cookies A currency dependent format for price information The system formats the prices according to the set currency The status of the attributes If this status has been set the attribute or the value will be used as the default value until the user makes a different selection User guide for Web site administrators Page 237 Glossary Duplicate Entry field Favourite FTP HTML Link Localisation Merchants Multifunction bar Name Navigation bar Navigation history Option button Page 238 This creates an exact copy apart from the ID This is helpful for example when creating products from a template product if one exists from which a majority of the attributes can be transferred This is a field in a form where the user can enter information Web pages that are opened and used repeatedly A favourite page is saved as a link in a special folder and can be opened with a single click File Transfer Pr
372. um values and calculation basis The cur rent tax model is displayed for the prices see 7ax model on page 61 Fixed price delivery methods The various fields have the following meanings Table 24 Specialised fields for delivery using a fixed price AL Bar ul Description Field type Example Tax class Delivery price Entry field numeric 12 00 14 00 Save your entries by clicking Save Delivery methods with an exemption limit The various fields have the following meanings Table 25 specialised fields for delivery with an exemption limit Field name Description Field type Example Taxclass Dropdownmenu Normal Base price Price which will be incurred ifthe ex Entry field numeric 8 00 emption limit is not reached 10 00 Free above order The order limit above which delivery is Entry field numeric 100 00 value of free 130 00 Price Free above Here you can set how the order value is Drop down menu ___ See able 26 on order value refers to calculated above which delivery is free page 65 of charge to the customer Save your entries by clicking Save Page 64 User guide for Web site administrators Delivery and payment Settings The field Price Free above order value of refers to has the following options Table 26 options for calculating payment price Option Comment oe value refers to the total of the product prices in the shopping basket Products and coupons The maximum value
373. unt The various fields have the following meanings Table 83 fields for the customer account Field name Description Field type Example Customer number Unique number You can accept the number Entry field al 1001 generated by the system or use your own phanumeric Customer group When the customer registers and createsa_ Drop down menu Regular customer new account the customer group you Set in the Customer groups is set as default See Customer groups on page 136 Allow orders Order block for registered customers Account holder Entry field al John Doe phanumeric Page 132 User guide for Web site administrators Customer details User data Customers Field name Description Field type Example Account number Entry field nu 1234567890 meric Bank sort code bank code Entry field nu 13245678 meric Bank name Entry field al A bank phanumeric Tax model according to which the prices are Option button displayed and calculated on the Web site for this customer See also 7ax model on page 61 VAT identification number Entry field al DE 123 456 789 Merchants who can deduct VAT receive a phanumeric separate VAT ID number upon request Tax area o_o p down menu EU country Created on Date of registration Display Last confirmed Date entry for displaying the time of last Display verification Click Confirm now to enter the current date Internal Note Field for information and notes about the Text field alp
374. unt for each product the sequence for calculating the discount needs to be defined The individual discounts are calculated sequentially as follows 1 Calculation of the bulk price based on the product price this results in a reduced unit price per prod uct for the corresponding number of items 2 Calculation of the bulk discount 3 Calculation of the value discount The total from bulk pricing minus the quantity discount is compared with the limit for the value discount If the limit is exceeded the value discount is applied Product details Cross selling Page Products product Cross selling User guide for Web site administrators Page 119 Products Product details Cross selling When using cross selling additional products are offered in relation to a particular product These are ac cessories or related products The purpose of this offer based on related products is to motivate the cus tomer to buy additional products as well as the current product Manual cross selling is divided into the following sections Accessories see Cross selling Accessories below Related products see Cross selling Related products below Alternative items see Cross selling Alternative items below References see Cross selling References on page 121 The number in parentheses behind the section heading displays the total number of assigned products Cross selling Accessories Page Products product
375. us of Paid The only infor mation that remains is a note that the order was paid by credit card 3 Before the order confirmation e mail message can be sent the Order confirmation e mail event must be active For more information see mail settings on page 90 It is possible that a Conflict warning is displayed for an order This applies to orders that were paid using external payment systems A conflict occurs when the order value and the transaction value differ This dif ference can happen if the order or shopping basket is changed subsequently Such a change may include for example adding a new item to the order Since the customer has already paid via the external system the difference occurs and a conflict warning is displayed Editing mode To edit the order data click the Edit button This displays all relevant information in entry fields where it can be edited Delete functions are activated for the entries in the order list It is also possible to add new entries The various fields have the following meanings Table 119 Fields for order details in editing mode Field name Description Field type Example Quantity fEntyfield numeric f2 Delivery method Dropsdownmenu Payment method propdownmen Taxarea Dropdownmenu Quantity Product no Add a specific quantity of a product by Entry field numeric 3 directly entering the quantity and Entry field alpha jeg 100111011 product number Finish your
376. ustomers Page Products Price lists pricelist Customers In addition to customer groups individual customers can also be assigned to a price list The table lists all customers for whom the price reduction is valid Add new entries by entering a customer number directly or inserting the customer from the tray For more information see Adding records on page 26 Save your entries by clicking Save To remove a customer assignment select the entry you wish to remove and click Remove assignment Note Direct customer assignment has a higher priority than customer group assignment If one price list is valid for a customer directly and a second price list is valid over a customer group assignment the customer specific price list has precedence for the customer Price list details Shopping basket discount Page Products Price lists pricelist Shopping basket discount Use this function to give your customers and customer groups discounts on their shopping baskets You can scale the price reduction according to the shopping basket value The shopping basket discount is displayed on the product detail page using the Price reductions link The table shows all the shopping basket discounts for the current list To create a new discount proceed as described in Adding records on page 26 Save your entries by clicking Save To delete an entry follow the steps described in Deleting entries on page 26 Search sta
377. vailable newsletters His data is entered into the fields and he is informed of the confirmation e mail He is then automatically subscribed to all newsletter campaigns shown Note this when using this page element For more on working with page elements see Page elements and navigation on page 181 Coupons Page Marketing Coupons Use coupons to offer your customers various price reductions Create a coupon campaign for each promo tion Note Coupon campaigns can always only be created for one currency To offer coupons for the same event using another currency you need to create a separate campaign The table lists all the coupon campaigns which you have created To see the details of a coupon campaign click the ID The Redeemed column is a good indicator of the success of your marketing promotion since you can see here how well the coupon campaign was accepted Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 Note All coupons remaining in the possession of customers after the deletion of a campaign which are not redeemed lose their validity and are no longer recognised by the system To create a new campaign follow the steps described in Adding records on page 26 Save your entries by clicking Save Coupon campaign General Page Marketing Coupons coupon General The various fields have the following meanings
378. ve your entries by clicking Save Customer attributes Page Customers Customer attributes Here you can manage the customer attributes you have created yourself This allows you to collect and analyse additional information about your customers which is not collected using the standard attributes For more information about using these attributes and the standard attributes see Registration on page 58 The additional attributes are only available for registered customers The table contains a list of the attributes you have created Click the ID to view the details of an attribute You can set the sequence using the sorting key in the last column of the table For more details see Sorting using key on page 28 To create a new attribute proceed as described in Adding records on page 26 For more information about attribute types see Attribute types on page 32 Save your entries by clicking Save To delete an attribute proceed as described in Deleting entries on page 26 Page 136 User guide for Web site administrators Search Customers Caution When you delete an attribute all the customer data saved in this attribute is also deleted Customer attributes Details Page Customer attributes customer attribute The various fields have the following meanings Table 85 attribute detail fields Field name Description Field type Example Entry field alpha Contact Info numeric Type isla EEE Name us
379. which the entry was submitted is also displayed You can sort the table by column For more details see Sorting using column headings on page 28 You can also create your own entries here To create a new entry proceed as described in Adding records on page 26 To delete an entry follow the steps described in Deleting entries on page 26 Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 The following specialised actions can be performed Table 102 Specialised batch processing commands for guestbook entries Command Comment Delete Suspected spam The marker that identifies an entry as being spam is deleted marker Save your entries by clicking Save Image gallery The image gallery allows you to show photographs on your Web site Alongside a simple image list the im ages are also displayed in a slideshow that can be controlled by the viewer The page preview allows you to upload images and edit text elements see Pages Preview on page 140 The following parameters are configured in the datasheet view User guide for Web site administrators Page 157 Contents Image gallery General In addition to some settings that are valid for all pages see General on page 143 you must also edit the following settings Table 103 Special settings for the image gallery Field name Description Field type Example The viewer
380. wing meanings Table 30 status of payment methods Description Payment method visible Payment method not visible Some parameters have not been set correctly The link forwards you to the settings of the relevant method Caution A payment method cannot be made visible until all necessary parameters have been set cor rectly To open the details of a payment method click the name You can set the sequence using the sorting key in the last column of the table For more details see Sorting using key on page 28 Batch processing commands are available to manage the table entries For an introduction to this see Batch Processes in Tables on page 27 To create a new payment method follow the steps described in Adding records on page 26 Save your entries by clicking Save Page 68 User guide for Web site administrators Delivery and payment Settings General properties for payment methods Page Settings Delivery and payment Payment methods payment method General The properties and parameters for the individual payment methods have different underlying calculation models The general properties are the same for all payment methods The various fields have the following meanings Table 31 general parameters for all payment methods Field name Description Field type Example Entry field alpha CashOnDelivery n Visible potion button button Defined as the default method Sj De
381. wn menu button displayed in the shopping bas ket Connection to Google These two entry fields are only avail able if you operate your shop through your own domain e g www xyzShop com If you want your own domain please contact your provider Google Analytics ID You will find the ID in the Analytics Entry field alpha Abcd1234 section of your Google account numeric In the case of problems please contact Google Google Adwords URL This URL can be found in your Google Entry field alpha http www googlea Adwords administration pages under numeric Conversion Tracking in campaign man agement In the case of problems please contact Google urchase amp script 0 Save your entries by clicking Save Note The Google Checkout button is only shown in the shopping basket if you have set the payment method to Vis ble Check the following settings under Settings Integration in your Google Checkout administration pages Callback method must be set to XML Shopping cart post security must be enabled ClickandBuy payment method The basics about working with ClickandBuy can be found in ClickandBuy on page 199 The various fields have the following meanings Table 44 Parameters for ClickandBuy Field Name Description Field type Example Create new Link to live system of ClickandBuy to Link ClickandBuy account create a new merchant account Page 78 User guide for Web site administrators Delivery and payme
382. wser It shows the structure of your Web site You can use it to create move and delete the various structure elements These structure elements are referred to as pages The following types exist Table 86 Page types Page Description Contact informa Page to display the contact information on the Web site see Contact information on tion page 151 Privacy policy Page to display the privacy policy see Privacy policy on page 153 Customer informa Page to display additional important customer information on the Web site see tion Customer information on page 152 Terms and Condi Page to display the Terms and Conditions on the Web site see 7erms and conditions tions on page 152 Promotional prod Page to manage products that are displayed in the shop as promotional products ucts see Promotional products on page 150 Business hours Page to display the usual business hours on the Web site see Business hours on page 153 Page 140 User guide for Web site administrators Multifunction bar and content Contents You can use these elements to construct your site structure as you wish The icon next to the ID displays type and status A coloured icon means visible while a grey icon means not visible See also Visibility on page 31 The right side of the page shows the current structure element in a page preview Some of the elements in the content area are highlighted by a dashed border and can be edited directly These include
383. xt and images are arranged Use the icons to select how many text fields and images you want to place on the home page and how they are ar ranged If the icons display indicate more text fields or image than are currently available on the home page these are created and can then be edited by you Sub pages Select here how the sub pages are listed Products Select here how the products are listed The selections available range from one to three columns or display products in large or small boxes The column setting does not then apply here Instead the number of products displayed in rows is dependent on the size of the box Note Ifyou arrange the products or category pages in more than one column these pages are dis played first from left to right and so on down the page This means that the first element in the multi column arrangement is on the top left the second to the right in the same row etc When all the col umns are filled the following elements are listed in the next row starting from the left Select the corresponding option and save your entries by clicking Save For basic information on displaying using the datasheet view see Layout on page 147 Introduction Page Content Pages Datasheet view Introduction You can define a splash introduction to your Web site This is an animated introduction that is shown be fore the home page is displayed Use the option Display splash before home page to spec
384. y Do you have any questions Call our toll free number at 0 800 123 456 We are happy to advise you Prices include VAT plus delivery Contact information gt Terms and Co gt Customer information gt Privacy policy Figure 27 Web site structure The following areas are defined Area 1 Header Area 2 Top Area 3 Left Area 4 Content area Area 5 Right Area 6 Bottom Area 7 Footer In addition there is the surrounding working area of the browser in which the Web site is displayed See Configuring the general page layout in the browser on page 173 If you want to edit an area click the mouse in the corresponding location This activates that area It is highlighted by a border and the multifunction bar displays the functions that can be carried out in this area In terms of editing and configuration options the areas of the site can be categorised in two groups All the areas in each group are edited in the same way The groups are as follows Header Top Bottom Footer see Horizontal areas on page 173 Left right see Vertical areas on page 173 Content area see Configuring the content area on page 174 Horizontal areas Vertical areas Content area The parameters for the individual areas create the complete design when they are combined Some pa rameters influence each other or are interdependent These side effects must be considered The following information should be helpful User
385. yed of the listed topics The available de signs for each topic are displayed 2 Select the design you prefer from those that are shown The design is displayed in a magnified view in the right column If there are variants of the selected design they are shown in the form of colour bo xes below the preview image 3 Select your colour variant The available degree of customisation of the selected template is displayed below the image using paintbrush symbols These refer to the possibilities available for customising the template If more paintbrushes are displayed you have more freedom to customise the template According to the degree of customisation notices about requirements or limitations are displayed When you click the preview image a larger illustration of the design is displayed in a new window 4 Click Apply to import the selected style into the table in the My styles tab In case you do not want to use a preconfigured design and you wish to create your own design from the ground up the 7emp ates group in the Business Web sites area is available This contains various layout variants that do not contain any design information This gives experienced designers the maximum level of freedom to customise There is also a Display all templates function This generates an overview of all templates Note If you do not change the name of a style and reload the style with the same name from the tem plates any changes you have made w
386. you call the Administration function up for the first time You can Start it manually by clicking Settings gt Setup assistant Any values already configured for various fields are entered as default settings User guide for Web site administrators Page 47 Basic principles Setup assistant Perform the following steps in the assistant 1 Topic and design Various designs are available for you to select The designs are sorted according to sector and topic Select one of the templates from a topic that matches your situation For more on selecting a template see Templates on page 176 For the basic principles of design and customisation see Styles on page 175 Click Next to open the next page 2 Pages and content The selected design has a basic structure of pages in which there is already a basic set of content The suggested basic structure of the corresponding pages is displayed on the left Each page has its own check box You can use these check boxes to apply a page from the template to your own Web site Do this sim ply by selecting the corresponding check box When a check box is highlighted then the associated page has already been added to the Web site You will see the current structure of your own Web site and its pages on the right After selecting a tem plate all the pages associated with that template are highlighted and copied to the current Web site Any pages that were already part of the Web site are retained I
387. you can see the risk information for this transaction This data is transferred from PayPal The AVS code Address Verification System displays the results of the customer data check The Status column informs you about the current status of the transaction Table 127 Status for PayPal Pro transactions Description Authorised The verification of credit card data by PayPal was successful The amount can be debited Transaction is finalised The amount was debited In the 7ransaction no Debit column the debit number is shown Rejected The verification of credit card data from PayPal was not successful The amount cannot be debited To see the details of an order click the order number Page 196 User guide for Web site administrators PayPal Express Orders The debiting of authorised amounts can also be triggered as follows Mark the respective table entries and click Debit The status will be changed Open the PayPal Manager by clicking the Manage transactions in the PayPal Manager link and start the debiting there After successfully debiting the status will be changed in the table Searching PayPal Pro transactions Using the search you can group and filter your PayPal Pro transactions This enables you to search by Pay Pal Pro transaction number Otherwise searching for PayPal Pro transactions is identical to the general search for all orders For basic information on using the search function see Search on page
388. you to edit the general settings for the blog post and the list of associated com ments General The various fields have the following meanings Table 100 Entry field for blog entries Field name Description Field type Example Visible Optionbutton Permit further com You can use this option to prevent any Option button ments further comments being posted irre spective of users permissions Heading Topic of the blog entry Entry field alpha What happened numeric today Text Content of your entry Text field Today we success For more on formatting see Working fully with text fields on page 35 Keywords You can allocate keywords for each Entry field alpha Diary journal entry Visitors can use these keywords numeric to search The keywords are displayed along with the entry If the user clicks a keyword all the other entries that carry this keyword are also displayed Use commas as a separator Save your entries by clicking Save Comments The table lists all the comments for the blog entry If visitors report that a comment is suspected of being Spam the comment is marked with the A icon As well as the username the IP address of the computer from which the post was submitted is also displayed You can sort the table by column For more details see Sorting using column headings on page 28 You can also enter your own comments here To create a new comment proceed as described in Addin

User guide for Web site administrators

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents